normam-05/dpc · brazilian navy directorate of ports and coasts maritime authority standards for...

BRAZILIAN NAVY DIRECTORATE OF PORTS AND COASTS

MARITIME AUTHORITY STANDARDS FOR THE APPROVAL OF MATERIAL ITEMS

NORMAM-05/DPC

- 2003 -

MARITIME AUTHORITY STANDARDS FOR THE APPROVAL OF MATERIAL ITEMS

AMENDMENT RECORD SHEET

AMENDMENT NUMBER

DETERMINING

DOCUMENT AND DATE

AMENDED

PAGES

AMENDMENT DATE

INITIALS

Mod 1 Ordinance No. 80/DPC of

October 05, 2004 1-5 and others 10/5/2004


October 29, 2004 1-B-1 10/29/2004


September 16, 2005 1-A-1 9/16/2005


February 06, 2006 2/6/2006


March 21, 2007 Cover, 5-1 to 5-3

and others 3/21/2007


September 02, 2008

9/2/2008

Mod 7 Ordinance No.129/DPC ofDecember 02, 2008

3-40 and 5-A-1 12/2/2008

Mod 8 Ordinance No.178/DPC of

August 24, 2010 2-44 8/24/2010

- II -

- 3 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 6

INDEX

Pages

Cover Sheet................................................................................................... I

Amendment Record....................................................................................... II

Index.............................................................................................................. III

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION 0101 - PURPOSE......................................................................................... 1-1 0102 - DEFINITIONS................................................................................... 1-1 0103 - PENALTIES ..................................................................................... 1-1 0104 - COMPENSATION............................................................................ 1-1 0105 - COMPETENCE FOR REQUESTING APPROVAL........................... 1-1 0106 - STAGES OF THE APPROVAL PROCESS...................................... 1-2 0107 - TESTS ............................................................................................. 1-2 0108 - ALTERATIONS IN APPROVED MATERIAL ITEMS………………... 1-3 0109 - RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE CONDUCT OF TESTS....................... 1-3 0110 - APPROVAL CERTIFICATES............................................................ 1-3 0111 - VALIDITY OF THE CERTIFICATE ................................................... 1-4 0112 - CERTIFICATE REVALIDATION ....................................................... 1-4 0113 - CERTIFICATE CANCELLATION....................................................... 1-4 0114 - DOCUMENTATION FILING.............................................................. 1-5 0115 - INSPECTIONS................................................................................... 1-5 0116 - TESTS DURING PRODUCTION (AFTER THE APPROVAL)........... 1-6 0117 - APPROVAL PROCESS OF A FOREIGN, NON-SOLAS MATERIAL ITEM ................................................................................................. 1-6 0118 - USE OF SOLAS MATERIALS (CLASS I) WITH CERTIFICATES

OF APPROVAL BY FOREIGN GOVERNMENTS............................. 1-6 0119 – INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THE APPROVED

MATERIALCATALOG........................................................................ 1-7

CHAPTER 2 - DANGEROUS PRODUCT

SECTION I - IMDG CODE 0201- -PURPOSE.......................................................................................... 2-1 0202 - APPLICATION..................................................................................... 2-1 0203 - LEGISLATION..................................................................................... 2-1 0204 - TRANSPORTATION - GENERAL INFORMATION............................. 2-2 0205 - MAIN DEFINITIONS ........................................................................... 2-2

SECTION II - PROCEDURES FOR APPROVAL OF PACKAGINGS

0206 - DOCUMENTS NECESSARY.............................................................. 2-6 0207 - APPROVAL CERTIFICATE................................................................ 2-11

SECTION III - CLASSIFICATION OF A DANGEROUS PRODUCT

0208 - RESPONSIBILITY............................................................................... 2-11 0209 - CLASSES AND DIVISIONS................................................................ 2-11

SECTION IV - LIST OF DANGEROUS PRODUCTS

0210 - COMPOSITION................................................................................... 2-13 0211 - SEGREGATION.................................................................................. 2-14


0212 - LIMITED QUANTITIES....................................................................... 2-14

SECTION V - SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PACKAGINGS AND TANKS

0213 - USE OF PACKAGINGS, INCLUDING INTERMEDIATE CONTAINERS (IBC) AND LARGE PACKAGINGS............................ 2-14 0214 - USE OF EMERGENCY PACKAGINGS FOR RECOVERED

SUBSTANCES .................................................................................... 2-15 0215 - INTERMEDIATE CONTAINER (IBC)................................................... 2-15 0216 - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERMEDIATE

CONTAINERS (IBC)........................................................................... 2-15 0217 - INSTRUCTIONS FOR PACKAGINGS................................................. 2-15 0218 - SUBSTANCES SUBJECT TO LIQUEFACTION DURING

TRANSPORTATION........................................................................... 2-15 0219 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR THE PACKAGINGS OF CLASS 1

PRODUCTS........................................................................................ 2-16 0220 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR PACKAGINGS OF OTHER CLASSES

OF PRODUCTS.................................................................................. 2-16 0221 - USE OF BULK CARGO PACKAGINGS ............................................. 2-16

SECTION VI - MARKING AND DOCUMENTATION

0222 - UTILIZATION....................................................................................... 2-17 0223 - USE OF TRANSPORTATION PACKAGES AND CARGO UNITS…... 2-17 0224 - MARKING............................................................................................. 2-17 0225 - DOCUMENTATION.............................................................................. 2-17

SECTION VII - MARKING AND CONSTRUCTION

0226 - PACKAGING CODE............................................................................. 2-17 0227 - CODE FOR THE IBC'S........................................................................ 2-18 0228 - MARKING............................................................................................ 2-19 0229 - CONSTRUCTION AND INSPECTION................................................. 2-20

SECTION VIII - TESTING

0230 - BASIC REQUIREMENTS….................................................................. 2-20 0231 - PREPARATION FOR TESTING........................................................... 2-22 0232 - DROP TEST.......................................................................................... 2-23 0233 - TIGHTNESS TEST............................................................................... 2-26 0234 - INTERNAL (HIDRAULIC) PRESSURE TEST...................................... 2-26 0235 - STACKING TEST................................................................................. 2-26 0236 - COOPERAGE TEST ........................................................................... 2-27 0237 - TEST OF GAS RECEPTACLES........................................................... 2-27 0238 - TESTING OF PACKAGINGS FOR CLASS 6.2 SUBSTANCES ……… 2-28 0239 - WATER ABSORPTION TEST............................................................... 2-28

SECTION IX - INTERMEDIATE CONTAINER

0240 - APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 2-30 0241 - INSPECTION......................................................................................... 2-30 0242 - MARKING.............................................................................................. 2-30 0243 - ADDITIONAL MARKING........................................................................ 2-31 0244 - REQUIREMENTS FOR METALLIC INTERMEDIATE CONTAINERS... 2-31 0245 - SPECIFIC TESTS.................................................................................. 2-32


0246 - PREPARATION FOR TESTING............................................................. 2-33 0246 - BASE LIFTING TEST.............................................................................. 2-34 0248 - TOP LIFTING TEST................................................................................ 2-34 0249 - STACKING TEST.................................................................................... 2-35 0250 - TIGHTNESS TEST.................................................................................. 2-35 0251 - HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST............................................................. 2-35 0252 - DROP TEST............................................................................................ 2-36 0253 - TEAR TEST............................................................................................. 2-37 0254 - TOPPLE TEST ....................................................................................... 2-37 0255 - RIGHTING TEST..................................................................................... 2-37 0256 - TESTING PERIODICITY......................................................................... 2-37

SECTION X - REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF

LARGE PACKAGINGS 0257 - APPLICATION......................................................................................... 2-38 0258 - MARKING................................................................................................ 2-38 0259 - BASIC REQUIREMENTS........................................................................ 2-38 0260 - TESTS .................................................................................................... 2-38 0261 - PACKAGING TEST REPORT................................................................. 2-38

SECTION XI - REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF

PORTABLE TANKS 0262 - DEFINITION............................................................................................. 2-39 0263 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS REGARDING DESIGN AND

CONSTRUCTION…………………………………………………………….. 2-39 0264 - CASING RESISTANCE TESTS............................................................... 2-40 0265 - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................... 2-41 0266 - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS..................................................................... 2-41 0267 - CASING BOTTOM OPENINGS............................................................... 2-41 0268 - PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE................................................................. 2-42 0269 - SUPPORTS, STRUCTURE AND ACCESSORIES FOR LIFTING AND

FASTENING PORTABLE TANKS........................................................... 2-42 0270 - MARKING................................................................................................. 2-43 0271 - INSPECTION............................................................................................ 2-43 0272 - IMPACT TEST.......................................................................................... 2-43 0273 - OFFSHORE CONTAINER TESTING ...................................................... 2-44 0274 - INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONTAINER TESTING.............................. 2-44

SECTION XII - EXPLOSIVES

0275 - BIBLIOGRAPHY ........................................................................................ 2-44 0276 - DOCUMENTATION................................................................................... 2-45 0277 - CLASSIFICATION..................................................................................... 2-45 0278 - CLASSIFYING PROCEDURE................................................................... 2-46 0279 - ASSIGNMENT AS CLASS 1..................................................................... 2-46 0280 - APPLICATION OF METHODS.................................................................. 2-47 0281 - DIVISION CLASSIFICATION ................................................................... 2-47 0282 - TESTING OF SERIES 5 AND 6................................................................ 2-48 0283 - APPLICATION OF TESTS........................................................................ 2-48 0284 - TESTING CONDITIONS............................................................................ 2-50 0285 - DEFLAGRATION AND DETONATION...................................................... 2-50 0286 - TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR SERIES 6 ................................................. 2-51 0287 - TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR SERIES 7 ................................................. 2-56


SECTION XIII - MILITARY EXPLOSIVES 0288 - PACKAGING............................................................................................ 2-56 0289 - TESTS .................................................................................................... 2-59 0290 - TNT EQUIVALENT ................................................................................. 2-59 0291 - CHEMICAL REACTION.......................................................................... 2-59 0292 - CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MILITARY EXPLOSIVE......................... 2-60 0293 - SMALL-CALIBER AMMUNITION .......................................................... 2-60 0294 - WAIVER OF CLASSIFICATION TESTS................................................ 2-60

SECTION XIV - IMDG VOLUME 3

0295 - CONTENT.............................................................................................. 2-60

CHAPTER 3 – LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES

SECTION I – LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES 0301 - PURPOSE............................................................................................... 3-1 0302 - DOCUMENTS NECESSARY.................................................................. 3-1 0303 - APPROVAL CERTIFICATE..................................................................... 3-2 0304 - TESTING SPREADSHEETS................................................................... 3-2 0305 - GENERAL PRESCRIPTIONS................................................................. 3-2

SECTION II - LIFEBUOYS

0306 - UTILIZATION CLASSES......................................................................... 3-3 0307 - REQUIREMENTS FOR CIRCULAR LIFEBUOYS................................... 3-3 0308 - REQUIREMENTS FOR FLOATING SEATS............................................ 3-5 0309 - REQUIREMENTS FOR HORSESHOE-SHAPED LIFEBUOYS .......…... 3-5 0310 - SAMPLE SELECTION FOR TESTING LIFEBUOYS…………………….. 3-5 0311 - SAMPLE SELECTION FOR TESTING SELF-IGNITING LIGHT AND SELF-

ACTIVATING SMOKE DEVICES USED ON LIFEBUOYS ..................... 3-6 SECTION III - LIFEJACKETS

0312 - UTILIZATION CLASSES.................................................................... 3-6 0313 - REQUIREMENTS FOR RIGID LIFEJACKETS ................................. 3-6 0314 - FLOATING AIDS (EAF)...................................................................... 3-7 0315 - BUOYANCY AND STABILITY............................................................ 3-8 0316 - LIGHT (ONLY FOR CLASS I JACKETS)........................................... 3-9 0317 - RETRO-REFLECTIVE TAPE (ONLY FOR CLASS I AND II

JACKETS)........................................................................................... 3-9 0318 - MARKING OF LIFEJACKETS AND EAF............................................ 3-10 0319 - APPROVAL THROUGH TESTS......................................................... 3-11 0320 - TEST REPORT .................................................................................. 3-12 0321 - REQUIREMENTS FOR INFLATABLE LIFEJACKETS……………….. 3-13 0322 - REQUIREMENTS FOR CHILD LIFEJACKETS ................................. 3-13 0323 - SAMPLE SELECTION FOR TESTING LIFEJACKETS OR EAF …... 3-13

SEÇÃO IV - PYROTECHNIC ARTIFACTS

0324 - CONCEPTUALIZATION …………………………………………………. 3-14 0325 - REQUIREMENTS FOR PYROTECHNIC SIGNALS ........................... 3-14


SECTION V - SURVIVAL CRAFT 0326 - REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFERAFTS.................................................... 3-15 0327 - REQUIREMENTS FOR RIGID LIFERAFTS ........................................ 3-22 0328 - REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS II AND CLASS III LIFERAFTS……… 3-23 0329 - REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFEBOATS.................................................... 3-24 0330 - REQUIREMENTS FOR BUOYANT APPARATUSES........................... 3-38 0331 – (CANCELLED ITEM) ……………………………………………………… 3-41

SECTION VI - RESCUE BOATS

0332 - REQUIREMENTS FOR RESCUE BOATS............................................ 3-42 SECTION VII - LAUNCHING AND EMBARKATION DEVICES

0333 - REQUIREMENTS FOR LAUNCHING AND EMBARKATION DEVICES ... 3-45 0334 - MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS OF EMBARKATION LADDERS ... 3-49 0335 - MARINE EVACUATION SYSTEMS............................................................ 3-50

SECTION VIII - EMERGENCY RATIONS

0336 - REQUIREMENTS................................................................................. 3-50 CHAPTER 4 - OTHER APPLIANCES SUBJECT TO APPROVAL

0401 - APPLICATION..................................................................................... 4-1 0402 - TEST REPORT ................................................................................. 4-1 0403 - FIRE HOSE ....................................................................................... 4-1 0404 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER....................................................................... 4-2 0405 - OIL DISCHARGE MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM AND OIL

FILTRATION EQUIPMENT ................................................................ 4-2 0406 - AUTONOMOUS BREATHING APPARATUS...................................... 4-3 0407 - EMERGENCY BREATHING DEVICE................................................ 4-3 0408 - PERSONNEL TRANSFER BASKET.................................................. 4-4 0409 - USE OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS ............................................. 4-5 0410 - FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS.................................................................. 4-6 0411 - SEARCHLIGHT.................................................................................. 4-6 0412 - LINE-THROWING APPLIANCES....................................................... 4-7 0413 - DAYLIGHT SIGNALLING LAMP........................................................ 4-7 0414 - CHARACTERISTICS OF VISUAL SIGNALS SUBJECT TO APPROVAL ………………………………………………………………. 4-7 0415 - SOUND SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT................................................. 4-8 0416 - NAVIGATION LIGHTS AND MARKS................................................ 4-8 0417 - IMMERSION AND ANTI-EXPOSURE SUITS AND THERMAL PROTECTIVE AIDS ........................................................................ 4-8 0418 - GENERAL ALARM AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM................. 4-8 0419 - FIRE DAMPER…............................................................................. 4-9 0420 - FIXED, NON-STRUCTURAL FUEL TANKS FOR SURVIVAL CRAFT AND RESCUE BOATS...................................................................... 4-9 0421 - SMOKE DETECTOR......................................................................... 4-11

CHAPTER 5 - MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE STATIONS FOR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES

0501 - CONCEPTS...................................................................................... 5-1 0502 – MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ESTABLISHMENT OF

MAINTENANCE STATIONS AND SERVICING STATIONS……….. 5-1 0503 - ACCREDITATION CERTIFICATE .................................................... 5-1 0504 - SERVICING OF LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES ………………………. 5-1


0505 - LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE SERVICING CERTIFICATE …………... 5-2 0506 - CONTROL OF SERVICED APPLIANCES ........................................ 5-2 0507 - PERIODIC REPORTS........................................................................ 5-2 0508 - INSPECTION OF LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE MAINTENANCE STATIONS AND SERVICE STATIONS.......................................... 5-2

ANNEXES

1-A - COMPENSATION TABLE................................................................. 1-A-11-B - APPLICATION MODEL..................................................................... 1-B-11-C - STAMP MODEL................................................................................. 1-C-11-D - APPLICATION FOR CERTIFICATE REVALIDATION....................... 1-D-11-E - STATEMENT OF TECHNICAL RESPONSIBILITY............................ 1-E-12-A - MODEL OF APPROVAL CERTIFICATE............................................ 2-A-12-B - COMPLIANCE REPORT.................................................................... 2-B-12-C - FRAMEWORK PROCEDURES OF A CLASS 1 SUBSTANCE

OR ARTICLE...................................................................................... 2-C-12-D - FRAMEWORK PROCEDURES IN A DIVISION OF CLASS 1……… 2-D-12-E - CHECKLIST........................................................................................ 2-E-12-F - STATEMENT OF ACCORDANCE...................................................... 2-F-13-A - MODEL............................................................................................... 3-A-13-AA - ( CANCELLED )

3-B - MODEL OF APPROVAL CERTIFICATE............................................. 3-B-13-BB - PRESSURE TEST................................................................................ 3-BB-1 3-C - ARRANGEMENT FOR FREEBOARD 9 METERS OR LESS.............. 3-C-1 3-CC - STABILITY AND FREEBOARD TEST.................................................. 3-CC-1 3-DD - STRENGTH OF A BUOYANT APPARATUS FLOOR PLATFORM….. 3-DD-1 3-E - COMPLIANCE OF A PROTOTYPE...................................................... 3-E-1 3-EE – BUOYANT APPARATUS FILLING TEST…......................................... 3-EE-1 3-F - CYCLIC TEMPERATURE TEST........................................................... 3-F-1 3-FF – TESTS FOR APPROVAL OF A LAUNCHING APPLIANCE OF SURVIVAL AND RESCUE CRAFT….................................................. 3-FF-1 3-G - OIL RESISTANCE TEST....................................................................... 3-G-1 3-GG - STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE WITH THE PROTOTYPE ……….... 3-GG-1 3-H - WATER ABSORPTION TEST OF THE LIFEJACKET’S

BUOYANCY MATERIAL ………………………..................................... 3-H-1 3-HH - TESTING OF INBOARD ENGINES FOR SURVIVAL AND RESCUE

CRAFT.................................................................................................. 3-HH-1 3-I - BUOYANCY TEST............................................................................... 3-I-1 3-J - MECHANICAL STRENGTH TESTS..................................................... 3-J-1 3-L - FIRE RESISTANCE TEST.................................................................... 3-L-1 3-M - SEA WATER RESISTANCE TEST........................................................ 3-M-1 3-N - LIFEJACKET DONNING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS ..................... 3-N-1 3-O - TEST OF THE JACKET'S LIGHTING DEVICE …………………………. 3-O-1 3-P - FINAL INTERNAL INSPECTION............................................................ 3-P-1 3-Q - DROP TEST........................................................................................... 3-Q-1 3-QQ - DROP TEST.......................................................................................... 3-QQ-1 3-R - TEST OF THE SELF-IGNITING LIGHT DEVICE….............................. 3-R-13-S - TEST OF THE SELF-ACIVATING SMOKE SIGNAL............................ 3-S-1


3-T - TESTING OF FABRICS USED IN INFLATABLE BOATS AND

RAFTS............................................................................ 3-T-13-U - TESTING OF LIFEBOATS……………............................ 3-U-13-V - TESTING OF RESCUE BOATS...................................... 3-V-13-X - TESTING OF FAST RESCUE BOATS…........................ 3-X-13-Z - TEST OF BUOYANCY UNDER DAMAGE...................... 3-Z-15-A - REQUIREMENTS FOR A MAINTENANCE STATION OF

INFLATABLE LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES …………….. 5-A-1

- 1-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 6

0101 - PURPOSE

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL INFORMATION

To establish standards, manufacturing requirements, assessment tests and approval procedures for materials, packaging for the transportation of dangerous products and authorization for the functioning of life-saving appliance maintenance stations, in compliance with provisions of Law No. 9,537 of December 11, 1997. 0102 - DEFINITIONS

a) Maintenance Stations - ship repair shops duly authorized by the DPC for servicing and/or repairing life-saving appliances and automatic release devices, ensuring the material's compliance with regulation III/20 of the SOLAS 74 Convention, as amended, IMO resolution A.761(18), Maritime Authority Standards, and other applicable regulations and specific manufacturer instructions.

b) Manufacturers - for the purposes of these Standards, the term Manufacturer will be used for those with production lines for materials, equipment or vessels with requirements that must be certified by the Maritime Authority, in accordance with the SOLAS 74 Convention, as amended, or IMO Resolutions and other codes applicable to the approval of materials, equipment and vessels, or by regulations from the Directorate of Ports and Coasts, being lawfully and technically responsible for the final product.

c) Material - every component, accessory, device, equipment or other product for which an approval by the Brazilian Government is required by national and international regulations, for application on vessels (including platforms), and in nautical sports activities.

d) Packagings - means the enclosures or containers intended for containing dangerous goods, regulated in the International Maritime Code for Dangerous Goods (IMDG Code). They are considered as material for the purposes of these Standards. 0103 - PENALTIES

Violations to these standards, either found at the time of occurrence or later, are subject to the penalties provided for in Law No. 9,537/97, which provides for the safety of waterways traffic (LESTA) and its regulation.

Depending on the violation’s seriousness, the DPC may cancel the certificate(s) or authorization(s) issued, as well as withdraw, or cancel, the registration record in the Catalog of Approved Materials. 0104 - COMPENSATIONS

All expenses with services provided by the DPC regarding the application of these standards, such as surveys, plan analysis, tests, equipment approval, opinions, expert surveys, issuance of certificates and others, will be compensated by the interested party according to the values shown in Annex 1-A and paid in accordance with the systematic in force. 0105 - COMPETENCE FOR REQUESTING APPROVAL

Only the manufacturing company may request the approval of a material.


0106 - STAGES OF THE APPROVAL PROCESS The approval process will occur in three stages, as follows: a) Analysis of the Technical Documentation

In this stage, the documents forwarded together with the application (Annex 1-B) are checked and analyzed regarding their compliance with the present standards, and the compensations are charged.

b) Follow-up of the Tests with Prototypes In this stage, the manufacturer promotes the tests based entirely on the testing

spreadsheet previously analyzed and approved by the DPC, with the follow-up of expert surveyors assigned by this Directorate. The model's prototypes shall be, preferably, picked up directly from the production line at their manufacturing facility.

c) Final Inspection and Certificate Issuance In this stage, the test reports are analyzed and a final inspection of the product is

conducted, subsidizing the emission of the respective Approval Certificate. The final inspection may be realized in stage b), verifying the conformity of the tested model with drawings and data contained in the Descriptive Memorandum.

The authorization process for the functioning of Maintenance Stations will follow its own systematic contained in Chapter 5 of these Standards. 0107 - TESTS

a) Places, Laboratories or Entities for Conducting Tests The applicant company will be responsible for the hiring of places, laboratories or

entities for conducting the tests required for approval of products, including the corresponding expenses. However, this hiring shall be previously submitted to the DPC, who will assess its adequacy, capability and technical conditions for conducting the tests. For such purpose, the verification of adequacy before the ABNT pertinent standards will be required, and possibly, also the accreditation before the INMETRO or other competent monitoring body.

b) Test Scheduling 1) The material approval tests will be conducted on dates and in places

established jointly with the DPC. The scheduling shall be confirmed with a minimum advance of fifteen (15) days. The flight tickets and proof of payment of the compensation shall be delivered with a minimum advance of five working days.

2) When a material lot is presented to the DPC for inspection, it will be implicit that the manufacturer has met all the requirements of the present Standards. The tests conducted by the DPC are not aimed at replacing or eliminating the need for tests and full inspection by the manufacturer, in order to assure and maintain the quality along the production line.

3) The DPC may inspect any area of the plant where the product or its components are being manufactured. The inspectors may also collect samples of the material used for production, in order to perform tests (see item 0115).

4) The testing instruments used shall be gauged with maximum error of 1%, with Gauging Certificates issued by accredited entities. Copies of the latter shall be available to the expert surveyor, and the instruments' minimum sensitivity shall be as specified below:

For pressure measurement (gauge pressure): 0.1 kgf/cm2

For mass measurement: 0.1 kg


For temperature measurement: 0.5o C For measurement of force: 0.5 N

0108 - ALTERATIONS IN APPROVED MATERIAL ITEMS

a) Any alteration in approved materials intended by the manufacturer, after emission of the respective Approval Certificate, shall be requested to the DPC.

b) After a technical analysis of the intended alteration, the DPC will inform the applicant on how to proceed, and may require a new approval process.

c) If the intended alteration implies changing the descriptive memorandum and/or drawings, and if not requiring new tests, such alteration may be introduced in the text of the new Approval Certificate. However, the same numbering will be kept, followed by "Rev." (revision) and a numerical sequence.

d) If the alteration has a wide scope, as for example, due to changes in standards, conventions and codes guiding the equipment's approval, the Approval Certificate will be cancelled. This will imply a new process and a new Approval Certificate number, and such replacement will appear both in the new certificate text and in the drawings. 0109 - RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE CONDUCT OF TESTS

a) The occurrence of any accident involving personnel or material damage, including third parties, resulting from the conduct of tests and assessments provided in the present standards, is of the full responsibility of the manufacturer or its legal representative.

b) The manufacturer, or its legal representative, is responsible for providing the necessary safety resources (following the relevant Regulating Standards) and first aid, for the conduct of tests implying risk to the personnel involved. 0110 - APPROVAL CERTIFICATES

a) The model of Approval Certificate for packaging is shown in Annex 2-A, and that for other materials and equipment is shown in Annex 3-A. The Approval Certificates will be issued in two copies, being one of them assigned as original. The original will be delivered to the Manufacturer, or its proxy (through a specific authorization), together with the drawings endorsed by stamp, as in Annex 1-C, and the Test Report (according to items 0261, 0320 or 0402). The Certificate's copy, together with one copy of all the process' documentation, will be filed at the DPC;

b) The Approval Certificates of packaging will indicate the characterizing UN marking, and the fact that only substances or articles compatible with the approved model may be packaged, following the requirements provided for packaging and the types and limitations described in the IMDG Code;

c) A copy of the packaging Approval Certificates shall be part of the cargo documentation and be attached to the Cargo Manifest, according to item 4 of NORMAM 08 Annex 2-J, and to the Statement of Dangerous Goods, a model of which is shown in chapter 5 of both NORMAM 01 and 02. The sender, when signing the Statement, becomes responsible for the package's content and for the compatibility of the carried product with the packaging itself.

d) The Certificate’s back may be used for entering data or other relevant information, and will be signed by the same authority who signed in the front; and


e) The necessary processes for obtaining Approval Certificates will follow the standards provided in section II of Chapter 2 in the case of packaging. For life-saving appliances or other equipment, they will follow the provisions of Chapter 3 as indicated in item 0401. 0111 - VALIDITY OF THE CERTIFICATE

After the Approval Certificate's validity has expired, the material or equipment, being or not perishable, manufactured after the expiration will not be considered as approved.

The Approval Certificates will be valid for up to 5 (five) years, counted from their issue date. The Certificates of Rations for shipwreck survivors will be valid for up to 2 (two) years.

When the emission is based on a Report issued by a DPC-recognized entity, the Approval Certificate's "valid from" date may coincide with that of the respective Report.

A non-perishable material manufactured within the certificate's validity will have its own validity considered as undetermined, while showing good working conditions, unless alterations are made in standards implying the revocation of its use (IMO MSC.1/Circ.1221, of 12/11/2006), for the latter is conditioned to its conservation state.

A perishable material, although receiving an Approval Certificate with a certain validity, may have the validity restricted by that marked on the product by the manufacturer, for the latter will be a function of technical conditions and production/raw material quality control, and it shall be met as such. 0112 - REVALIDATION OF A CERTIFICATE

The request for revalidation of an Approval Certificate shall be made according to the model of Annex 1-D, with a minimum advance of 90 days to its expiration date. The DPC, in principle, will require new tests for revalidating the certificate. Such a request, or even in the case of an ALTERATION, should be accompanied by the return of the original Certificate, its drawings and any other documents attached to it.

It is necessary to forward a notarized copy of the last amended Articles of Incorporation, if a change of ownership occurred. If negative, such fact shall be clearly informed in the application's text.

The revalidation of Approval Certificates related to equipment, large packagings and vessels with technical characteristics of strength, durability, non-serial production and without alteration of technical characteristics may be granted for a single period of up to 2.5 (two and a half) years. An inspection verifying compliance with the approved prototype will be conducted, besides a documentary technical analysis. 0113 - CANCELLATION OF A CERTIFICATE

If non-authorized modifications are found in the project of the tested prototype, or if the product is being manufactured with material or processes different from those specified for the approved prototype, or with poorer physical, chemical or bacteriological characteristics, or still, if the product being manufactured fails any specific test it is submitted to, the respective Approval Certificate may be immediately cancelled and the product removed from the Catalog of Approved Materials.


In the case of approval of packaging for transportation of dangerous goods, the certificate provided by the Maritime Authority will be cancelled if other processes or methods are used in their manufacture or in their internal or external components, bringing changes to their mechanical, physical or chemical characteristics in comparison with the approved prototype (see item 0103).

Certificates having their validity expired before a renewal is requested by the manufacturer will be cancelled. For their renewal, a new analysis of the approval process will be necessary, and consequently, the payment of the relevant compensation. The same way, if the assembly line is moved to another address without informing the DPC, the certificate will be cancelled. 0114 - DOCUMENTATION FILING

a) The approval process will be filed after six months, counted from the last demand or communication not met by the applicant. If the manufacturer is interested in reopening the process, a new application shall be presented containing the relevant documentation, and the respective fees shall be paid; and

b) Once the approval process is concluded, with emission of the Certificate, all related documentation will be filed at the Directorate of Ports and Coasts for 10 years, counted from the validity date of the previous Certificate. Once this period expires, the documentation will be incinerated. 0115 - INSPECTIONS

a) Initial Inspection During the material approval process, the DPC will assign Expert Surveyors to

realize an inspection visit to the manufacturer facilities, in order to check the manufacturing compliance with the provisions of present standards. This visit may occur on occasion of the testing follow-up.

b) Unexpected Inspection 1) The DPC may effect inspections at any time, with or without previous warning,

for checking the manufacturing facilities and the conformity of the serial-manufactured product with the approved prototype.

2) Depending on these inspections' outcome, the DPC may require the execution of new tests for confirmation of characteristics approved for the product.

3) The unexpected inspections may also be made through collection of samples in commercial stores or other distribution centers, for analysis. For this purpose, the manufacturers when applying for approval authorize expressly the collection of samples (Annex 1-B), and shall provide their replacement when receiving notice of the collection by the DPC.

4) The DPC may conduct the inspections provided for in the IMDG Code, aiming at verifying the internal and external conditions and the adequate functioning of packaging the periodicity of which are contained in the Code.

c) Expenses Expenses incurred with any of the above mentioned inspections, the follow-up of

approval tests and the possible tests/laboratory essays determined by the DPC for verifying possible non-conformities, will be of the manufacturer's responsibility.


0116 - TESTS DURING PRODUCTION (AFTER APPROVAL) The manufacturers shall conduct assessment testing on a relevant sample per

production lot, in order to ensure the maintenance of the product's characteristics in accordance with those of the approved prototype. The records of these tests shall be filed by the manufacturer and remain available to the DPC for checking at any time. 0117- APPROVAL PROCESS OF A FOREIGN, NON-SOLAS MATERIAL ITEM

a) The approval process of a foreign, non-SOLAS material will follow the same systematic adopted for a national material;

b) The process will start with an analysis by the DPC of the documents forwarded (application, descriptive memorandum, drawings, Approval Certificate issued by the country of origin and authenticated by the Brazilian diplomatic representation at the country the applicant is headquartered in, standards, and tests conducted in the original country) the copies of which shall be accompanied by a sworn translation into Portuguese (waived if in English);

c) The application shall be prepared by the manufacturer and accompanied by the Articles of Incorporation or equivalent documents, indicating the person responsible for the company nationwide;

d) For the necessary understandings and follow-up of testing in the country, the applicant shall appoint as representative a natural or legal person established in Brazil, through a power of attorney or contract with specific powers for such, duly authenticated, formulated according with the foundation of Brazilian Law. The representative or importer shall be duly accredited nationwide;

e) All documents of a foreign origin, accompanied by the respective translations, must be registered a the Registry of Titles and Documents (article 129 §6 of Law No. 6,015 and Civil Code article 224), in order to be accepted in offices of the Federation, States, Federal District, Territories and Municipalities or any instance, court or tribunal; and

f) In the absence of specific standards from the DPC, other standards issued by countries or entities of recognized reputation and technological knowledge may be used. In addition, tests conducted by IMO member countries may be ratified. 0118 - USE OF SOLAS MATERIALS (CLASS I) WITH APPROVAL CERTIFICATES

FROM FOREIGN GOVERNMENTS a) A foreign material may be used, provided that International Conventions, Codes

and Resolutions ratified by Brazil at the International Maritime Organization (IMO) require it to be of an approved type.

The Approval Certificate shall explicitly declare the supporting rules, the issuing Maritime Authority being of an IMO member country, and the idiom of issue must be English (preferred), French or Spanish;

The Certificate will not be accepted if there are indications that the material does not meet the purpose it is intended to.

b) The parties concerned about the use of inflatable life-saving foreign appliances in Brazilian-flagged vessels, shall make sure that there is at least one accredited Maintenance Station for Inflatable Life-Saving Appliances in Brazil, in compliance with these standards.


The emission of Approval Certificates by the DPC will occur only when the prototype is submitted to the tests provided for the national manufacturer and after following the same systematic.

0119 - INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THE APPROVED MATERIAL CATALOG The Approved Material Catalog contains the following information: a) Type of Material

The catalog is organized in alphabetical order of products by type of material, in order to facilitate its consultation.

b) Number of the Approval Certificate The catalog shows the number of the product's actual certificate.

c) Approval Certificate's validity date The certificate's validity date corresponds to the period in which the manufacturer

is authorized to produce that material or product (see item 0111). d) List of Manufacturers

A list with name and address of the approved material manufacturers, indicating the type of material produced.

Dissemination The Approved Material Catalog is available for consultation at the DPC website on

the Internet, address <www.dpc.mar.mil.br>, link "Segurança do Tráfego Aquaviário"; and Legality The Approval Certificates are official documents verifying the use of materials and

equipment contained therein, in compliance with the referenced laws. The information contained in the Approved Material Catalog has no legal effects. Its

content aims at facilitating the research by interested parties.


CHAPTER 2

DANGEROUS GOODS SECTION I

IMDG CODE

0201 - PURPOSE

The information contained in Code IMDG is directed to the personnel, industries and service suppliers, and of interest for the manufacturer and the consumer.

Manufacturers, cargo packers and dispatchers should observe the inherent terminology and doctrine of Code IMDG. It is for the DPC to implement the Code and care for its faithful compliance. The DPC may also establish alternatives similar to those provided for in the List of Dangerous Goods specifications, adopting the same safety level. 0202 - APPLICATION

a) The content of this code applies to ships under the Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (Regulation 3/VII of SOLAS 74/78 and its amendments), carrying dangerous goods through the maritime modal. It also applies to all ships, independently of type or tonnage, carrying substances, materials or articles identified by the Code as marine pollutant; and

b) Furthermore, the Directorate of Ports and Coasts may resort to standards issued by Maritime Authorities adherent to the IMDG Code. 0203 - LEGISLATION

a) SOLAS/74 - adopted by the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 and its 1978 Protocol;

b) IMDG Code - International Maritime Code of Dangerous Goods; c) MARPOL 73/78 - adopted by the International Convention for the Prevention of

Pollution by Ships, 1973 and amended by the 1978 Protocol; d) IBC Code - International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships

Carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk, adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee in 1983; e) BCH Code - Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying

Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk; f) IGC Code - International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships

Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk, adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee in 1992; g) Gas Carrier Code - Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships

Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk; h) Existing Ships Code - Code for Existing Ships which Carry

Liquefied Gases in Bulk; i) BC Code - Code of Safety Practices related to Solid Cargo in

Bulk; j) International Code for the Safe Carriage of Grain in Bulk (International Grain

Code) - a Code for the Carriage of Grain; k) BLU Code - Code of Practice for the Safe Loading and Unloading of Bulk

Carriers; l) ORANGE BOOK - Recommendations for the Carriage of

Dangerous Goods - Regulations (volume I) and Manual of Testing and Criteria (volume II), adopted by the United Nations Expert Committee of Transportation of Dangerous Goods


in 1956; and m) Guidelines for the Preparation of the Cargo Securing Manual.

NOTE: subparagraph b relates to packaged dangerous goods; subparagraph i, to solids in bulk; subparagraphs d and e, to liquefied chemicals in bulk; and subparagraphs f, g and h to liquefied gases in bulk.

0204 - TRANSPORTATION - GENERAL INFORMATION The transportation standards are specified in the following NORMAM: a) NORMAM-01 - Maritime Authority Standards for Vessels Used in Open-Sea

Navigation; and b) NORMAM-02 - Maritime Authority Standards for Vessels Used in Inland

Navigation. For packaged dangerous goods, the relevant legislation is that of item 0203,

subparagraph b. For goods in bulk, and depending on the transportation means, subparagraphs d or e of same item are consulted.

Noxious substances carried in bulk are addressed in four categories shown in appendix I of MARPOL 73/78 annex II, and their list is in chapter 17 or 18 of the code in subparagraph d of item 0203 (if indicated as III, it is not subject to classification as noxious); the jettisoning is regulated by regulation 5 of MARPOL annex II.

The utilization period allowed for transportation, i.e., the useful life of the packagings specified below, is of 5 (five) years, counted from their manufacturing date, except when a shorter period of time is prescribed due to the nature of the carried substance:

a) intermediate container of rigid plastic and composed containers with internal plastic enclosure, carrying dangerous liquids; and

b) plastic drums and canisters, carrying dangerous substances. 0205 - MAIN DEFINITIONS

Defined deck area means the area of a ship, exposed to the weather and intended for the placement of dangerous goods.

Canister means a packaging of metal or plastic presenting a rectangular or polygonal cross section.

Maximum Capacity means the greatest internal volume of the receptacle or packaging, expressed in liters.

Maximum Admissible Load, used for flexible intermediate containers, means the maximum liquid mass the container is intended for and authorized to carry.

Intermediate Container (IBC) means the rigid or flexible portable packaging presenting the following characteristics: a capacity of up to 3 m3 (3000 liters) and carries solids or liquids classified as pertaining to groups II or III; up to 1,5 m3 for solids of group I when in flexible or rigid plastic packagings, composed packagings or intermediate containers of cardboard or wood; up to 3 m3 for solids of group I when in metallic intermediate containers; and up to 3 m3 for radioactive material class 7. They are designed for mechanical handling and resistant to the efforts arising from the handling and transportation within limits stipulated through tests.

Composite Intermediate Container means a structural equipment with an external rigid frame, surrounding an internal plastic enclosure, together with other structural and service equipment. It is built in a way that the external frame and the internal enclosure,


once assembled, become one integrated unit to be filled, emptied, stored and transported as such.

Offshore Container means the portable tank used in the supply of offshore installations and normally carried on the open deck of vessels especially built for the activity of supply (“OSV - Offshore Supply Vessel”), being hoisted to those installations by cranes. Their design and construction shall follow the guidelines of MSC/Circ.860.

Multiple Element Gas Container (MEGC) means a set of cylinders, interconnected through a manifold and assembled in a structure, including the structural equipment for the carriage of gases.

Density means the relation between the material's specific mass and the water’s specific mass. It is dimensionless.

Waterproof packaging means a packaging that remains unaltered when submerged in water, avoiding the passage of water to its inside. A packaging that resists the penetration of water, through an internal liner of Kraft paper: waxed, faces impregnated with bitumen or lined with a plastic film; a plastic film layer glued to the internal or external face of a bag; or one or more internal plastic enclosures.

Sift-proof packaging a packaging impermeable to a dry content, including a thin solid material produced during transportation. Presenting one plastic or paper layer of a bag, glued to meet the purpose, or still, one or more internal plastic or paper enclosures.

Combined Packaging means that resulting from a combination of packagings, for transportation purposes, consisting of one or more internal packagings conditioned inside an external packaging.

Composite Packaging means that consisting of one set integrating one internal and one external packaging in one only structure, capable of being filled, emptied, stored and transported.

Effectively Closed Packaging means a packaging with liquid-tight closure. External Packaging means the external protection of a composite or combined

packaging, together with any absorbent or padding material, or still, any other component necessary for the contention or protection of internal receptacles or packagings.

Intermediate Packaging means a package placed between an internal and an external packaging.

Internal Packaging means a packaging that requires an external packaging for transportation.

Hermetically Sealed Packaging means a packaging with vapor-tight closure. Water-resistant Packaging means that resisting the effects of rain, snow and other

weather conditions, maintaining its integrity. However, when immersed in water, it does not prevent the passage of water.

Securely Closed Packaging means that closed in such a way that a dry content cannot pour out during normal handling and meeting the minimum requirements for any closure type.

Package, in the IMDG Code, has two interpretations: one means the receptacle and any other component or material necessary to the same, in order to correctly meet the purpose of contention for transportation; the other, comprising the packaging itself and its content.


Refurbished Packaging means that including: a) a metal drum cleaned to the point of showing the original construction material,

with removal of all the previous content, removal of internal and external corrosion, removal of external coating and labels. Restored to its original shape and contour, with the accessories correctly sealed and gaskets replaced; and inspected after cleaning and before painting, with rejection of those showing visible marks, significant material thickness reduction, material fatigue, damaged chimes, edges, openings, or any other significant damage; and

b) a plastic drum or canister cleaned to the point of showing the original construction material, with removal of all the previous content, and removal of external coating and labels. Replacement of every gasket not showing its original characteristics; and inspected after cleaning, with rejection of those showing visible damage like tearing, folding or cracks, or still, damage to edges or openings, or any other significant damage.

Remanufactured Packaging means that including: a) metal drums produced as UN type and deriving from other not of UN type; b) converted from a UN type to another UN type; c) those that had their components restored to their full structural conditions; d) or plastic drums converted from UN type to another of the same UN type;

and e) those that had their components restored to their full structural conditions. The drums are subject to same requirements as for a new drum of the same type. Reused Packaging means that refilled after previous exam showing it to be free of

defects affecting the possibility of reaching good test results. Includes that refilled with similar or identical content and transported within the distribution chain controlled by the product consignor.

Empty Packaging means that previously containing a dangerous substance. It includes the intermediate container. It must be identified, marked, labeled and receive the signs as specified for packagings carrying dangerous substances, unless being cleaned, having the vapors purged or being filled with a substance that can make it free from any risk. Its transportation, when still containing residues, shall meet, compulsorily, the requirements for the substance previously carried.

Shipper, sender, consignor or consigner will have the same meaning for the purposes of the IMDG Code.

Net Explosive Content (NEC) or Net Explosive Quantity (NEQ) means the total explosive content in the artifact. In the case of a pyrotechnic artifact, it is the powder weight.

Large Packaging means that consisting of an external packaging containing goods or an internal packaging, being designed for mechanical handling and not exceeding 400 kg of gross mass or 450 liters, but with a volume of less than 3 m3.

Internal Casing (Liner) means a separating tube or bag inserted in a packaging, which may be an intermediate container, or a large packaging, and characterized by not making part of the packaging, including the closure of its openings.


Maximum Gross Mass means the greatest mass contained in a single packaging, or the mass of the internal packaging and its content, expressed in kg.

Maximum Permissible Gross Mass (MPGM) applied to intermediate containers of all categories, except for the flexible types, means the sum of the body mass with its structural and service equipment, with the maximum permissible load. In the case of portable tanks, means the sum of the tank's mass with the maximum permissible load for transportation.

Specific Mass is the mass per unit of volume. (µ = m/V) [g/cm³ or 1000 kg/ m³]

Some examples: of ethyl alcohol: 0.81g/cm3; of ice 0.9281g/cm3; of glycerin 1.2681g/cm3; of water 1g/cm3; of aluminum 2.781g/cm3.

Dangerous Good means that containing one or more substances considered as dangerous, i.e., capable of creating risk or damage to human health, life and marine resources, or interfering in other legitimate uses of the sea. Such substances are cataloged in the IMDG Code.

Weight means the gravity attraction force exerted by the Earth over a body (P=mg).

Specific Weight of a material means its weight per unit of volume [kgf/m³]. Combustion Point means the temperature of a fuel above which it releases gases

in quantity enough to be ignited by an external heat source and keep burning, even when the source is removed.

Flash Point means the minimum temperature of a fuel at which it releases gases enough to be ignited by an external heat source, and stops burning when the source is removed. Or else: is the lowest temperature at which a flame propagates through the vapor released by the liquid surface of a fuel substance. This temperature is determined by the liquid's vapor pressure. Combustion can only happen when a high vapor concentration is reached.

Melting Point is the temperature at which a solid body begins to liquefy. Ignition Point is the temperature necessary for igniting the gases being released

from a fuel, just with the presence of the oxidizer (see the item referring to the definitions of Code IMDG, for considerations on its determination).

Static Pressure means the barometric pressure measured if the sensor has no movement relative to the air.

Receptacle means the vessel receiving and containing substances or articles, no matter the type of closure.

Internal Receptacle means that requiring another one externally, in order to meet the containment function.

Bag means a packaging made of paper, plastic, fabric or other material with a similar texture.

Overwrapping means an enclosure used by the shipper for containing one or more packagings making a Cargo Transport Unit, for the convenience of handling and stowage during transportation. As examples: an elastic or corrugated enclosure securing with belts or other adequate means the goods piled over a cargo board (pallet); a protecting crate; or a crate as handling aid.

Noxious Liquid Substance means any substance listed in the column Pollution Category, of Chapters 17 or 18 of the International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk (IBC Code) or provisionally assessed in accordance with Regulation 6.3 of MARPOL 73/78 Annex II, as fitting categories X, Y or Z


Harmful Substance, even potentially, means that identified as marine pollutant, listed in Code IMDG and in column (4) of the List of Dangerous Substances in volume 2.

Drums are packagings with cylindrical cross section, manufactured of metal, cardboard, plastic, pressed wood or a similar material. Wood barrels and canisters are not included.

Cargo Unit means a certain number of packages, grouped or piled and tightly secured by belts or adhesive tape or other adequate means, enabling the handling as a unit available for embarkation on board vessels on a pallet.

Cargo Transportation Unit means a road vehicle, railway wagon, container, tank vehicle, tank wagon or portable tank.”

SECTION II

PROCEDURES FOR PACKAGING APPROVAL 0206 - DOCUMENTS NECESSARY

a) Initial Documentation The approval request shall be made through an application to the DPC, in

accordance with Annex 1-B, signed by a Legal Representative who shall also sign the "Authorization". An application shall be made for each model or type of material intended for approval. The following documents shall be attached to the application:

I) A notarized copy of the company's Articles of Incorporation, duly registered at the competent Commercial Registry, indicating the name(s) of the partner(s) responsible for managing the company, a Certificate from the corresponding Commercial Registry identifying the company's manager-partner(s) or Minutes of the General Assembly appointing the person(s) responsible for managing the company. The latter may, if allowed by company acts, delegate to third parties the Legal Representation before the DPC. This copy shall be forwarded on occasion of the first approval and whenever an alteration is made to its text.

II) In a foreign documentation, the Articles of Incorporation or equivalent document will indicate the person(s) responsible for the company. The latter may appoint a natural or legal person as representative through a contract or power of attorney with specific powers for such, duly notarized and formulated in accordance with the Brazilian Law basis.

If the company had already done so previously, and in the absence of an alteration to the Articles of Incorporation, it is not necessary to forward another copy. However, the DPC may request it at any time.

III) Technical documentation in accordance with subparagraph d). b) Refurbished packagings for carrying dangerous goods

I) Only packagings refurbished as defined in item 0205 and already approved, demonstrably, by their original manufacturer, will be accepted for testing. After meeting all the requirements of these standards, the model will receive a certificate valid for up to 2 (two) years. Such validity may be extended once, for an equal period, at discretion of the DPC.

II) The packaging shall be entirely clean until reaching its original conditions as new. This cleaning condition must be verified through a laboratory report. During the approval process, the Expert Surveyor will select two samples per group of six approved drums, not painted, and forward them to a DPC-approved laboratory.


The Lab Report, necessary for each type of substance carried in the last packaging use, issued by a laboratory not pertaining to the refurbisher, shall indicate the percent residue found. The refurbisher will be responsible for presenting this report to any purchaser of its packagings.

The purchasers or refurbished packagings and the refurbishing companies are jointly responsible for verifying the packaging's compatibility with the products to be packed.

III) During the Certificate's validity, the refurbisher will provide whenever requested and at its own expenses, visits of expert surveyors from the DPC to its facilities, for checking on the fulfillment of these standards' prescriptions. The acceptance of this requirement, expressed in a Statement signed by the Person Responsible or a legal representative and following the model of Annex 2-F, is an essential condition for starting the approval process.

IV) For metal packagings, the model assignment will be in accordance with the plate thickness standard. For plastic packagings, it will be made according to the resin used. Thus, each standard of plate thickness or resin type will correspond to a different model.

V) No refurbished packaging may be marked assuring a performance superior than that originally stated. Thus, for example, a packaging originally marked as group II, density 1.6, shall not be marked, after being refurbished, as group I, or density 1.8. This rule is also valid for a case of combined criteria.

VI) The packaging's conformity with the drawings shall be checked on six samples of each model. In metal packagings, two distinct points shall be measured at the cover and bottom, and six distinct points at the body. In plastic packagings, the measuring systematic will be the same as adopted for new packagings.

After the conformity checking, the refurbisher will forward together with the Test Report, the Thickness Diagram in two copies and containing all the measures found. All the refurbishing process shall be based on this Thickness Diagram and no measure below the values there specified shall be admitted.

VII) Additional requirements: a) Documents:

- Licensing Permit from the Local City Hall; - Installation License; - Functioning License; - Approval Certificate - Destination of Industrial Waste; - Instrument of the Firefighters' Survey; - Environmental Risk Prevention Program - PPRA; - Medical Control and Occupational Health Program - PCMSO; - National Register of Legal Person - CNPJ; - State Enrollment number; - Registry Declaration - DECA; - Drivers' Licenses; - Drivers' registration at the "ASO" (Occupational Health Certificate); - Courses of Defensive Driving, Environment and First Aid of the drivers,

provided by entities registered at the State Roadway Department. If the company hires other service providers, present a declaration stating their compliance with the traffic laws in force, regarding the carriage of dangerous products;

- Authorization for the Carriage of Special Cargoes - DER;


Technical Report on Environmental Working Conditions - LTCAT; and - Declaration that the dangerous residue meets NBR 10004, and that the

company generating it is apt for the correct conditioning, labeling and handling by qualified personnel duly equipped with PPE.

b) General measures: - Upon completion of the process, check the refurbished packaging's

conformity with the approved model, in at least six samples. The tolerances specified in the drawing (diameter, height, weight and thicknesses) must be observed. Packagings not meeting these specifications will not be considered as approved. In this case, the packaging will not receive the UN marking, and may be destined to the carriage of non-dangerous products. All the lots must have their records duly filed; and

- Inform the customers on the importance of packing only substances or articles compatible with the approved model.

c) Specific measures: 1) Segregation:

The packagings (metallic or plastic) must be selected, routinely, according to their respective marking, technical specifications (dimensions, type of plate, capacity, etc.) and type of substance carried the last time they have been used.

The selection, by the Expert Surveyor, of packagings for approval tests will be made among those already classified by the company as subject to be refurbished.

2) Inspection of facilities: - Check the existence of packaging acquisition and sales control and the

knowledge, by the purchaser, that the substance to be contained is compatible with the prescriptions of Code IMDG;

- Check the existence of control means for possible alterations in relation to the previously approved prototype resulting from the refurbishing process, and the thickness diagrams in the case of plastic packagings;

- Check the existing criterion for ensuring that the right model is acquired for approval and its further tracing for the purchasers;

- Check the internal quality control, including tests, in order to maintain the conformity to the tested prototype, the quality of raw materials and of the respective suppliers. In the case of plastic packagings, check the control regarding the thickness diagram and possible discrepancies in its comparison with the approved prototype;

- Follow up the refurbishing of a model to be approved, and test the company's internal procedures regarding control of conformity to the original; and

- Select samples from the stock of approved models and execute the tests provided in Code IMDG, paying special attention to the particularities of conformity. Check their marking in comparison with that shown in the respective Certificate.

VIII) A non-conformity with the prescriptions above, found at any time, will imply the immediate cancellation of the respective Approval Certificate. A repetition of the whole approval process will be necessary.

c) Documents in other idioms All documents necessary for the material approval process originally written in

other idioms shall be authenticated by the Brazilian Diplomatic Representation of the applicant's country, together with the respective sworn translation into Portuguese.


The above-mentioned translation is waived for documents written in English or Spanish.

d) Description of the Technical Documentation 1) Descriptive Memorandum

The Descriptive Memorandum shall be presented in two copies written in Portuguese, formatted as ABNT A-4, with a cover showing the document name and number, alterations, date and signature(s) of technically responsible person(s). The document shall contain data of the material to be approved, such as model, dimensions, weight, material used and surface treatment, detailed description of manufacturing raw materials, process and assembling, packing and other necessary information for its complete characterization and registration.

In the case of plastic packagings with required ultraviolet protection, follow the prescriptions of Code IMDG. For packagings with closing accessories (such as plugs), inform the torque to be applied.

In the case of packagings for carrying explosives, show clearly the NEC or NEQ (Net Explosive Content), as well as the explosive's quantified characteristics as listed in item 0292.

The Descriptive Memorandum shall carry attached: a) a summarized English version, containing at least the product, material or

equipment name, and if applicable, the manufacturing and assembling process; b) a marking suggestion, for a packaging destined to

approval; c) for plastic packagings, the composition of the injected or blown paste,

information on the maximum percentage of master-batch (resin with addition of pigment in the concentration percentage), process ground material and recycled material. Other relevant information must be added to better characterize the several components in the paste, such as the manufacturer, model and color. It is understood that the addition of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors not used in the tested prototype may be made without calling for new tests. In the case of carbon black, not exceeding 2% in mass, and for pigments, not exceeding 3% in mass. The content of ultraviolet radiation inhibitors is not limited. Other adhesives and additives not intended for protecting against ultraviolet radiation may be included in the plastic material compound, if not causing adverse effects over the packaging's chemical and physical properties. New tests are not necessary in such circumstances.

The companies proceeding to change mechanical or technical specifications, or percentages of resin, additive, adhesive, pigment or others, as manufacturers, or changing the technical recommendations provided on occasion of approval tests, must submit the new packaging to a new approval process.

It is important to emphasize the need for fixing all the characteristics of raw material components, and not accepting similarities. The adoption of substitutes or equivalents will imply the creation of a changed model, which shall be tested.

d) the Technical Data Sheet of the substances entering the product's compound, provided by the manufacturer, or a formal statement signed by the company's Responsible Technician will be accepted as proof.

A partial or total replacement of the Descriptive Memorandum may be required, if the discrepancies eventually detected during approval tests indicate such need. However, if these discrepancies are minor, they may be resolved when issuing the Packaging Test


Report, which in practical terms is a faithful description of the approval testing occurrences. 2) Drawings

The drawings shall be presented in two copies following ABNT Standards, preferably in format A-4, containing at least the document's name, number, alteration, unit, scale, date and signature of the technician(s) responsible with legible name(s).

When dealing with plastic packagings, a schematic drawing shall be forwarded containing at least twelve thickness measures taken at the most characteristic points regarding the molding process.

3) Quality Control Documentation Present documents verifying that the production, testing and the product's

quality control running tests are certified by the Standards of Series 9000 (chapter 6.1 of Code IMDG).

Documents and controls verifying the existence of compliance with recommendations contained in the end of the Approval Certificate shall be kept available to the DPC at all times. Packagings carrying dangerous substances must be subject to control of their destination and of the substances they are intended to contain, as well as the persons responsible for the filling operations.

4) Production Present a signed Statement by the company's Responsible Technician in

accordance with Annex 1-E, assuring that the prototypes have been manufactured following requirements established in the relevant chapter of Code IMDG, and that the DPC-approved model will follow the same in order to promote a correct and permanent quality control.

5) Other technical documents I) Assembly Arrangements; II) Component Lists; III) Proposed Testing Spreadsheet for prototype approval, citing the standards

to be followed. Special attention shall be paid to the request of additional tests for packagings intended for the carriage of products requiring specific tests, such as tightness tests and those of classification, provided for in the Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods - Model Regulations, or Manual of Tests and Criteria (ONU publications);

IV) Other documents requested by the DPC for clarification, or by specific requirement from a test, as in the case of the solids and alcohol content in the nitrocellulose, where it is indispensable a technical statement from the manufacturer verifying such data; and

V) When a product's specifications indicate that it must be carried with a minimum percentage of water/alcohol for stabilization, the Technician Responsible for the compound shall state the percentage and type of alcohol used in the fluid loss test, and that these data are identical to those forecast for production and transportation of the product.

e) Documentation summary The following documents shall be put together in a folder: 1) Application to the DPC, in accordance with the model shown in Annex 1-B; 2) Authorization for Collection of samples, in accordance with the model of

Annex 1-B; 3) Notarized copy of the Articles of Incorporation registered at the Commercial Registry; 4) Power of Attorney for a Representative before the DPC, if applicable; 5) Name of the laboratory where the approval tests are expected to be

conducted, in accordance with item 0107 a);


6) License of installation and functioning, and Approval Certificate of the destination of industrial waste for packaging refurbisher companies, in accordance with item 0206;

7) Request for revalidation of the Approval Certificate, in accordance with the model shown in Annex 1-D;

8) Descriptive Memorandum in accordance with item 0206, d) 1); 9) Drawings showing the injected paste's composition, when dealing with plastic

packagings, in accordance with item 0206 d) 2); 10) Quality control Statement, in accordance with item 0206 d) 3); 11) Statement by the Responsible Technician regarding production, in

accordance with item 0206 c) 4); 12) Testing Spreadsheet, in accordance with item 0206 d) 5) III) and IV); 13) Packaging Test report, in accordance with item 0261; 14) Application requesting the non-filing of documentation, in accordance with

item 0114 a); 15) Notarized copy of the Registration Title, for companies intending to carry

explosives, in accordance with item 0276; 16) When dealing with military explosives, a statement signed by a Responsible

Technician, containing the characteristics shown in item 0292; and 17) Statement of Approval in accordance with Annex 2-F.

0207 - APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

See Chapter 1, item 0110 of these standards.

SECTION III

CLASSIFICATION OF A DANGEROUS MERCHANDISE

0208 - RESPONSIBILITY The shipper, consignor, dispatcher or competent authority if so determined shall

make the classification.

0209 - CLASSES AND DIVISIONS The substances, including mixtures and solutions, and articles subject to the

provisions of Code IMDG, are grouped in classes 1 through 9 according to the predominant risk involved. Some classes are fractioned in divisions. The classes are as follows:

Class 1: explosive substances (not including the substances that, not being properly explosives, behave as such in atmospheres of gas, vapor or dust). Substances too dangerous for transportation are excluded, and also those in which the predominant risk fits another class better. Explosive articles, excepting devices containing explosive substances in quantities or characteristics such that their inadvertent or accidental ignition, or priming during transportation will not cause any external effect by projection, fire, smoke, heat or high noise. Substances and articles not mentioned above, manufactured with the purpose of producing an explosive or pyrotechnic effect when used.

The carriage of excessively sensitive explosive substances, or those reactive to a point where a spontaneous reaction may occur, is not allowed.

Class 1 is subdivided in: Division 1.1 - substances and articles subject to a mass explosion.


Division 1.2 - substances and articles with risk of projection, but no risk of a mass explosion.

Division 1.3 - substances and articles with risk of igniting and causing a minor explosion or projection or both, but no risk of mass explosion.

Division 1.4 - substances and articles not presenting a significant risk. Division 1.5 - highly insensitive substances, not presenting a risk of mass

explosion. Division 1.6 - highly insensitive articles, not presenting a risk of mass explosion

. The number of each division must be followed by a letter from A to L (excluding l), N

and S, to assign the compatibility group to be considered for purposes of transportation and storage.

The classification procedure of substances or articles having, or suspected to have, explosive characteristics (class I) and classifying them in the adequate division and compatibility group shall be in accordance with the last version of the United Nations Manual of Testing and Criteria. Identical procedure shall be followed for substances of the classes mentioned in 0230.

Class 2: encompasses compressed gases, liquefied, in solution, liquefied and refrigerated, gas mixtures, mixtures of one or more gases with one or more vapors of substances from other classes, gas-filled articles, tellurium hexafluoride and aerosols.

Class 2 is subdivided in: Class 2.1 - flammable gases; Class 2.2 - gases neither flammable nor toxic; Class 2.3 - toxic gases; Class 3: encompasses the flammable liquids and inert liquid explosives; Class 4: encompasses the substances not classified as explosive and which, under certain transportation conditions, become rapidly flammable or may cause or contribute for a fire; Class 4 is subdivided in: Class 4.1 - flammable solids; Class 4.2 - liquid or solid substances susceptible to spontaneous combustion; Class 4.3 - liquid or solid substances that generate flammable gases when in contact

with water; Class 5: composed by the oxidizing substances (class 5.1) and organic peroxides

(class 5.2); Class 6: composed by the toxic (class 6.1) and infectious substances

(class 6.2); Class 7: encompasses the substances that emit radiation of concentration and

overall activity within the parameters established by Code IMDG. In Brazil, the National Commission of Nuclear Energy - CNEN establishes the standards for packing, testing and transportation;

Class 8: these are the corrosive substances, i.e., those causing major damage by chemical reaction when in contact with live tissue, or that in case of leaking, will materially damage or even destroy other goods or the means of transport;

Class 9: encompasses the substances and articles not fitting other classes as demonstrated already or in the future, and with such characteristics as provided in SOLAS/74 as amended, or those not subject to the IMDG Code but provided in annex III of MARPOL73/78;


About the purpose of packagings, the substances of all classes other than class 1, 2, 5.2, 6.2, 7 and the self-reactive of class 4.1 are divided in three groups, according to the degree of danger presented by the substance. The packaging groups have the following meanings:

Packaging group I: highly dangerous substances; Packaging group II: substances of medium danger; and Packaging group III: substances of low danger. A substance's packaging group is indicated in the List of

Dangerous Goods contained in Code IMDG. The dangerous goods are characterized by an UN number and their PSN - proper

shipping name , according to their risk classification and composition, the use of which is compulsory as set forth in the SOLAS regulation 4-1/VII.

Substances classified as Marine Pollutants, i.e., those defined as harmful to the marine environment, have the following indications in the List of Dangerous Goods:

a) letter "P" for potentially pollutant substances; b) letters “PP” for substances presenting a high potential of pollution.

Besides the characterizations above, the packages are tagged with the words “MARINE POLLUTANT”. The substances shall be adequately packed, stowed and lashed in order to minimize the risk of marine damage, without prejudice to the safety of the ship and onboard personnel. Their jettisoning is prohibited, unless it is done with the purpose of ensuring the safety of the ship or safeguard of human life at sea (as provided for in MARPOL 73/78 annex III).

When a substance, material or article is suspected to have pollutant properties and is not identified in the IMDG Code, all relevant data must constitute a process to be submitted to the GESAMP (an IMO body).

SECTION IV

LIST OF DANGEROUS GOODS 0210 - COMPOSITION

The list in Code IMDG is shown in columns and, basically, includes the proper shipping names of all dangerous goods that may be carried in accordance with its provisions. Such transport will only occur when the properties have been determined and the goods classified according to the class and test approval criteria.

Two or more names may appear in the List for a single UN number, and the name better describing the dangerous good will be chosen.

When in a mix of dangerous goods the abbreviation "N.O.S" (“not otherwise specified”) appears, it becomes necessary to enter between parenthesis one or more names helping to characterize the risk of that mix. A commonly used chemical term may also be entered. In the case of pesticides, the active ingredient's concentration must be included in the shipping documentation.

Certain substances, by the nature of their chemical compositions, tend to polymerize or react dangerously in some way, under certain temperature conditions or contact with catalysts. They require special conditions of carriage or addition of inhibitors or stabilizers. These products must prevent any dangerous reaction during the trip, otherwise the


transportation will not be allowed. The names contained in the List may be used for shipping limited quantities of

dangerous goods and samples. It is relevant to consult the special conditions pertinent to some substances contained

in the List.

0211 - SEGREGATION Having in mind the similarity of the substances' chemical properties, they are

separated in groups for the purposes of transportation and storage. Thus, section VII and the table contained in Code IMDG must be consulted.

0212 - LIMITED QUANTITIES Certain classes of dangerous goods, packed in small quantities with the limit for each

substance established in the List, may be carried under certain conditions and do not fit the provisions of SOLAS (Regulation II-2/19).

The storage of these substances will be considered as of category A (chapter 7.1 of Code IMDG).

The segregation table and its recommendations are not applicable to packages containing dangerous goods carried in limited quantities.

The marking and labelling will follow the specific standards of Code IMDG for this kind of packaging (chapter 3.4).

SECTION V

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PACKAGINGS AND TANKS 0213 – USE OF PACKAGINGS, INCLUDING INTERMEDIATE CONTAINERS (IBC) AND

LARGE PACKAGINGS The packagings, IBC'S and large packagings must be strong enough to withstand

shocks and efforts occurring normally during transportation, and built in a way that the closure will impede any loss of content when ready for transportation and under any of its conditions, being them vibrations or changes of temperature, humidity or pressure.

Such conditions apply, as far as possible, to all packagings no matter if new, reused, refurbished or recovered, and even to new or reused intermediate containers and large packagings. Unless clearly provided otherwise in the IMDG Code, these packagings when used for goods of class 1, self-reacting of class 4.1 and organic peroxides of class 5.2, must be restricted to the conditions provided for the packaging group II.

Any packagings used for solids capable of liquefaction under temperatures occurring normally during transportation must be capable of containing the substance in liquid sate, and consequently, must be approved in the specific tests.

Any packagings used for substances in a granular or powdering form must be sift-proof or previously fitted internally with a liner.


0214 - USE OF EMERGENCY PACKAGINGS FOR RECOVERED SUBSTANCES The damaged packagings of dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked may have

these substances carried in approved and duly marked packagings. The use of these packagings for purposes other than emergencies during

transportation require approval from a competent authority. 0215 - INTERMEDIATE CONTAINER (IBC)

Defined as a rigid or flexible packaging other than those specified in Code IMDG annex I, and that:

a) have a capacity: - lower than 3 m3 (3000 liters) for solids and liquids of groups II and III; - lower than 1.5 m3 for solids of group I when packaged in a flexible, rigid, plastic,

compound, cardboard or wooden IBC; and - lower than 3 m3 for solids of group I when packaged in a metallic IBC

. b) are designed to allow mechanical handling; and c) are resistant to efforts produced during the handling or transportation, as

determined by testing. An IBC will not be allowed for sea shipping after expiration of its testing or last

inspection validity date. However, an IBC filled before the testing or inspection expiration date may be carried if the period does not exceed three months from the expiration date. When being carried for the place of inspection, an IBC, dirty or empty, may be transported after the expiration date. Even these IBC'S are subject to the standards of Code IMDG. 0216 - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERMEDIATE CONTAINERS (IBC)

They must show a plaque of metallic, non-corrosive material affixed permanently to the structure, easily accessible for inspection and containing the information stipulated in Code IMDG, which will vary if the IBC is made of rigid plastic or compounded with an internal plastic casing. When of a flexible type, it must show a pictogram recommending the methods of handling and lifting. 0217 - INSTRUCTIONS FOR PACKAGINGS

The List of Dangerous Goods refers to instructions applicable to goods of classes 1 through 9, in three sections (column 8), assigning:

Code "P" for packagings other than IBC'S and large packagings; Code "B" for IBC packagings; and Code "L" for large packagings.

0218 - SUBSTANCES SUSCEPTIBLE OF LIQUEFACTION DURING

TRANSPORTATION These substances shall not be carried in the following packagings: Drums: 1D and 1G. Boxes: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G and 4H1. Bags: 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5M1 and 5M2. Compounded: 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HD1, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PD2, 6PG1, 6PG2 and 6PH1.

In intermediate containers, the substances shall not be carried:


13M2.

a) in all intermediate containers, if substances of group I; and b) in the packagings below, if substances of groups II and III:

Wood: 11C, 11D and 11F. Cardboard: 11G. Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and

Compounded: 11HZ2, 21HZ2 and 331HZ2.

0219 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR THE PACKAGINGS OF CLASS 1 GOODS All packagings shall contain the explosive substances or articles prepared for

transportation, duly classified in accordance with the last issue of the UN (Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods - Manual of Tests and Criteria)

The packagings shall be designed and manufactured in order to: a) protect the explosives, preventing their leaking and not contributing to the risk of

ignition or priming when under normal transport conditions, including the changes expected in temperature, humidity or pressure;

b) allow the complete packaging to be handled safely under normal transport conditions; and

c) withstand any effort imposed on them by an expected stacking they may be subject during transportation, not contributing to the risk presented by the explosive. The packaging's contention capability not being altered, and damages not occurring in a way or extension implying reduction of its strength or causing lack of stability for stacking.

The closing devices of packagings containing explosive liquids must have double protection against leaking.

Plastic packagings shall not be susceptible of generating or accumulating static electricity implying effects of ignition or priming in packagings of explosive substances or articles.

A higher detailing level is found in the IMDG Code. 0220 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR PACKAGINGS OF OTHER CLASSES OF GOODS

Details can be found in the IMDG Code. 0221 - USE OF BULK CARGO PACKAGINGS

Some dangerous goods may be carried in bulk, when indicated in the List of Dangerous Goods under the code "BP". Special conditions are provided for the substances of classes 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.2 and 8 specified in the IMDG Code.


SECTION VI

MARKING AND DOCUMENTATION

0222 - UTILIZATION Packaged dangerous goods will not be accepted for shipping if not duly marked,

labeled, with placard, described and certified in the transport documentation and in accordance with the prescriptions of Code IMDG.

The purpose of indicating correctly the Proper Shipping Name (PSN) of a substance or article presented for shipping, and in the case of a marine pollutant, the indication of this fact in the documentation and package marking, is to ensure a realistic identification during the transportation. This is particularly important in the case of an accident involving these goods: it enables to determine the adequate emergency procedure and, for marine pollutants, to meet the requirements of Protocol I of MARPOL 73/78. 0223 - USE OF TRANSPORTATION PACKAGINGS AND CARGO UNITS

Both are marked following the prescriptions of Code IMDG, and receive the Proper Shipping Name and UN number of the packaging being carried, unless all dangerous goods items can show with full visibility their respective markings, i.e., the transportation packagings or cargo units do not impair these items' full visibility.

The cargo units must be constructed in such a way as to not cause damage to the packages being carried. 0224 - MARKING

All packagings, including those defined as IBC, must be marked and labeled, receive tags, placards, and even specific marks such as for possible subsidiary risks, due to their characteristics and the substance or product carried, and follow the provisions of Code IMDG. The Shipper is responsible for the full compliance with these instructions.

The specific marking is contained in the Approval Certificate issued by the Directorate of Ports and Coasts. 0225 - DOCUMENTATION

The Shipper, following the model contained in annex 5-A of NORMAM 01 and 02, prepares the transport documentation of a dangerous good.

SECTION VII

MARKING AND CONSTRUCTION

0226 - PACKAGING CODE Consisting of: - one numerical digit indicating the type of packaging, such as: drum, box, bag, etc; - one or more Latin character letters, upper case, indicating the material's nature,

such as: wood, steel, plastic, etc.; and - one numerical digit indicating the packaging's category within the type it belongs

to. In the case of compound packagings and those carrying infectious substances, two upper-case Latin letters are used in sequence, in the second

position of the code. The first letter indicates the internal packaging's material, and the second, that of the external packaging. When dealing with class 6.2, add the text: CLASS 6.2.

The packaging code may be followed by letters T (emergency packaging), V (special packaging) in conformity with chapter 6.1 of Code IMDG, W (packaging of a type listed in the Code and manufactured with a different specification, but equivalent), R (refurbished packaging, which may be followed by letter L if approved in a watertightness test) or REC when manufactured with recycled material according to the item related to definitions in Code IMDG.

The table below indicates the most commonly used codes in the several packaging types, depending on their type, material used for construction and category:

TYPE MATERIAL CATEGORY MARKING IMDG

PARAGRAPH

1 Drum

A - Steel Fixed cover 1A1 6.1.4.1 Removable cover 1A2 6.1.4.1

B - Aluminum Fixed cover 1B1 6.1.4.2 Removable cover 1B2 6.1.4.2

D - Plywood -

1D 6.1.4.5

G - Cardboard 1G 6.1.4.7

H - Plastic Fixed cover 1H1 6.1.4.8 Removable cover 1H2 6.1.4.8

N - metal (other than steel or aluminum)

Fixed cover N1 6.1.4.3 Removable cover N2 6.1.4.3

3 Canister

A - Steel Fixed cover 3A1 6.1.4.4 Removable cover 3A2 6.1.4.4

B - Aluminum Fixed cover 3B1 6.1.4.4 Removable cover 3B2 6.1.4.4

H - Plastic Fixed cover 3H1 6.1.4.8 Removable cover 3H2 6.1.4.8

5 Bag

H - Plastic Impermeable 5H3 6.1.4.16 L - Textile Impermeable 5L3 6.1.4.15

M - Paper Multiple layers

5M1 6.1.4.15

0227 - CODE FOR THE IBC'S IBC units must contain a code consisting of two Arabic numeric digits followed by

one or more letters characterizing the manufacturing material, and one more Arabic numeric digit indicating the category.

The table below shows some of the most used types and codes of IBC'S:

MATERIAL CATEGORY CODE IMDG

PARAGRAP

A - steel

For solids, loaded or unloaded by gravity

11 A 6.5.3.1

For solids, loaded or unloaded under pressure

21 A 6.5.3.1

For liquids 31 A 6.5.3.1 B - aluminum For liquids 31 B 6.5.3.1

H - flexible plastic Plastic tissue, without coating or internal liner

- 2-18 -

13 H 1 6.5.3.2

NORMAM-05/DPC Mod 8


MATERIAL CATEGORY CODE IMDG

PARAGRAPPlastic film 13 H 5 6.5.3.2

L - Textile with internal lining 13 L 3 6.5.3.2 M - paper Multi-sheet 13 M 1 6.5.3.2.3

H - Rigid plastic For liquids, fitted with structural equipment

31 H 1 6.5.3.3

G - cardboard For solids, loaded or unloaded by

gravity 11G 6.5.3.5

NOTE: The code may be extended with letter "Z" to indicate the material used for the external packaging, in accordance with paragraph 6.5.1.4.1(b). Letter "W" may be added to indicate that the material of the IBC is of the same type indicated by the code, but manufactured with other specifications that those of Code IMDG paragraph 6.5.3, although following the requirements provided in 6.5.1.1.2.

0228 - MARKING The marking indicates that the packaging is compliant with the built and tested type,

following the Code IMDG provisions on occasion of its manufacture. A marking does not determine the type of substance the packaging is allowed to carry. There are specifications for each substance or article (see the List of Dangerous Goods).

The marking not always characterizes the testing detail level. The Test Report may be necessary, or even the records of additional tests.

Greater detailing can be found in the IMDG Code. For example:

u 1A2/Y/100/-- (Manufacturing Year) n

BR/TL/DPC 023/2002 RL

a) United Nations symbol, which in metallic packagings may be: “UN”;b) 1A2 - a code composed as provided for in item 0226;c) Y - indicates packaging groups II and III. It would be X for groups I, II or III; and Z

for group III; d) 100 - gross mass expressed in kg, for solids, or the relative density of testing for

those containing liquids; e) adding letter S will mean that the packaging is for solids. For packagings carrying

liquids (other than combined packagings), the hydraulic pressure of the packaging's test, in kPa, rounded down to the nearest 10 kPa;

f) the two last digits of the manufacturing year. Packagings 1H and 3H must alsohave marked the manufacturing month, but in other place and with other specification;

g) BR - The country authorizing the marking, with the abbreviation used forinternational traffic of motor vehicles;

h) TL - manufacturer identification assigned by the DPC;i) identification of the Maritime Authority, followed by the data related to the

Approval Certificate; and j) letter R shall be added for refurbished packagings, letter L for those submitted to

tightness test, and "REC" when the packaging was manufactured with recycled plastic material (as defined in the IMDG Code).


Every metal drum with capacity over 100 liters must be marked at the bottom in a durable way, indicating the body's nominal thickness in millimeters. When the drum's nominal thickness is smaller than that of the body, the top, body and bottom thicknesses must be marked in sequence on the top.

All packagings meeting the IMDG Code must bear durable, legible markings placed where they are visible. For packagings of gross mass lower than 30 kg, the marking must be placed at the upper part or one of the sides. The letters, numbers and symbols must be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 liters or 30 kg or less, which must have them 6 mm high. Packagings of 5 liters or 5 kg or less must be marked with a proportionate size.

0229 - CONSTRUCTION AND INSPECTION Due to the ample scope of constructive data, the diversity of packaging models and

the classes of material to be transported, the manufacturer will have to consult the IMDG Code specifications.

At each interval of five years and two and a half years, inspections shall be made according to the provisions of Code IMDG chapter 6.1.

SECTION VIII

TESTING

0230 - BASIC REQUIREMENTS The tests must be conducted with the packagings prepared as for the transport,

including inner packagings for combined units. When a packaging is specified for carrying liquids and solids, the tests required must cover both physical states of the cargo.

Samples of the several types of packaging will be submitted to specific tests in accordance with the provisions of Code IMDG. However, when dealing with classes 1, 3, 4 and 9 and divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1 and 5.2, other standards must be met regarding the classification and transportability, as specified in the “ORANGE BOOK” (Recommendation on the Transport of Dangerous Goods - Manual of Tests and Criteria).

The substance to be carried may require special tests for the packaging, and in consequence, the latter may be classified as: effectively closed (liquid tight), hermetically closed (vapor tight) or securely closed (its solid content will not be exposed when the package is normally handled). These tests will be effected on request as set forth in item 0206, sub-item 5, subparagraph IV).

The DPC will promote the waiving of tests, change details or add tests when finding it justifiable for obtaining a reliable and realistic assessment of the product's risk. Moreover, it may promote more than one test on a single sample.

The packaging shall be hermetically closed, unless otherwise stated, when: involving flammable vapors or gases, subject to become explosive when dried, involving toxic vapors or gases, involving corrosive vapors or gases, or capable of reacting dangerously with the atmosphere.

All packagings intended for the carriage of liquids, including intermediate containers (IBC'S), must be submitted to the Tightness Test prior to their first time of use in transportation, after remanufacturing or refurbishing, and after repairs to any type of IBC.


For the Tightness Test, any packaging does not need to have its closing installed, including intermediate containers (IBC'S).

The inner receptacle of composite packagings must be tested without the external packaging, to avoid compromising the test result. This test is not necessary for the inner packagings of combined packagings or large packagings..

Rigid plastic and composite IBC'S with inner plastic receptacles, unless clearly otherwise stated, may only be used for carrying dangerous liquids for a period of five years from the manufacturing date or less, if prescribed due to the nature of the liquid to be carried.

The packaging type is characterized by design, drawing, size, material, thickness, construction method, and may include the several types of surface treatment. Packagings presenting a difference in external dimensions for less, of up to 5%, are considered to be of the same model.

Models of packagings that differ only in details, such as lower mass or dimensions of the prototype's inner packaging may be submitted to tests in a selective way, at discretion of the DPC. The same applies to drums, bags and boxes made with slight reductions in external dimensions.

When a prototype model fails three times in one same test type, or four in the total of tests, the approval process will be filed. It will be for the manufacturer of its representative, if it is the case, to effect a new process containing a new design and paying the relevant fees. Specific factors or technical characteristics of the test failures may imply in an Unexpected Inspection (item 0115 b), for checking the product's quality system set by the Company.

When the external packaging of a combined packaging have been tested successfully with different types of inner packagings, another inner packaging type may be conditioned inside that external packaging. Furthermore, an equivalent performance level must be maintained and the testing of inner packagings is waived in the following conditions:

a) an inner packaging with smaller or equivalent dimensions may be accepted if: 1) the inner packaging has a similar design or different in shape, round or

circular; 2) the inner packaging's building material is resistant to impact or stacking forces

equal to or greater than the original inner packaging previously tested; 3) the inner packaging presents openings or closings identical or similar to those

of the prototype; 4) the addition of padding material is used to fill empty spaces, preventing

significant movements of the inner packaging; and 5) the inner packagings are placed inside the outer packaging in the same way

used for testing; and 6) a smaller number of tests of the inner packaging, or its alternative types meeting

the specifications above, may be conducted when the padding material has been added to fill empty spaces preventing significant movements of the inner packaging; and

b) articles or inner packagings of any type, for solids or liquids, are dispensed from the tests of outer packagings if meeting the following conditions:


1) the outer packaging having been approved repeated times by the manufacturer's quality control, when tested with fragile inner packagings (glass, porcelain for example), using the drop height of group I;

2) the total gross mass of the inner packages set not exceeding one half of the gross mass of inner packages used in the drop test mentioned above;

3) the thickness of padding material between inner packages, and between them and the inner face of the outer packaging, must not be smaller than that used in the packaging originally tested. If the original test has been made with a single inner package, the thickness of padding material between inner packages must not be smaller than that of the padding material between the inner package and the inner face of the external packaging in the original test. When smaller inner packages are used, or in a lesser number (compared to those used in the drop test), enough padding material must be added to fill the empty spaces;

4) an outer packaging must be approved in the stacking test, when empty. The total mass of identical packages must be based on the combined mass of inner packages used in the drop test referred to in 1;

5) inner packages containing liquids must be fully wrapped with absorbing material in quantity enough to absorb all the liquid content;

6) if an outer packaging intended for carrying inner packages with liquids is not liquid tight, or if intended for carrying inner packages with solids and not being sift-proof, measures must be taken to prevent content leaks, through the use of a tight liner, plastic bag or other effective means of contention; and

7) packagings must be marked according to the data provided in the Approval Certificate, indicating that they have been submitted to performance tests as prescribed for group I of combined packagings. The gross mass marked, in kilograms, must be the sum of masses of the inner packages used in the drop test mentioned in a). Letter "V" shall be used as prescribed. 0231 - PREPARATION FOR TESTING

The tests must happen with the packagings in identical conditions as those provided for transportation.

The necessary collection of samples will take place, preferably, in the production line and under one of the following ways:

a) if a packaging is manufactured in different production facilities, the manufacturer will ask the Expert Surveyor to verify the prototype's conformity with the drawings, numbering and initialing the test specimens to be tested in the previously authorized laboratory. The Expert Surveyor will instruct the laboratory about which specimens are selected for tests; and

b) when the previous hypothesis does not apply, and the test specimens are in the lab, the Expert Surveyor shall be contacted for instructions on the selection method to be used.

The filling must be at 98% of maximum capacity in the case of liquids, and 95% for solids.

The inspection mentioned in subparagraph c) of item 0106, addressing the conformity checking of a tested model, may take place in this stage. It consists, in reality, of a visual inspection plus measurement aiming at comparing the model's physical characteristics with the drawings and data from the Descriptive Memorandum.


Combination packagings designed for carrying either liquids or solids must be tested as prescribed for both conditions.

In the case of solids, the substance replacing the content shall present the same physical characteristics (mass, granulation, etc.).

In the case of liquids, the replacing substance for tests shall present the relative density and viscosity similar to those of the carried substance.

The paper or cardboard packagings must be placed for at least 24 hours under controlled ambient temperature and humidity.

In combination packagings, tests of inner packagings of any type for solids or liquids may be waived when the inner packagings are placed and carried in an outer packaging without testing, if specific conditions are met. Example:

a) the total gross mass of the inner package set not exceeding one half of the gross mass of inner packages used in the drop test for approval of the prototype;

b) the outer packaging having been approved when tested with a fragile inner packaging, under the most rigorous essays (group I); and

c) the padding thickness is no smaller than that of the original approved packaging .

Tests must be repeated when: a) the Expert Surveyor finds it more significant regarding the type of packaging, the

samples being collected directly from the production line, at least once during the Approval Certificate's validity;

b) there is an alteration of drawing, material, chemical composition or constructive mode;

c) when the item fails a test, the conduction of tests with a new prototype will only be scheduled after analysis of a technical justification clarifying the motives leading to the failure, besides the alterations presented by the new prototype and, being the case, replacement of drawings or the Descriptive Memorandum; and

d) at any time, a verification may be required that the serial production is compatible with the design of the prototype submitted to approval tests. This will be made through tests provided in the IMDG Code.

0232 - DROP TEST

a) Number of samples and guidance for the drop The drops shall occur as prescribed in the table below. The most unfavorable

position shall be given priority, i.e., adopting the orientation likely to cause an impact position leading to the sample's greatest damage.

The metallic packagings, and those of plastic presenting a major deformation after the drop, shall undergo internal/external pressure equalizing with the purpose of detecting small leaks:

PACKAGING QUANTITY OF

SAMPLES DROP GUIDANCE

Drum of steel, aluminum, any other metal, cardboard, fiber or plastic; Canister of steel, aluminum or plastic; Wood barrel; composite packagings with drum shape.

Six (3 for each drop)

1st) Three packaging samples will hit diagonally the edge, seam or chime; and 2nd) The other samples will drop hitting the most fragile part not tested before (a fastener, seam, edge, lid or bottom, longitudinally).


PACKAGING QUANTITY OF

SAMPLES DROP GUIDANCE

Boxes of wood, cardboard, fiber, plastic, steel or aluminum, and similar composite packagings.

Five (one for each drop

type)

The drops shall occur against thebottom, lid, major side, minor side andan edge or corner.

Single-layer bags with a side seam.

Three (three drop types per

bag)

Drops shall occur against the major side, minor side, and one end (each bag dropped three times).

Single-layer bags without a side seam, or multi-layer bags

Three (two drop types per bag)

Drops shall occur against the major side and bottom (each bag dropped twice).

NOTES: 1) the test samples and their content will have the temperature reduced to a minimum of - 180 C, when dealing with the following types: plastic drums and canisters, plastic boxes not of expanded polystyrene, composite packagings with plastic material, and combination packagings with inner plastic packaging other than plastic bag intended for the carriage of solids or articles. The addition of an anti-freezing agent is allowed, in order to preserve the liquids in their state; 2) packagings of removable lid for liquids should not be submitted to a drop test prior to, at least, 24 hours after filled and closed, enabling the gaskets' natural adjustment. 3) Packagings carrying substances stabilized in alcohol or water at a certain percentage, provided in Code IMDG, shall be submitted after the drop test to a fluid loss test for 28 days in a stove at 400 C ± 20 C, as follows:

- All samples shall be previously weighted in the condition they enter the stove; and - For combination packagings, three samples shall enter the stove without their outer

packaging component. Formula to be applied: Percentage of Loss = (m1 - m2) x 100

m1

Where: m1: mass of the sample before entering the stove; m2: mass of the sample after leaving the stove. - Approval criterion:

The percentage of loss shall be subtracted from the declared percentage for testing and transportation. The result shall not be lower than that specified in Code IMDG for the substance to be carried."

b) Drop height It must be considered that the drop will occur against a smooth, rigid and

perfectly horizontal surface.

CONDITION PACKAGE

GROUP I PACKAGE

GROUP II PACKAGE

GROUP III A 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m B 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m C d x 1.5 m d x 1.0 m d x 0.67 m


CONDITION A: for solids or liquids, if the test has been conducted for carrying solids or liquids or other substance with the same physical characteristics.

CONDITION B: for liquids, if the test has been conducted with water and the substance to be carried has a relative density of up to 1.2.

CONDITION C: for liquids, if the test has been conducted with water and the substance to be carried has a relative density (d) greater than 1.2, rounding up the first decimal digit.

c) Approval criterion 1) in all packagings with liquid content, the internal and external pressures must be

equalized to check for leaks, except for internal packagings of combination packagings; 2) when a packaging for solids undergoes the drop test and its upper face hits the

floor, the sample will be considered as approved if the entire content is retained by the packaging or internal receptacle (e.g., a plastic bag), even if the closing no more behaves as sift-proof;

3) the packaging, or outer packaging of a composite or combination packaging, must not show any damage capable of affecting the safety during transportation. Thus, no leaking of the contained substance, coming from the packaging or inner receptacle, must be observed;

4) no damage affecting the safety during transportation must be observed on the outer layer of a bag or on an outer packaging;

5) a slight splash at the closing of a packaging after undergoing the drop test will not mean that the sample failed the test, provided that no further leaking occurs;

6) in packagings of class 1 substances, no spilling of any kind coming from the outer packaging is allowed;

7) once a prototype fails a test, the restarting of approval tests for the model will only take place after a technical justification and detailing of the constructive changes presented by the new prototype for correcting the cause of failure; and

8) If one of the samples fails during the tests, one only reclassification of group or density will be allowed, not cumulatively.

d) Drop height related to the substance class The following requirements must be observed regarding the drop height: 1) Class 1 is tested as group II, and the approval criterion specifies the absence

of not only ruptures but also splashes; 2) Class 2 is not regulated; 3) Class 3, where the group depends on the flash point: group I

350 C, group II 230 C and group III 230 C 610 C; 4) Class 4, the decision is connected to the tests of volume II, section 33, of the

Orange Book (publication referred to in 0203 subparagraph l); 5) Class 5, the decision is connected to the tests of volume II, section 34, of the

Orange Book; 6) Class 6 depends on the toxicity and requirements provided in the Orange Book

volume I, chapter 2.6; 7) Class 7, following the legislation of the National Commission of Nuclear Energy; and 8) Class 8, the decision is connected to the toxicity of inhaled dust and vapors,

ingestion or skin contact and requirements provided in the Orange Book volume I, chapter 2.8.


0233 - TIGHTNESS TEST This test must be applied to all packaging models intended for the carriage of liquids,

excepting inner packagings of combination packagings. The number of test samples per model will be 3 (three).

Preparation of samples for testing: seal the openings or use blind closure. The sample must be held under water for 5 (five) minutes, while an internal air

pressure of 30 kPa (0.3 bar) is applied for packaging group I, and of 20 kPa (0.2 bar) for groups II or III.

The method used for holding the sample under water is not determinant to the approval criterion, which consists of checking the existence of leaks. 0234 - INTERNAL (HYDRAULIC) PRESSURE TEST

This test must be applied to all models of metal, plastic and composite packagings intended for the carriage of liquids, excepting inner packagings of combination packagings. The number of samples per model will be 3 (three).

Preparation of samples for testing: seal the openings or use blind closure. The hydraulic (gauge) internal pressure to be applied, in a continuous and uniform

way, in metal and composite (glass, porcelain and ceramic) packagings must be held for (five) minutes, and in packagings of plastic and composite with plastic, for 30 (thirty) minutes, and will be indicated in the packaging's marking. The pressure is determined by one of the following methods:

a) the total pressure at 550 C less 100 kPa times 1.5; b) the product's vapor pressure at 500 C times 1.75 less 100 kPa, but no less than

100 kPa; c) the product's vapor pressure at 550 C times 1.50 less 100 kPa, but no less than

100 kPa; and d) working gauge pressure, but no less than 250 kPa, for packagings of group I

substances. The hydraulic pressure holding time in this case will depend on the packaging's constructive material (5 or 30 minutes).

The approval criterion is the absence of leaks. 0235 - STACKING TEST

This test applies to all packaging types, except bags. The number of samples per model will be three. A load equivalent to the total weight of identical packages allowed for stacking during

transport is applied over the sample for 24 hours. The minimum stack height is 3 (three) meters, including the sample. This load may be calculated through the formula below, in the case of three test specimens:

Total load = 3W ( E -1) (expressed in kgf) H

Where: E - stacking height in mm (3000 mm) H - package's height in mm The expression between parentheses must be rounded up to the nearest 10. W - total package weight in kg (content weight considering the density of the liquid

to carry + empty packaging weight). Plastic drums and canisters, as well as composite packagings 6HH1 and 6HH2 intended for carrying liquids, will be submitted to the minimum temperature of


400C for 28 days, together with the respective removable or fixed lids. A graphic record of temperatures throughout the testing period is required.

The approval criterion must, in the case of composite or combination packagings, focus on the absence of leaks from the packaging or the inner receptacle. Furthermore, no deformation may be found affecting the transportation safety or any distortion reducing the package's structural rigidity or causing a lack of stability for the stacking of packages.

The packagings tested must have their respective temperatures brought to the ambient level prior to their assessment and checking of the stack's stability, leading to the possible approval. 0236 - COOPERAGE TEST

Abolished through the IMDG Code amendment 32-04. 0237 - TEST OF GAS RECEPTACLES

Metal receptacles are subject not only to the initial test, but also to periodic inspections as provided for in the IMDG Code, chapter 6-2:

a) initial testing of the model: (1) In one sample:

- tests for checking material stress, tensile strength and deformation; - wall-thickness measurement at the thinnest point, and stress calculation; and

- checking of material homogeneity in each batch produced, as well as an internal and external inspection of the receptacle's general conditions.

2) For all units: - Hydraulic Pressure Test; - Receptacle marking inspection; and - Pneumatic test.

b) periodic inspection: - Hydraulic Pressure Test; - Checking of the receptacles' external and internal conditions; and - Checking of the manufacturing equipment and markings.

The inspections and tests mentioned above will be carried out in accordance with the International Standard Organization (ISO) standards contained in items 6.2.2.1 through 6.2.2.4 of the IMDG Code (Amendment 3-02).

c) aerosols and small gas containers:

(1) tightness test for all units produced that must be submitted to immersion in hot water (such fact must be recorded as "Note", in the Approval Certificates, as per Code IMDG chapter 6.1). The test temperature and duration must be such that the container's internal pressure will be identical to the pressure that would be reached at 550 C, or 500 C, if the liquid does not exceed 95% of the container's capacity at this temperature. If the content is sensitive to temperature or the container is made of plastic, deformable in the thermal conditions mentioned above, the immersion may be made between 200 C and 300 C. One sample for each two thousand units will be necessarily submitted to the higher temperature prescribed above. For approval purposes, the test must be carried out in three test specimens.

The approval criterion is the absence of leaks and permanent deformation of the container, the latter being related to plastic receptacles;

(2) hydraulic pressure test for an aerosol container - NBR 14720/2001: Requirements:


- The manufacturer shall inform the maximum formulation pressure at 50º C (MPa) for which the aerosol container is dimensioned;

- Two samples shall be tested; - A hydraulic pump shall be used with a connector, pressure gauge with 0.01 MPa

resolution and maximum pressure indicator; - Operator's protection shield. - Dome reversal essay: - The empty container must be firmly attached to the hydraulic pump. It must

remain free, suspended and without any restriction to its walls; - The container must be submitted to a pressure of 1.5 times the maximum

formulation pressure at 50º C, for a period of 25 seconds, with no leak or total dome reversion occurring;

- The pressure must then be increased until the total dome reversion occurs. - Burst essay: - Following the dome reversion, the pressure must be increased until reaching a

value 1.8 times the formulation pressure at 50º C, for a period of 25 seconds, with no bursting or leak occurring;

- The pressure shall then be increased until a leak occurs. Notes: 1) The test pressure raising shall always be made at a rate of 0,1 MPa/s, in order to prevent false results; 2) All recorded values (MPa) shall be entered in the Test Report; 3) Both samples shall be submitted to the dome reversal and burst essay.

Compulsory requirements, instructions and tests are specified in the Dangerous Goods List (UN 1950 - Aerosol) contained in the IMDG Code, volume 2 (chapter 3, requirements 63, 190, 191 and 913 and chapter 4, requirements P003 - external packaging and PP17 - if a cardboard box, not to exceed 55Kg). Furthermore, the valves must be protected against shock or impact through a capsule firmly attached to the container, or inside the container in such a way as not being driven if the container drops. Alternatively, the container may be inserted in a basket or box as outer packaging, constituting a combination packaging. This combined packaging shall be submitted to the performance tests for packagings in general. 0238 - TESTING OF PACKAGINGS FOR CLASS 6.2 SUBSTANCES

The tests are provided in Code IMDG volume 1, chapter 6.3. 0239 - WATER ABSORPTION TEST

Performed in all packagings made of non-absorbent cardboard and paper, through the Cobb Method prescribed in ISO 535:1999. For approval, the value found in the test shall be lower than 155 g/m2 . National regulations NBR 7153, NM-ISO 187:1996, 186:1998 and 535:1999 are relevant to this matter.

Ten test specimens shall be used, measuring 125 x 125 mm, being five specimens cut from each side of the sample. The face to be tested, in each test specimen, shall correspond to the packaging's external face. The test duration for each specimen shall be of 30 minutes.

The required apparatus, necessarily certified by an INMETRO-accredited company, is the following:

- Cobb device, consisting generally of a metal ring with internal diameter 112.8 ± 0.2mm (100 mm² of area), height 25 mm and approximately 6 mm thick, placed on a flat


square base of 150 mm per side, rigid and with a smooth flat surface. The ring is attached by an appropriate method, including a rubber part of adequate dimensions placed between the test specimen and the base, and tightened in order to prevent water leakage;

- chronometer with reading in seconds; - precision scale of 0.01 g accuracy throughout the measuring range; - graduated cup or pipet for measuring 100 ± 5 ml of distilled or deionized water to

be placed inside the cylinder. This water's packaging must be sealed verifying its origin, and discarded after each determination;

- metal roll 200 mm wide, diameter 90 ± 10 mm and mass 10.0 ± 0.5 kg.

For each test specimen, proceed as follows: - place the dry rubber on the device's base, and on top of it the previously

weighted test specimen, with the face to be tested turned up. Then, place the metal ring and secure it with the attachment device;

- add carefully, and as fast as possible, 100 ml of distilled water inside the ring, starting simultaneously the chronometer. Leave the water in contact with the test specimen for 30 minutes. Once this time is elapsed, remove the water from inside the ring with due care for preventing the water from contacting the specimen's dry face;

- remove excess water from the specimen's surface by placing it between two sheets of normalized absorbent paper and pressing with a standardized compression roll of 10 kg, passing the roll back and forth over the test specimen;

- weight the test specimen immediately after. From the difference to the initial mass, check if the result is lower than 155, measured with three significant digits from the scale. Any fact invalidating one of the measurements will imply the test's repeat;

- meet also the following specifications: time for removing the absorbed water: 1755 to 1815 s time for removing excess water with absorbent paper, after removing the excess

water: 15 ± 2 s normalized atmosphere for the testing: 23° C/50% RH, being allowed in tropical

regions, 27° C/65% RH. - for the system to operate with top efficiency, it is necessary that:

the difference between maximum and minimum temperatures in the work place during any 30-minute period does not exceed 1º C;

the average temperature's variation in a determined point during two different 30-minute periods within 24 hours does not exceed 0.5 °C; and

the temperature at any moment must not vary by more than 0.5 °C between two different points of the work place.

- the normalized absorbent paper has the technical specification (NBR 14479) as follows: grammage of 250 ± 25 g/m²;

Klemm absorption > 50 mm; mass increment with water 450 ± 50 g/m²; dimensional variation of 3% and made of 100% virgin fiber.

In the case of paper bag packagings (5M2), where is mandatory to check if there is no water absorption, and in the absence of a specific test in the IMDG Code, the IPT-NEA 14 standard from the Technological Research Institute (IPT/SP) should be used.


SECTION IX

INTERMEDIATE CONTAINER

0240 - APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS Intermediate containers may not follow strictly the requirements of Code IMDG, but

the alternatives used will only be valid if approved by the DPC. In this case, letter W will follow the packaging code indicating that the unit was manufactured with different but approved specifications.

0241 - INSPECTION

a) Every container shall be inspected by the DPC, following the systematic below: a) prior to entering in service, and subsequently, at intervals of less than 5 (five)

years, for: checking the adequate marking, conformity with the design, adequate external and internal conditions and the functioning of its accessories; and

b) at intervals of less than two and a half years, for: checking external and internal conditions and the correct functioning of its accessories.

The thermal insulation may be removed as much as necessary for enabling examination of the container body.

The Compliance Report shown in Annex 2-B will be issued to verify the inspection's conduction.

0242 - MARKING

The marking indicates that a container corresponds to the tested model and meets the same specifications as the approved prototype.

The primary marking system consists of a 2-digit number indicating the container's category:

TYPE FOR SOLIDS, LOADING OR UNLOADING

FOR LIQUIDS

By Gravity When the pressure is higher than

10 kPa (0.1 bar) Rigid 11 21 31

Flexible 13 - - Note: item 0227 gives more details.

Follows a letter characterizing the packaging group the prototype was tested for: X - for packaging groups I, II or III (only containers for solids); Y - for packaging groups II and III; or Z - for packaging group III only. Follow subsequently the digits corresponding to month and year of manufacture;

country authorizing the marking (acronym as in vehicles of international traffic); manufacturer acronym assigned by the competent authority; load applied in the stacking test expressed in kg, or "0" when not designed for stacking; and the maximum gross mass. Exemplifying:

u 13H3/Z/ 03 99 n BR/XXX DPC 099/2002/5500/1500

u 31HA1/Y/ 05 99 n BR/XXX DPC 100/2002/10800/1200


u 11G/Z/ 06 99

n BR/XXX DPC 101/2002/0/500

0243 - ADDITIONAL MARKING The information below must be shown in a corrosion-resistant plaque permanently

attached to an accessible place allowing a quick access for inspection. The plaque must be metallic in the case of metal containers:

Additional Marking Container's Category

Metal.

Rigid Plastic

Composite

Cardboard

Wood .

Capacity in liters at 200 C (*) X X X

Package's gross weight in kg (*) X X X X X Test pressure in kPa, if being the case (*) X X

Maximum loading or discharge pressure in kPa or bar, if being the case (*)

X X X

Packaging body material and its minimum thickness in mm

X

Date of last tightness test, if being the case (month and year)

X X X

Date of last inspection (month and year) X X X

Manufacturing serial number X

(*) the unit used must be indicated

Flexible containers must receive one or more pictograms with clear handling and lifting instructions.

Inner receptacles of composite containers must show, at least, the following information:

a) UN marking as explained in item 0242; b) manufacture date as shown in the marking; and c) the BR acronym. When a composite container is carried with the purpose of disassembling the outer

packaging (as when returning to the original consignor), each one of the parts must be marked with the manufacture year and month and the manufacturer's name or acronym as shown in the Approval Certificate.

0244 - REQUIREMENTS FOR METALLIC INTERMEDIATE CONTAINERS

Applicable to the three metal container categories: carrying solids, loaded and unloaded by gravity (11A, 11B and 11N); carrying solids, loaded and unloaded at a pressure greater than 10 kPa (21A, 21B and 21N); and those carrying liquids (31A, 31B and 31N).

The bodies must be made of metal with adequate ductility. Welds made with good finishing and total safety.

Aluminum containers intended for carrying flammable liquids must not have mobile parts.

Flexible containers must present a 2:1 height/width ratio when full. The minimum thickness (expressed in mm) of the body wall of metal containers must

not be smaller than that specified in the table below, for a steel meeting the product Rm x A0 = 10000:


CAPACITY (C) IN LITERS

TYPES 11A, 11B, 11N TYPES 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B,

31N Not protected Protected Not protected Protected

C 1000 2.0 1.5 2.5 2.0 1000 < C 2000

T = C/2000 + 1.5T = C/2000 +

1.0 T = C/2000 + 2.0

T = C/2000 + 1.5

2000 < C 3000

T = C/2000 + 1.5T = C/2000 +

1.0 T = C/2000 + 1.0

T = C/2000 + 1.5

Where: A0 = minimum percent elongation at rupture of the reference steel; and

Rm = minimum guaranteed tensile strength of the used steel (in N/mm2 )

Notes: a) for other metals, consult the IMDG Code and calculate the minimum thickness through the formula contained therein; b) whatever the metal type, the wall thickness must not be smaller than 1.5 mm; c) the explanation, with the necessary and correct approach, must be shown in the Descriptive Memorandum of the prototype to be tested; and d) the existence of a report verifying that the metal used in metal containers meets the requirements set forth in Code IMDG regarding the rupture percent elongation and test specimen dimensions is indispensable.

Containers for carrying liquids must have a pressure relief valve in order to prevent a body rupture in case of fire. The discharge starting pressure will not be higher than 65 kPa, but higher than the total pressure designed for filling (substance filling pressure plus the air (or other inert gas) pressure, minus 100 kPa), at 550 C; considering the container as filled up to 98%.

A greater detailing of specific requirements for rigid plastic, composite, cardboard and wood containers may be found in 6.5.3.3 and subsequent items of Code IMDG.

0245 - SPECIFIC TESTS

The most relevant are specified below. Other tests may be required to enable a more precise diagnostic (as provided for in item 0206 d) 5) III):

a) Metal containers: Tensile test; and Test of the opening and shutting limits of relief valves.

b) Flexible containers: Strength test after immersion in water for 24 hours, for packagings of types

13M1 and 13M2; and Testing of the percent composition of resin and compounds.

c) Rigid plastic containers: Testing of the percent composition of resin and compounds; and Test for determination of the relief pressure.

d) Composite containers with a plastic inner container: Testing of the percent composition of resin and compounds; Test for determination of the relief pressure; and Water absorption test for cardboard outer packagings.

e) Cardboard containers: Water absorption test.


f) Packagings required to be “water resistant” such as the paper bag 5M2, tissue bag 5L3, raffia bag 5H3, fiber drum 1G and the flexible container, when required by provision B3 of the IMDG Code, must be approved in accordance with specification ISO 2875:2000 or NEA-14 of the São Paulo State Technological Research Institute (IPT-SP). It must be emphasized that the placement of a second liner cancels this requirement, except for a fiber drum.

g) Packagings required being sift-proof, such as the natural wood box with waterproof raw material, 4C2; the tissue bag 5L2; and the raffia bag 5H2 must have an extra liner for meeting such requirement. The liner must have a minimum thickness of 0.10 mm per layer (see the last § of item 0213).

0246 - PREPARATION FOR TESTING

The tests must be performed in every prototype of each model prior to its placement in use, and the design is defined by its drawing, dimensions, material, thickness, construction mode, loading and unloading process and surface treatment.

The tests must be conducted under the same conditions the packagings are presented for transportation. The contents may be replaced with other substances of same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.).

In the drop test of containers intended for carrying liquids, a substance other than that to be carried may be used, if presenting similar relative density and viscosity. Water may also be used, if meeting the following conditions:

a) when the substance to be carried has a density lower than 1.2, the drop height will be the same as previously specified for the several container types; or

b) if the substance to be carried has a density higher than 1.2, the drop height must be calculated based on the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounding up the first decimal digit in the following way:

Packaging Group I Packaging Group II Packaging Group III d x 1.5 d x 1.0 d x 0.67

Paper and cardboard containers, or composite containers with a cardboard outer packaging must be conditioned for at least 24 hours prior to the tests, under the following conditions of temperature and relative humidity:

a) 230 C 20 C and 50% 2%; b) 200 C 20 C and 65% 2%; or c) 270 C 20 C and 65% 2%. The table below specifies the tests and the sequence to be compulsorily followed:

Type of Intermediate Container A B (a)

C (b)

D E F

G H I

(c) Metallic: 11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N.

10 (a)10 (a)

20

20

30

30

-40

-50

40 (e) 60 (e)

- -

- -

- -

Flexible (d): - x (c) x - - x x x x Rigid Plastic: 11H1, 11H2,21H1, 21H2, 31H1, 31H2.

10 (a)10 (a)

20

20

30

30

-40

-50

40

60

- -

- -

- -

Composite: 11HZ1, 11HZ2,21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1, 31HZ2.

10 (a)10 (a)

20

20

30

30

-40

-50

40 (e) 60 (e)

- -

- -

- -

Cardboard 10 - 20

- - 30 - - -

Wood 10 - 20

- - 30 - - -


LEGEND: A - Lifting by the Base B - Lifting from the Top (a) C - Stacking (b) D - Tightness E - Hydraulic Pressure F - Drop G - Tearing H - Topple I - Righting (c) (a) - when the container is specified for this handling method. (b) - when the container is specified for stacking. (c) - when the container is specified for loading through the top or side. (d) - when the test is necessary, it is indicated by "x" in the table, and the container

approved in one test may be used for another test, in any order. (e) - another container of same model may be used in the drop test.

0247 - BASE LIFTING TEST

Applied to all cardboard and wood containers and those provided with forklift moving means.

Preparation: containers must be full and submitted to a load equal to 1.25 times the maximum gross mass.

Method: use the forklift with the forks centralized and spaced by 3/4 of the opening width. The forks' depth is of 3/4 of their recess. The operation consists in raising and lowering twice, and repeating in each possible entry direction.

Approval Criterion: absence of a permanent deformation making the operation unsafe, and no content exposure. 0248 - TOP LIFTING TEST

Applied to all containers fitted with top-lifting means, and flexible containers designed for loading through the top or side.

Preparation: metal, rigid plastic and composite containers must be loaded with a product of density equal to that of the product to be carried (compensating any difference when necessary). The test load shall be twice the container's maximum gross mass. For flexible containers, the load shall be equal to six times the container's maximum gross mass. They may undergo a different preparation of test method, if equally effective.

Method: metal and flexible containers must be lifted by the same way they were designed for, until totally separated from the floor, and held in this position for five minutes.

Rigid plastic and composite containers must be lifted: a) by each pair of diagonally opposed rings, and the lifting force applied vertically for

five minutes; and b) by each pair of diagonally opposed rings, and the lifting force applied at 450

inclined to the vertical, for five minutes. Approval Criterion: for metal, rigid plastic or composite containers, absence of a

permanent deformation making the operation unsafe, including the pallet. Also, no exposed content may be found. For flexible containers, the damage checking is extensive to the rings.


0249 - STACKING TEST Applied to all containers designed for stacking. Preparation: they must be loaded to the maximum gross mass. Method: place the container on a firm, leveled floor. Apply on it a load 1.8 times the

maximum gross mass times the number of containers possible of being stacked according to the design, for a period of:

a) five minutes for metal containers; b) 28 days at 450 C for rigid plastic containers of types 11H2, 21H2 and

31H2, and composite containers with plastic outer packaging designed for stacking (for example: 11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1, 21HH2, 31HH1, 31HH2); and

c) 24 hours for all other container types. The load may be applied through one of the following methods: a) stacking of containers loaded to the maximum gross mass, and of identical model

as the prototype; and b) application of an appropriate load on top of the container, with the help of a rigid

plate with the size of the container's base. Approval Criterion: for all container types except the flexible, absence of a

permanent deformation making the operation unsafe, and no exposed content. For flexible containers, the damage checking is extensive to the body. 0250 - TIGHTNESS TEST

Applied to all containers intended for carrying liquids, or solids loaded or unloaded under pressure, and those requiring periodical tests.

Preparation: the tests are conducted prior to the application of any thermal insulation, replacement by similar blind covers or deactivation of relief valves.

Method: apply compressed air at a pressure of at least 20 kPa (0.2 bar) for 10 minutes and check for possible air leaks through the welding and closing systems, using an adequate method (diluted soap, differential pressure or immersion in water). In the presence of hydrostatic pressure, a corrective factor must be applied.

Approval Criterion: absence of air leaks. 0251 - HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST

Applied to all containers intended for carrying liquids, or solids loaded or unloaded under pressure.

Preparation: identical as in item 0250. Method: apply a constant hydraulic pressure inside the container, for ten minutes;

the following pressure shall be applied: a) for metal containers: of types 21A, 21B and 21N with solid substances of group

I, 250 kPa (2.5 bar); for those of types 21A, 21B, 31A, 31B and 31N for substances of groups II or III, 200 kPa (2 bar); for those of types 31A, 31B and 31N, additionally, a pressure of 65 kPa, prior to the testing at 200 kPa; and

b) for rigid plastic and composite containers: types 21H1, 21H2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2, 75 kPa (0.75 bar); for types 31H1, 31H2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2, the greater of two pressures as obtained through one of the following methods:

1st) the container's calculated pressure (i.e., the vapor pressure of the substance to be carried, plus the partial pressure of the air or inert gas, minus 100 kPa) at 550 C multiplied by the safety factor 1.5. This total pressure must be


determined based on the highest filling degree in accordance with the following formula: filling degree = ____98____ percent of the IBC's capacity, where

1+ (50 - tF )

α = d15 - d50

35 x d50

where represents the liquid substance's cubic expansion coefficient between

150 C and 500 C; d15 and d50 are the relative densities of the liquid at the temperatures of 150 C and 500 C and tF the liquid's average temperature when filling; or

- 1.75 times the vapor pressure of the substance to be carried, at 500 C minus 100 kPa. The minimum test pressure is 100 kPa; or still,

- 1.5 times the vapor pressure of the substance to be carried, at 550 C minus 100 kPa. The minimum test pressure is 100 kPa.

2nd ) twice the static pressure of the substance to be carried, the minimum value being twice the water static pressure

Note: Static Pressure - The pressure measured in the still water inside a closed system. Approval Criterion:

a) for containers of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N when submitted to the tests of 250 kPa or 200 kPa, no leaks;

b) for containers of types 31A, 31B and 31N when submitted to the test of 65 kPa, no permanent deformation making the container unsafe for transport and no leaks; or

c) for rigid plastic or composite containers, identical criterion as in subparagraph b). 0252 - DROP TEST

Applied to all container types, according to the model's design. Preparation: a) metal containers: they must be loaded up to a minimum of 95% capacity for solids

or 98% capacity for liquids, have their relief valves made inoperable or removed, and their openings sealed.

b) flexible containers: they must be loaded up to a minimum of 95% capacity and with the maximum gross mass, the content being evenly distributed.

c) rigid plastic and composite containers: loaded as in subparagraph a), relief valves removed, sealed or made inoperable. The test must occur with the prototype sample's temperature, including its content, lowered to minus 180 C or less. Addition of anti-freeze agents is allowed when testing with liquids.

d) cardboard and wood containers must be loaded up to a minimum of 95% capacity.

Method: the container must drop onto a rigid, smooth base, without undulation and placed horizontally, in such a way that the impact point of the prototype's base is the most vulnerable. For containers with capacity 0.45 m3 or less, the sample must drop a second time against a different point of the container's base previously hit, i.e., in the first drop. For flexible containers: against the most vulnerable side and for rigid plastic, composite, cardboard or wood containers, horizontally against one side, the top or an edge.

The drop height will be 1.8 m for group I, 1.2 m for group II and 0.8 m for group III.


Approval Criterion: a) metal containers: no loss of content. b) flexible containers: same as above. However, a splash will not be considered as

determinant of a model's failure, but if occurring, it will be kept aside for some time until the absence of leaking is verified.

c) rigid plastic, composite, cardboard or wood containers: same criterion as of subparagraph b). 0253 - TEAR TEST

Applied to all flexible containers. Preparation: the containers must be loaded up to a minimum of 95% capacity and

with the maximum gross mass, the content being evenly distributed. Method: keeping the container on the floor, make a 100 mm cut penetrating totally

its larger side, in a place free from the rings and at an angle of 450 in relation to the container's main axis, and at mid-height between top and base. With the content evenly distributed, apply a load equivalent to twice the maximum gross mass, for five minutes. A container designed for lifting by the top or side must be lifted from the floor for at least five minutes, after the load is removed.

Approval Criterion: the tear must not propagate more than 25% of its original length. 0254 - TOPPLE TEST

Applied to all flexible containers. Preparation: identical as in item 0253. Method: lead the container to toppling against any part of its top over a smooth, rigid

plate without undulation and placed horizontally. The topple height depends on the packaging group: 1.80 m for group I, 1.2 m for group II and 0.80m for group III.

Approval Criterion: no content exposure. A splash is admitted, through the closing system or seam points, at the moment of impact. 0255 - RIGHTING TEST

Applied to all containers designed for lifting. Preparation: identical as in item 0253. Method: with the container laying on one side, lift it at a speed of

0.1 m/s until total separation from the floor, using one ring for containers with two rings and two rings for those with four rings.

Approval Criterion: no damage to the tested model or any device, making the operation unsafe for handling or transportation. 0256 - TESTING PERIODICITY

All intermediate containers must correspond, in all aspects, to the respective approved prototypes. Those of metal, rigid plastic or composite intended for carrying liquids, or for solids loaded or unloaded under pressure, are subject to the tightness test as initial test, prior to their first use in transport. Such test must be repeated at intervals of no more than two and a half years. All test results must appear in the Packaging Test Report and filed by the manufacturer.


SECTION X

CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR LARGE PACKAGINGS 0257 - APPLICATION

This section's provisions do not apply to: a) substances of class 2, except articles with aerosols; b) substances of class 6.2, except the UN 3291 hospital waste; and c) packagings for class 7 containing radioactive material.

0258 - MARKING

The primary marking is similar to that of item 0242, with the code "50" placed after "UN" for rigid large packagings, or "51" for the flexible ones. Follows a letter in large-cap latin character indicating the type of material:

A - steel (all types and any surface treatment) B - aluminum C - natural wood D - plywood F - recycled wood G - cardboard H - plastic material L - textile M - paper, multilayer N - metal (other than steel or aluminum) The IMDG Code provides more details in its chapter 6.6

0259 - BASIC REQUIREMENTS

Contained in the IMDG Code. 0260 - TESTS

Large packaging tests are the following: a) Test of Lifting by the Base: identical to that provided in item 0247; b) Top Lifting Test: identical to that of item 0248; c) Stacking Test: identical to that provided in item 0249, except for subparagraph b)

regarding the 28-day period; and d) Drop Test: identical to that provided in item 0252, except for subparagraph c) -

"Preparation". 0261 - PACKAGING TEST REPORT

An indispensable document for emission of the Approval Certificate. Upon conclusion and approval of all tests provided in the approval process of a packaging model, the manufacturer who conducted the tests shall forward it to the DPC. If the Report has not been prepared by the manufacturer, but a manufacturer-accredited entity instead, the statement shown in Annex 1-E must be added to the Packaging Test Report.

The latter will be attached to the Approval Certificate, together with the drawings, and shall be made available to users whenever requested. This is the document carrying the exact information on the tests the packaging was submitted to, and consequently, verifying the substance authorized for loading.


It will contain, necessarily, the following items: a) name and address of the lab or entity where the tests have been conducted; b) name and address of the Responsible Technician or person who applied the tests

(if appropriate); c) Report's identification number; d) document date; e) legal name and address of the packaging’s manufacturer, and if applicable, of the

packaging component’s manufacturers; f) description of the approved packaging (including dimensions, materials, closing

devices, thickness, etc.); manufacturing process; dated photographs truly characterizing the prototype; and reference to the drawings;

g) maximum capacity; h) technical characteristics observed in the conduct of tests, such as viscosity,

relative density, temperature, pressure, etc. When dealing with plugged packagings, especially those of plastic, it is indispensable to inform the torque (in newton) provided by the manufacturer.

i) test description, results and dates in which they occurred; j) transcribe the following statement: "I hereby declare that the tests have been

conducted according to the provisions of Code IMDG and Maritime Authority Standards in force, knowing that the use of other configurations or different materials than those used in the prototype may render the tests invalid"; and

l) signature with name and function of the Responsible Technician previously accredited by the manufacturer. NOTE: When detachable pallets are used in the tests, their technical description must be included.

SECTION XI

CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR PORTABLE TANKS 0262 - DEFINITION

Portable Tank is a multi modal tank with capacity above 450 liters, used for carrying substances of classes 3 through 9. This packaging includes the carcass and its equipment, plus service equipment necessary to the transportation of dangerous substances. It must be capable of unloading and loading without removing its structural equipment.

The carcass is the part of a tank that retains the carried substance and includes the openings and valves, not considering the service or external structure equipment.

Service equipment are the instruments of measuring, loading, unloading, ventilation, safety, and devices for heating, cooling or insulation.

Structural equipment are those intended for reinforcing, fastening, protecting and stabilizing the structure's external parts.

Definitions that can be found in the IMDG Code (chapter 6.7): maximum admitted working pressure (MAWP), design pressure, tightness test, reference steel, maximum permitted gross mass (MPGM), mild steel and design temperature. 0263 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS REGARDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The portable tank's casing must be designed and built in accordance with requirements of a recognized pressure vessel code.


The structure must be built with metallic materials capable of plastic deformation and meet the national and international standards.

The welding must be made skillfully and in total safety. During the manufacturing process, the structure must be heat-treated in a way that ensures an adequate welding of affected zones.

When a steel of fine-grain structure is used, the yield stress value will not be higher than 460 N/mm² and the guaranteed tensile strength upper limit will not be higher than 725 N/mm² in compliance with the material’s specification.

Aluminum may only be used as building material when specifically required for the substance in a special provision of the List of Dangerous Goods (IMDG Code, volume II), or when approved by the DPC. If aluminum is used, the tank must be submitted to a heat source of 110 kW/m² for at least 30 minutes, in order to prevent a significant loss of physical properties. The tank shall be jacketed with a material of melting point not lower than 700°C and capable of effectively insulate the tank for all temperatures below 649ºC.

The portable tank's casing, the accessories, gasket, and piping, must be made of a material not affected by the substance to be carried.

The contact with a different material must be avoided in order to prevent galvanic action.

The casing when fitted with a vacuum-brake valve must withstand an external pressure not less than 0.21 bar above the internal pressure. This valve is used in tanks intended for the transport of substances with their melting point established as criterion for flammables (class 3). More specific details can be found in chapter 6.7 of Code IMDG.

0264 - CASING RESISTANCE TESTS Portable tanks and their attachments, fully loaded, must be capable of absorbing, for

1 minute, separately the following efforts: a) In the direction of displacement

The tank, fully loaded, must be placed in position perpendicularly to the floor and submitted to a frontal static force twice the maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) times the gravity acceleration;

b) In the direction across the displacement The tank, fully loaded, must have its side laying on the floor and be submitted to

a static force twice the maximum permissible gross mass times the gravity acceleration; c) Vertically from the top down

The tank, fully loaded, must be supported and be submitted at the top to a static force equal to the maximum permissible gross mass times the gravity acceleration;

d) Vertically from the bottom up The tank, fully loaded, must have its top laying on the floor and be submitted at

the bottom to a static force twice the maximum permissible gross mass times the gravity acceleration;

The safety factor for the forces mentioned above will be as provided for in the IMDG Code chapter 6.7;

e) Tightness test The casing must be submitted to compressed air at a pressure corresponding to

25% of the MAWP for 15 minutes. No air leaking will be admitted; and


f) Internal pressure (hydrostatic) testThe casing must be submitted to a hydraulic pressure corresponding to

1.5 times the design pressure, for 30 minutes.

0265 - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Certain substances to be carried present special requirements, which are listed in

the IMDG Code chapter 4. The yield stress value shall be provided in a national or international standard. For

austenitic steels, the minimum value of yield stress must be increased by 50% and stated in the material's certification.

Portable tanks must be grounded preventing electrostatic discharge, when carrying substances of flash point class 3 or even substances with a higher flash point.

The thermal insulation in direct contact with a carcass intended for carrying substances at high temperatures, must have an ignition temperature at least 50°C higher than the maximum temperature assigned for the tank.

0266 - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS The casing design must enable the testing of strength, mathematically or

experimentally through the use of strain gauges or other appropriate devices. It must also undergo a hydraulic pressure test at 1.5 times the design pressure. The List of Dangerous Goods contained in the IMDG Code volume II

provides specific requirements related to the substance to be carried. Other requirements must also be met, as specified in the

IMDG Code items 6.7.2.4 through 6.7.2.17 and, in brief: a) protection of accessories and piping against impact;b) calibration certificates of the safety valve verifying the opening pressure equal to

the maximum admitted working pressure (MAWP); c) verify that the melting point of welded materials is not below 525°C;

d) piping pressure test verifying resistance to four times the MAWP;

e) verify that valves and accessories are made of ductile materials;

f) verify the heating system's setting, which must not reach more

than 80% of the carried substance's self-ignition temperature; and

g) in the case of electrical heating, the current must have an amperage lower than

100 mA. The switches must be protected according to requirements of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC 144 or 529).

0267 - CASING BOTTOM OPENINGS Certain substances will not be accepted for transport in portable tanks with bottom

openings. Thus, one must consult the requirements provided in the List of Dangerous Goods of Code IMDG volume 2, which may prohibit any opening below the maximum allowable loading level.

The discharge pipes in the lower part of portable tanks carrying certain solid, crystallizing or highly viscous substances shall be fitted with at least two independent closing systems, assembled in series, and include:

a) one internal automatic control valve, fitted inside the tank or inside a welded flangeor similar part, in a way that:


1) the control device for operating the valve is protected, preventing its opening by impact or any other undue reason;

2) the valve may be operated either from below or above; 3) if possible, the valve's functioning may be verified externally; 4) except for tanks with less than 1000 liter capacity, it shall be possible to operate

the valve from an accessible position, i.e., the valve shall have an external remote system of operation; and

5) the valve shall continue working, even if its external control device is damaged. b) an external shutting valve fitted the nearest possible to the casing and easy to

operate; and c) a liquid-tight closing at the discharge pipe's end, through a blind flange or threaded

cover. For a casing with internal coating, the type of valve mentioned in a) 1) may be

replaced by another with external closing and meeting the requirements. 0268 - PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE

Every portable tank, or independent compartment of it, with capacity above 1,900 liters shall be fitted with at least one pressure relief device, and additionally, one fusible element in parallel actuating at a pressure 10% below that of the fitted device, except when expressly prohibited due to a peculiarity of the substance to be carried and in accordance with the specific requirements contained in the List of Dangerous Goods.

This device has dimensional requirements, and the pressure is calculated through a formula shown in Code IMDG chapter 6.7.

The flow capacity value of the pressure relief device, which is marked on the same, must be calculated according to ISO 4126-1:1996.

The pressure relief device connections must be dimensioned so as to enable an unobstructed flow through the device. No flow shutoff valve must be installed between the casing and such a device, except when duplicate devices are fitted for maintenance or other reasons; and such shutoff valve, when effectively in use, is locked open or has at least one duplicate closing device permanently operational.

The pressure relief device positioning will be at the top of the casing, near the crossing of the longitudinal and transverse axes. For the carriage of flammable substances, additional precautions shall be taken as prescribed in the IMDG Code. 0269 - SUPPORTS, STRUCTURE AND ACCESSORIES FOR LIFTING AND

FASTENING PORTABLE TANKS The structure, supports, rings and fastening accessories must be built to withstand

the forces previously determined as requirements, using the safety factors provided. When the tank's length is smaller than 3.65 m, the forklifting recesses will not be required, provided that:

a) the casing and accessories are well protected from the forks of a forklift; and b) the distance between centers of the forklifting recesses is no smaller than half the

portable tank's overall length. When the portable tank is not adequately protected against lateral or longitudinal

impact or toppling, the external accessories must be protected, including:


a) protection against lateral impact , which may consist of bars protecting the carcass or both sides, at the median line level;

b) protection against toppling, which may consist of reinforcement with rings or bars attached along the structure;

c) protection against impact to the bottom, which may be a shim or frame; and d) carcass protection against damage from impact or toppling or the use of an ISO

frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995. 0270 - MARKING

Every portable tank must bear a metal plaque of non-corrosive material, permanently attached and containing the data mentioned in the IMDG Code chapter 6.7.

When the tank is tested according to the requirements for offshore container, it must receive one more metal plaque with the data mentioned in the appendix of MSC/Circ.860. 0271 - INSPECTION

On occasion of the approval certificate renewal, each five years, the tanks must be compulsorily submitted to an inspection with external and internal examination. For those used to carry solid substances not toxic or corrosive, that do not liquefy during transport, a hydraulic pressure test at 1.5 times the MAWP shall be conducted. The thermal insulation will be removed only to the extent as necessary.

The heating system is also subject to inspection and testing each five years.

In the intermediary period of two and a half years, the inspection shall occur in accordance with the provisions of Code IMDG (chapter 6.7). Regarding the internal and external examination, it must ensure that:

a) the casing is inspected regarding painting, corrosion, abrasion, cavities, distortions, welding and any other condition, including leakage, which may contribute to make the transport unsafe;

b) the piping, valves, heating or cooling system and gaskets are inspected for wearing, defects and other details , including leakage, which may render the tank unsafe for filling, discharge or transportation;

c) the manhole adjusting devices are operating without leaks through their gaskets; d) any bolts or nuts missing or loose are replaced or re-tightened in any flanged

connection or blind flange. e) all valves and devices are free from corrosion, distortion or any damage or defect

impairing the normal operation. The remote closing devices and shut-off valves must be operated to demonstrate their proper functioning;

f) the lining, if existing, is tested as required by the manufacturer; g) the marking is legible and contains the stipulated data; and h) the structure, rings and accessories used for lifting are in satisfactory conditions.

0272 - IMPACT TEST

In addition to the provisions of item 0264, a prototype fitting the definition of "container" given in the CSC must be capable of absorbing an impact greater than four times the MPGM following the accredited Entity's method (as explained in chapter 6.7 of the IMDG Code.


0273 - OFFSHORE CONTAINER TESTING The design and tests of maritime containers must consider the dynamic forces of

lifting and impact due to the handling in open sea and adverse weather and sea conditions. Therefore, besides the tests provided in item 0264:

a) the offshore container must be designed to withstand an inclination of up to 30° when fully loaded. The tank, fully loaded, shall be positioned at an angle of 30° with the floor and released without toppling. Repeat the operation on the opposite side;

b) the container must undergo a lifting test, lifted equally by the four rings and submitted to a total mass evenly distributed of 2.5 times the container's maximum permitted gross mass, for five minutes. These tests shall be conducted after the impact tests provided for in item 0264;

c) a second stage with lifting by two diagonally opposed rings, submitted to a total mass 1.5 times the container's maximum permitted gross mass, for five minutes. Repeat the test with the other two rings;

d) the load to apply shall be equal to its total mass plus the cargo. The container shall be lifted and positioned at an inclination angle of 5º between its lower edge and the floor plan, and at least 50 mm above the rigid floor. A quick release shall provide a velocity of 1 m/s at the moment of impact.

e) after the lifting tests, a non-destructive magnetic particle essay must be conducted by an accredited entity on the ring welds, in order to check their integrity;

f) thickness measurement test: the plate’s thickness shall be checked at no less than three points on the body, cover and bottom; and

g) other tests may be assigned to ensure the tank's adequacy to existing conditions. Meeting the provisions of Annex 2-E is indispensable. 0274 - INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONTAINER TESTING

The previous item established the tests which portable tanks must be submitted to, in order to be considered as Offshore Container.

No IBC type will be approved, or considered as, offshore container. Annually, according to item 17 of the MSC/Circ.860 annex, an

external and internal visual inspection must be carried on, as well as the lifting test by the four rings and two lifting tests with two rings.

The inspections of five years and two and a half years will follow the requirements for portable tanks.

SECTION XII

EXPLOSIVES

0275 - BIBLIOGRAPHY Whenever the IMDG Code refers to packagings intended for carrying dangerous

goods of class 1, it advises to consult the Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods - Model Regulations - vol. I, and regarding tests, the prescriptions of the Manual of Tests and Criteria - vol. II.


0276 - DOCUMENTATION Besides the documentation required so far, every legal person involved in recovery,

maintenance, handling, sportive use, dispatching, export, import, customs clearance, storage, trade and transit of explosives, accessories (of weapons, explosives or primers), chemical agents in any physical state, pyrotechnics or blasters, must forward to the DPC a notarized copy of the Registry Title (three-year validity), issued by the Brazilian Army Military Region Monitoring Service of Controlled Products, following the provisions of Decree No. 3665 of 11/20/2000 which approved the Controlled Product Monitoring Regulations (R-105).

In the Descriptive Memorandum of packagings for explosives, besides the provisions of item 0206 subparagraph c) and in order to better characterize the explosive, it is indispensable to inform the following data: melting point, acidity level, crystal density and compactness. 0277 - CLASSIFICATION

The classification of an explosive depends on its degree of confinement. Thus, both the product and the packaging are analyzed. The same product may have more than one entry in the List of Dangerous Goods.

Explosives belong to Class I, and encompass 6 divisions: a) Division 1.1 - substances and articles with risk of mass explosion (the effect is

virtually instantaneous); b) Division 1.2 - substances and articles with risk of projection, but no risk of a mass

explosion; Division 1.3 - substances and articles with risk of igniting and also a minor risk of

projection or both, but no risk of mass explosion. It encompasses those capable of irradiating a considerable heat, or sequential burning, producing a minor detonation or propagation effect or both;

Division 1.4 - substances and articles not presenting a significant risk. They present a small risk of ignition during the transport. The effects are mostly confined to the packaging and no projection of a significant size or distance is expected. An external source of fire will not cause, virtually, any sudden explosion of all the packaging's content.

This division's substances and articles are considered as compatible with group S, if packaged or designed in such a way that all the dangerous effect arising from an accidental functioning stays restricted inside the packaging and the latter does not suffer degradation by fire. Moreover, if every flame projection or burst has a limited effect, not significant to the point of impeding the safe approach of a firefighter within a range of five meters from the packaging;

e) Division 1.5 - insensitive substances with risk of mass explosion, and low probability of initiation or transition from burning to detonation under normal carriage conditions (the probability increases with the quantity carried); and

Division 1.6 - highly insensitive articles, not presenting a risk of mass explosion. The Classification and Compatibility Codes are shown in the tables of the Orange

Book's Vol. I, chapter 2.1. See also Annexes 2-C and 2-D and items 2.1.2.2 and 2.1.2.3 of the IMDG Code).


0278 - CLASSIFYING PROCEDURE: Substances or articles having, or suspected to have, explosive characteristics,

must be classified as Group 1, and assigned to the adequate division and compatibility group.

A new product is the one that, at the competent authority's discretion, involves: a) a new explosive substance or mixture considered as significantly different from

any one already classified; b) a new article drawing, an article with a new explosive substance, or a new

combination or mixture of explosive substances; c) a new packaging drawing for explosive substance or article, including a new

type of inner packaging; and d) a cargo unit, unless all the packagings have an identical risk classification

code. The manufacturer or user must gather, for the classification of a product, adequate

information concerning the standards and characteristics of every explosive substance and must provide the results of all relevant tests conducted.

The general scheme for classifying a substance or article in Class I has two stages:

a) the substance's or article's explosive potential must be verified, and its stability and insensitiveness, both chemical and physical, must be shown in order to be accepted. The criterion of Annex 2-C shall be used; and

b) upon acceptance as Class 1, proceed in this stage according to Annex 2-D. For testing criteria agreed internationally, details are given in vol. II of the Orange

Book. The carriage in containers, railroads or highways may require special tests

considering the quantity, confinement and kind of substance. Such tests must be specified by the competent authority.

Cases of uncertainty under any testing scheme must be decided by the Authority in the highest level. This decision may not have an international acceptance, and consequently, will be valid only in the country it was issued. 0279 - ASSIGNMENT AS CLASS 1

The results of tests 1 through 4 are used for determining if the product is accepted or not as class 1 If the product was manufactured with the purpose of producing an explosive or pyrotechnical effect, tests 1 and 2 are not necessary. If a packed article or substance fails test 3 and/or 4, it is necessary to re-design it until being accepted.

Tests 5, 6 and 7 (see Annex 2-D) are used: a) tests 5 - when the substance can be classified as 1.5; b) tests 6 - when the substance can be classified as 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4; c) tests 7 - when the substance can be classified as division 1.6; and d) in the case of compatibility with group S, the tests may be waived by the

competent Authority if the classification by analogy is possible by using results of comparison tests with another article. NOTE:

Articles, Pyrotechnic are UN 0428, 0429, 0430, 0431 and 0432, respectively: 1.1G, 1.2G, 1.3G, 1.4G and 1.4S.

Refer to the ORANGE BOOK Manual of Tests and Criteria, Vol. II The procedure in Annex 2-C is used to classify a substance or article for provisional

inclusion in the Class 1.


The tests of series 1 respond the question: Is it an explosive substance?; series 2: Is the substance too insensitive to be accepted in class 1?

The tests of series 3 are used to respond the question: Is the substance thermally stable, and, Is the substance too dangerous for transportation in the condition it was tested? (Annex 2-C). Types:

Test 3 (a) - a drop test to determine the sensitivity to friction. Test 3 (c) - a high-temperature test to determine the thermal stability. Test 3 (d) - an ignition test to determine a substance's response to fire. The tests of series 4 intend to respond the question: Is the article, packed article or packed

substance too dangerous for transportation? The conditions that may occur in transportation include high temperature, high relative

humidity, low temperature, vibration, impact and drop. Types: Test 4 (a) - a test of the articles' thermal stability. Test 4 (b) - a test to determine the risk arising from a drop. The results of these preliminary tests must be used in the classifying procedure.

0280 - APPLICATION OF THE METHODS

The acceptance procedure for substances with explosive effect begins with the application of tests 3 (a) through 3 (d), to determine if the substance is too sensitive to be carried in the condition it was tested. If failing test 3 (c), it will not be allowed for transport. If failing the other tests, it must be encapsulated, made less sensitive or packed with the purpose of reducing the possibility of external influence. The products passed in this series must be submitted to series 4. Re-testing is necessary if there was an operation aiming at making the substance less sensitive.

All articles, or packed articles containing substances that do not meet tests 3 (a), 3 (b) and 3 (c), must be submitted to the series 4 tests.

Packed substances are only submitted to test 4 (b). If the product does not meet tests 4 (a) or 4 (b), it must be rejected. However, it may be modified and re-tested. In case of suspicion, the Authority will submit it to series 1 and 2 tests. 0281 - DIVISION CLASSIFICATION

The procedure’s flowchart in Annex 2-D must be applied to all substances and articles intended for class 1, except those of division 1.1 (risk of mass explosion).

If the articles contain expensive control components that are inert, they may be replaced by other inert components of similar mass and volume.

The tests for classification by division are grouped in three series numbered 5 through 7, and aim at responding the questions shown in the flowchart of Annex 2-D). These tests must not be altered without the Authority justifying such action, internationally.

The tests of series 5 are used to respond the question: Is the explosive substance too sensitive to the risk of mass explosion? Types:

Test 5 (a) - a shock test to determine the sensitivity to an intensive mechanical stimulus.

Test 5 (b) - a temperature test to determine the trend of transition from deflagration to detonation.

Test 5 (c) - a test for determining if the substance, when in great quantity, explodes when submitted to an intense fire.


The results of series 6 tests are used to determine which division among 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 corresponds the closest possible to the product's behavior, if the cargo is involved by fire resulting from an internal or external source or in an explosion from internal sources. The results are also necessary for finding if the product may be compatible with group S of division 1.4, and if it must be excluded from class 1. Types:

Test 6 (a) - a package (packaging + product) test to determine if there is no mass explosion of the content.

Test 6 (b) - a test of a package containing an explosive substance or article, or explosive articles not packaged, to determine if an explosion propagates from one package to another or from one article not packaged to another.

Test 6 (c) - a test of a packaged substance or an explosive article not packaged, to determine if there is a mass explosion or risk of dangerous projections, heat induction and/or violent burning or other dangerous effect when involved by fire.

The question: Is the article extremely insensitive? Is answered by series 7, with a total of 10 test types. 0282 - TESTING OF SERIES 5 AND 6

Series 5 tests are used for knowing if the classification corresponds to division 1.5. Only substances approved in all 3 types of tests may be inserted in this division.

Series 6 tests are applied to packages containing explosive substances in the conditions they are presented for transport. The arrangement of products must be the most realistic possible and in normal transportation conditions, and must cause the most unfavorable situations after the tests. When explosive articles are carried unpackaged, the tests for unpackaged articles must be applied. All package types containing substances or articles must be submitted to the tests, unless:

a) the product, including any packaging, may be unquestionably classified in a division by experts in explosive qualification, based on results from other tests or available information; or

b) the product, including any packaging, is classified as 1.1. Test 6 (a) may be excluded if the explosive article is carried unpackaged or the

package contains one article only. Test 6 (b) may be excluded, if in each repetition of test 6 (a): - the package shows no external damage by detonation and/or ignition; or - the package content has not exploded fully, or exploded so weakly as to exclude

the propagation of explosive effect from one package to another in test 6 (b). Test 6 (c) may be excluded if, in test 6 (b), there is a practically instantaneous

explosion of virtually the total pile content. In such cases, the product is classified in division 1.1.

0283 - APPLICATION OF TESTS a) SERIES 3 TESTS

Item 10.3.3.2 of the Orange Book explains that failing test 3 (c) renders the product unfit for transportation, and the failure in tests 3 (a), 3 (b) or 3 (d) may be disregarded if the substance is encapsulated or somehow stabilized or packaged to reduce its sensitivity to external stimulus. The resulting new article must be submitted to the series 4 tests and, if packaged liquids or solids (not articles), to the series tests 4 (b) for checking if the safety level in


transport is consistent with the Class 1 requirements. The desensitized substances must be submitted again to series 3 tests for the same purpose. If a substance with explosive effect is approved in all series 3 tests, or an article with explosive effect is approved in all series 4 tests, the procedures for division classification will be applied.

b) SERIES 4 TESTSTest 4 (a) - a test for checking the thermal stability of articles and packaged

articles. Test 4 (b) (i) - for liquids. Requires special equipment. Test 4 (b) (ii) - 12-meter drop for articles, packaged articles and packaged

substances. Checks if the free fall occurs without causing a significant fire or risk of explosion. Not intended to be a test for checking if the packaging will withstand an impact.

Impact surface: a steel plate at least 75 mm thick with BRINELL hardness 200 or higher, solidly attached to a foundation of minimum thickness 600 mm.

If a packaged substance is tested, it must not be replaced by inert material. Observe a waiting period after impact, to ensure that there has not been any priming

or visible ignition. A rupture of the packaging or article is not considered a bad result if no fire or explosion occurs in all three drops.

c) SERIES 5 TESTSTest 5 (a) - checks the substance's sensitivity to the intensity of mechanical

stimulus. Requires special equipment. Test 5 (b) (i) - checks the substance's tendency of transitioning from

deflagration to detonation. Requires special equipment. Test 5 (b) (ii) - same above Test 5 (b) (iii) - same above Test 5 (c) - is used to determine if a substance, packaged for transportation, may

explode if engulfed by fire. Needed: 1) one or more packages in the condition and shape presented for shipping.

Volume no smaller than 0.15 m3 and 200 kg of explosive substance; 2) metal grid to support the products at no less than 1 m above ground, enabling

an adequate heating. A pool with flammable liquid may be used. The grid will then be placed at 0.5 m above ground;

3) use of wire to hold the packages attached to the grid;4) a fire during at least 30 minutes, or until the substance has had enough time for

reacting to the fire; 5) the ignition of at least two sides (use the wind to favor combustion);

6) high-speed cameras to register and record the event;

7) the distance between the bonfire battens must be of 10 cm, and they must

have approximately 50 mm2 of cross section;

A substance that explodes in this test is considered as not fitting division 1.5.

d) SERIES 6 TESTS

The results of all three series-6 tests are used to determine which division among 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 corresponds the closest to the behavior of a product's cargo if engulfed in fire resulting from an external or internal source, or in an explosion from an internal source. The results are necessary to determine if the product


can be accepted as compatible with group S of division 1.4, and if it will or will not be excluded from class 1.

The tests must be applied to explosive substances and articles packaged in the same condition and way they are presented for transportation, and arranged in the most unfavorable position. When explosive articles are carried unpackaged, the tests shall be applied as for unpackaged articles.

All package items containing substances or articles must be submitted to the tests, unless:

1) the product, including any packaging, may be unquestionably classified in adivision by a competent Authority, based on other tests or available information; or

2) the product, including any packaging, is classified as division 1.1.It is not necessary to conduct all three test types. Test 6 (a) may be excluded if the

explosive articles are carried unpackaged or the package contains only one article. Test 6 (b) may be excluded if in the test 6 (a):

1) the package's outside is intact after an internal detonation or ignition; and2) the package content has not exploded fully, or exploded so weakly as to exclude

the propagation of explosive effect from one package to another in test 6 (b). Test 6 (c) may be excluded if, in a test of type 6 (b), there is a practically

instantaneous explosion of, virtually, the whole pile's content. In such cases, the product is classified in division 1.1.

0284 - TESTING CONDITIONS The tests of this series are applied to packages containing explosive substances and

articles in the conditions they are presented for transportation. The arrangement must be that most unfavorable for both the transportation and the test results. All the explosive substances or articles must be submitted to the tests, unless:

a) the product, including any packaging, may be unquestionably classified in adivision by a competent Authority, based on available test results or information; or

b) the product, including any packaging, is classified as division 1.1.

NOTE: Definitions are shown in appendix B of vol. I of the Orange Book.

0285 - DEFLAGRATION AND DETONATION In a substance which reacts by deflagration, when ignited in its normal use, an

accelerated combustion occurs with a local increase of temperature and pressure. The reaction has a flame propagation velocity around 400 to 900 m/s. The most typical example is a powder block burning like a cigarette. The reaction's propagation occurs by thermal combustion. Each burning particle transmits heat to the adjacent particle, which ignites when reaching the deflagration temperature. Propellants are characterized by having intrinsically both the combustible and the oxidizer elements for reaction, and therefore, are not dependent of oxygen from the air for reacting. Deflagration is defined as a fast chemical reaction in which enough heat is generated to enable the reaction to occur and accelerate without any other source of heat. It is a surface phenomenon in which the reaction flows from a static material through its surface at a subsonic velocity.

Detonation consists of a violent chemical reaction within a chemical compound or mechanic mixture, involving heat and pressure and occurring through a static material at a supersonic velocity. The thermal reaction result is exothermic and of extremely high pressure, forming a shock wave which propagates at supersonic velocity


A substance reacting by detonation (instead of deflagration) when primed and used in its normal way, generates a shock wave in association with the chemical reaction. This reaction has a propagation velocity around 1000 through 8000 m/s. In this case, the reaction's propagation occurs through shock waves. Each particle, when detonating, creates a pressure wave known as shock wave. This wave compresses adiabatically the adjacent particle, which will be heated until detonating when reaching the explosion temperature. This way, the substance presents a rupturing effect with a very high impact pressure created by the shock waves.

Decree number 36656 of 11/20/2000, which published the Regulations for the Monitoring of Controlled Products (R-105), explains:

a) Deflagration is a phenomenon characterizing the so-called low explosives, consisting of the self-combustion of a body (composed of a combustible, an oxidizer and other substances), in any physical state, occurring by layers and under controlled velocity (from a few decimals of millimeter up to 400 m/s; and

b) Detonation is the phenomenon characterizing the so-called high explosives, consisting in the self-propagation of a shock wave through an explosive body, transforming it in more unstable products releasing a great amount of heat at a velocity running between 1500 and 8500 m/s. 0286 - TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR SERIES 6

The requirements are as follows: Test 6 (a) - Single package test Used to determine if a content's mass explosion occurs. Applied to packages of articles and explosive substances in the condition and way

they are presented for transportation. a) if the substance is intended to work by detonation, it must be tested with a standard

(Orange Book vol. II, page 381); b) if intended to work by deflagration, it must be tested with an igniter capable of

ensuring the substance's ignition inside the package (no more that 30 g black powder). The igniter must be placed at the substance's center inside the package;

c) if intended for the use as explosive, it must be tested with a standard detonator .

For packages of articles, see item 16.4.1.3.3 of the Orange Book, for it will depend on the article having or not its own means of ignition or priming.

The package, with its content, is placed on a steel plate lying on the ground. Similar packages filled with earth or sand must be placed all around and above, confining it for 0.50 m in all directions, if its volume does not exceed 0,15 m3; and 1,0 m, if its volume is higher. Alternative methods of confinement may be adopted by using bags or boxes around and above the tested package.

Once the substance or article is primed, the following is checked: evidence of thermal effect, projection effect, detonation, deflagration or explosion of the whole package content. A safe waiting time must be observed after priming. The test must be repeated three times if a decisive result does not occur before (e.g., total content's explosion).

Approval Criterion: Mass explosion (see definition in vol. I) indicates a candidate to division 1.1. The

evidence of this indication includes: - a hole or crater at the test's place; - damage to the plate under the package; - size of the burst; and - rupture of the package and dispersion of the confined material.


If the product is accepted as division 1.1, further tests are not necessary. Otherwise, proceed to tests of type 6 (b).

Test 6 (b) - Propagation Test A test for packages of explosive substances or articles, or unpackaged explosive

articles, aiming at determining how the explosion propagates. Necessary items for the test: a) a detonator to prime the substance or article; b) an igniter to ensure the substance's or article's ignition; c) appropriate materials for confinement; d) a steel sheet 3.0 mm thick to act as witnessing plate. Equipment for measuring the burst may be used. Procedure: The test is applied to a pile of packages of an explosive product or of unpackaged

articles, always in the way they are presented for transportation. If the explosive articles are carried unpackaged, the tests shall be applied as for unpackaged articles. A volume of 0.15 m3 must be placed on the plate lying on the ground. If exceeding this volume, at least one more will be placed the nearest possible in order to ensure the influence between products. The confinement must be made with packages of bags or boxes filled with sand, the nearest possible to the package under test and involving it for at least 1.0 m in all directions.

For packaged substances: a) if the substance must work by detonation, it must be tested with the standard

detonator (see type in the appendix of vol. II); b) if the substance must work by deflagration, it must be tested with an adequate

igniter (less than 30 g black powder) to ensure the substance's ignition inside its individual package. The igniter must be placed in the center of the packaged substance;

c) substances not intended for using as explosives, but provisionally accepted as class 1, must be tested using any ignition system. This procedure is used after submitting the substance to a test of series 6 (a) with a positive result.

For articles, packaged or not: see item 16.5.1.5 of the Orange Book. The substance or article must undergo priming, being observed in the same way as

described above for test 6 (a). In case of ambiguity when interpreting the results, the number of tests is increased.

Method and criterion for ensuring the test results: In test 6 (b), if the explosion of a package's content or unpackaged article is

practically instantaneous, the product is accepted as division 1,1, Evidence of such an occurrence includes:

- a crater (hole) at the test's place, considerably greater than a package or an unpackaged article.;

- damage to the plate under the pile, considerably greater than a package or an unpackaged article;

- burst size exceeding, significantly, a single package or unpackaged article; - a violent rupture and dispersion of most of the confined material. If the outcome is not as above, go to test 6 (c). Test 6 (c): - Bonfire Test A test for packaged explosive substances or articles, or unpackaged explosive

articles, to determine if there is a mass explosion or risk of dangerous projections, heat radiation and/or violent burning or other dangerous effect when involved by fire.


Necessary items: a) if the volume of the packaged substance or article, or unpackaged article, is

smaller than 0.05 m3 , add more packages to the set, in order to total a volume greater than 0.15 m3 ;

b) if equal to or greater than 0.05m3 , use three packages. If the volume of a packageor an unpackaged article is greater than 0.15 m3 , the competent Authority may waive the requirement of three packages for testing;

c) a metal grid to support the products and enable an adequate heating. If woodenbattens are used in the bonfire, the grid must stay 1 m above ground. If a fire pool is used, the grid must stay 0.5 m above ground;

d) it is allowed to use wire or tape for fastening the packages together on thegrid;

e) a flammable item to keep the fire burning for at least 30 minutes, or untilthe substance or article has had the time for clearly reacting to the fire ;

f) arrangements for causing the oil's ignition on at least two sides to make the woodburn, like kerosene for soaking the wood and make the ignition with a small stick or other means;

g) three aluminum sheets 2000 mm x 2000 mm x 2 mm (23 Brinell hardness and 90MPa tension strength) for acting as panels with supports to keep them vertical;

h) movie or video cameras, preferably of high speed, to record the events;i) a pyrometer capable of measuring the temperature of 8000 C in the bonfire;j) equipment for measuring the burst and a radiometer coupled with recording

equipment may be used, and more: The necessary number of packages, in the condition and way they are presented for

transportation, placed as close as possible, and being the case, tied with steel strip to keep them together during the test. Fuel to apply under the grid to make the fire involve the packages. Protection against wind must be provided, to avoid heat dissipation. The heat is produced by a wood batten reticulate (bonfire) through the combustion of a flammable liquid, capable of emitting flames with a minimum temperature of 800 0 C.

The air/fuel ratio must be balanced to avoid excess smoke darkening the events. The fire must have enough intensity and duration to make the material react between 10 and 30 minutes. The wood pieces must be of approximately 50 mm2 cross section or greater, at the Expert's discretion regarding the wood type and condition, arranged in the grill shape and at over 1m above ground. The battens must be placed 10 cm apart and extend for at least 1 m in all directions, beyond the packages (therefore, the package set will be, this way, surrounded by the battens). The fuel must be used in a way as to ensure burning for 30 minutes or until all the product has had, clearly, enough time to react to the fire.

Alternatives can be used for burning the wood, like liquid or gas fuel. If a pool is used, the distance will be 0.5 m. The burning must provide a correct engulfment by fire.

The aluminum panels are placed at four meters from the package set's vertical axis, arranged in three quadrants centered at that axis. Any marks on the panels before the test should be clearly identified, so as to be later distinguished from those generated by the test.

The ignition must be made in two upwind sides, simultaneously. Do not proceed to testing if the wind speed is above 6 m/s. A safe waiting time must be observed after the fire extinguishes.

Observe the following: - evidence of explosion;


MASS PROJECTION DISTANCE (m) (g) 20J 8J25 83.6 46.850 58.4 28.775 44.4 20.6

100 35.6 16.2125 29.8 13.3150 25.6 11.4175 22.43 10

- potentiality for damaging projections; and - thermal effects. This test is only made once, but if the used wood or fuel is not entirely consumed,

leaving a significant quantity of explosive substance not affected or near the fire, the test must be repeated using more fuel or a different method to increase the fire's intensity or duration. If the test result does not characterize the risk in order to determine a division, another test must be conducted.

Result acceptance criterion: For the product's classification, the questions in Annex 2-C flowchart

must be answered orderly. If a mass explosion occurs, the product goes to division 1.1. A mass explosion is

considered to occur when an expressive proportion of the substance explodes, in a way that practically the risk must be assumed as of a simultaneous explosion of the whole package content or unpackaged article.

If a mass explosion does not occur, but one of the situations below is verified, the product is classified in division 1.2:

a) perforation of any one of the three vertical panels;b) a metallic projection with a kinetic energy exceeding 20J, estimated through

the following graph and at the curve's adequate region. The graph was built with data from the following table:


MASS PROJECTION DISTANCE (m) 200 20 8.8300 13.9 6.3400 10.9 4.9500 8.9 4.1

If no event occurs which enables classification as 1.1 or 1.2, but any of the effects below comes to happen, the product goes to division 1.3:

a) a fire ball or jet extending beyond any of the three panels;b) burning projections emanating from the product, at more that 15 m from the

bonfire's vertical axis; c) the product's burning time is less than 35 seconds per 100 kg of liquid explosive

mass. Alternatively, in the case of low energy articles and substances, the product's burning irradiation exceeds that of the fire by more than 4 kW/m2 at a distance of 15 meters from the package set's or unpackaged article set's vertical axis. The irradiation is measured for a least 5 seconds and during the period of maximum emission.

If no event occurs which enables classification as 1.1, 1.2 or 1.3, but any of the effects below comes to happen, the product goes to division 1.4 and to a compatibility group other than group S:

a) a fire ball or projection extending by more than 1 meter from the bonfire flames;b) a projection of the product's thermal effect at over 5 meters from the vertical axis

of the packages or unpackaged products; c) a recess of more than 4 mm on any one of the panels;d) a metallic projection with a kinetic energy exceeding 8J, plotted in the appropriate

region of the graph Distance vs Mass; e) the product's burning time is less than 330 seconds per 100 kg of liquid explosive

mass. If no event occurs classifying the product as 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 or division 1.4, and to a

compatibility group other than group S, but no projection, thermal effect or burst occurs in a way that would significantly block a firefighter or other unforeseen response from approaching (5 m) the packages or unpackaged articles, then the product is accepted as division 1.4 and to a compatibility group other than group S.

If there is no overall risk of effects, the product is considered as excluded from class 1. As shown in Annex 2-C flowchart, the possibilities are:

a) if the product is an article intended for production as experimental explosive orone of pyrotechnical effect, then:

I) if there is any effect external to the device itself (projection, fire, smoke, heat orhigh noise), the same is not excluded from class 1 and the packaged product is accepted as division 1.4 and to the compatibility group S. For tests involving devices with no packaging or confinement, see Vol. I of the Orange Book, item 2.1.1.1 (b). Sometimes the mentioned effects are observed in test 6 (c), and in these cases the product is classified as 1.4 S with no further tests; and

II) if there is no effect external to the device itself, the product is excluded fromclass 1 according to the provisions of Orange Book vol. I, item 2.1.1.1 (b). This item refers explicitly to the device instead of the package. Thus, it is often necessary for the assessment of fundamentals regarding the functioning of a device without packaging or confinement.


Division 1.3/1.4 Division 1.4/1.4 S Mass (kg) Flow (15 m) Burning (s) Flow (5m) Burning (s)

20 1.36 kW/m2 21.7 1.36 kW/m2 195 50 2.5 29.6 2.5 266

100 4 35 4 330200 6.3 46.3 6.3 419500 11.7 63.3 11.7 569

b) if the product is not intended for production as experimental explosive or one ofpyrotechnical effect, it is excluded from class 1 according to the same reference of vol. I.

NOTE: 1 -the value of 35 seconds/100 kg corresponds to the average thermal flow of 4 kW/m2 at

15 meters and combustion heat of 12500 J/g. If the value of combustion heat is significantly different, the burning time may be corrected. For example, a corrected combustion heat of 8372 J/g burning for (8372/12500) x 35 = 23,4 seconds will produce the same flow level. The corrections for masses different from 100 kg may be done in accordance with the table below, which relates thermal flow values with variation of mass:

2 -the value of 330 seconds /100 kg corresponds to the average thermal flow of 4 kW/m2

at 5 meters and combustion heat of 12500 J/g. For different values, the same reasoning as in previous note can be made.

3 -during some burning essays, in identifiable events, it may be observed that the burning occurs in separate. In such cases, the burning time and the mass of each event may be used.

4 -the thermal flow can be calculated with the formula:

Where: F - thermal flow in kW/m2

C.E F=

4R2t

C - constant of 0,33 E - total energy in joules R - distance from the fire to the selected position, in meters T - observed burning time, in seconds

0287 - TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR SERIES 7 The tests of this series answer the question: Is the explosive article extremely

insensitive? It is one of the steps of the Annex 2-C flowchart. If the answer is YES, the product will be classified as class 1.6. If negative, it must undergo the series-6 tests. Due to particularities involved, the explanation is restricted to the Orange Book consulting sources.

SECTION XIII

MILITARY EXPLOSIVES

0288 - PACKAGING Military explosives must be subject to the provisions of Code IMDG regarding the

operational tests they are submitted often times and under responsibility. Consequently, they may obtain approval for transportation. And so they will, unpackaged, if without their priming mechanisms or with them blocked by, at least, two effective mechanisms protecting against priming.


When such articles have a propelling charge, or are self-propelling, their ignition systems must be protected against stimuli occurring during normal carriage conditions. 0289 - TESTS

A negative result in the series-4 tests or with an unpackaged article indicates that the product may be carried unpackaged. These unpackaged articles may be attached to bases or contained in baskets or adequate devices for handling, storage or launching so they are not left loose during transportation in normal conditions.

Special precaution must be maintained after the drop test, meaning, waiting a minimum of 5 (five) minutes before approaching for inspection. If smoke or a flame are observed, this time shall be extended to 30 (thirty) minutes after those signs disappear.

The handling of such an explosive must be restricted to 25 kg per person or 50 kg for two persons. Above these values, the use of mechanical handling means is compulsory. 0290 - TNT EQUIVALENT

An explosive material may be evaluated in terms of TNT equivalent, or TNT-equivalent mass. A TNT equivalent of 1.2 means that 1 pound of the material's weight will be equivalent to 1.2 pounds-weight of TNT.

Basically, explosives are compared to TNT due to the abundance of information available, both on TNT itself and on its properties, and due to the existence of multiple methods used for the tests.

The explosives are composed of an oxidant associated to a fuel. The former is the substance producing oxidation, i.e., the ability to combine with oxygen, and when both the oxidant and the fuel are present in the same molecule, such explosive is considered as ideal. Otherwise, the explosive is classified as not ideal 0291 - CHEMICAL REACTION

The chemical reaction occurs in a mixture or compound when, under heat or shock, it decomposes extremely fast releasing gas and heat. For this reaction to characterize an explosive, it must show all the following conditions:

a) generation of gases; b) development of heat; c) quickness of reaction; and d) initiation of the reaction by action of heat or shock.

0292 - CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MILITARY EXPLOSIVE

a) Availability and cost A production with characteristics of low cost, availability of great quantities, low

price and safety; b) Sensitivity

The relative sensitivity to impact of a given explosive may vary substantially, being determined through tests;

c) Stability Means the ability of an explosive to be stored without deteriorating. It is affected

by the chemical composition, ambient temperature and exposure to the sun;


d) WorkabilityMeans the ability to present an intended behavior regarding the way of releasing

energy. It is evaluated by several tests; e) Splintering

Means the characteristic determining the way an explosion effectively occurs inregard to fragmentation. The fastness in which the explosion reaches its peak pressure is the measure of its splintering;

f) DensityMeans the measure of weight per volume unit;

g) VolatilityMeans the quickness with which the explosive vaporizes. An undesirable

characteristic; h) Hygroscopicity

Highly undesirable, as it reduces the explosive's sensitivity, strength anddetonation velocity; and

i) ToxicityA characteristic reduced to a minimum in military explosives, for it may harm the

human body.

0293 - SMALL-CALIBER AMMUNITION Means those of up to .50 (12.7 mm) caliber. They are exempted from classification

tests, and included in division 1.4 S. Exception is made to the .50 caliber, classified as 1.4 G for the incendiary type and 1.4 C for the remaining types (regular, blank, tracer, armor-piercing, etc.)

0294 - WAIVER OF CLASSIFICATION TESTS

Military munitions may have the classification tests waived at discretion of the DPC, who will analyze the documentation used by the manufacturer for the intended classification, the Descriptive Memorandum and the munition's intrinsic characteristics. An opinion from the Navy Directorate of Weapons Systems may be requested.

SECTION XIV

IMDG VOLUME 3

0295 - CONTENTS In order to facilitate a possible consultation to the supplement of Code IMDG ,

the main topics addressed therein are here detailed: a) Emergency Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods (EmS) - prescribing

that before getting involved in handling and transport of dangerous goods, one must know their characteristics and dangerous properties and, if necessary, the safety precautions to be observed. Provides information on safety rules, personal protection equipment, and emergency procedures to follow and measures to take in case of an accident;

b) Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG)- intended for advising on the early diagnostic and treatment of chemical poisoning, within the resources available on board at sea;

Report procedures - provides guidance on general principles for the ships to follow when transmitting reports on accidents


involving dangerous goods, harmful substances or marine pollutants; d) Guide for the Packaging of Cargo Units - applicable, excepting bulk cargo, in all

operations of ground or sea transportation performed with containers (or cargo chests), vehicles, railway wagons or other similar means;

Limited Quantities - as established in item 212; f) Recommendations for the safe use of pesticides on board ships considered as

infested by insects and rodents - addresses the prevention, maintenance of sanitation conditions, main places normally infested, methods of chemical de-infestation, fumigation, allowed baits, use of pesticides, transport after fumigation, etc;

g) International Code for the Safe Carriage of Packaged Irradiated Nuclear Fuel, Plutonium and High-Level Radioactive Wastes on Board Ships (INF Code); and

h) The appendix, containing resolutions and circular letters referred in Code IMDG and its Supplement (volume 3).


CHAPTER 3

LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES

SECTION I

0301 - PURPOSE To establish requirements for construction and testing of life-saving appliances for

use in maritime platforms. 0302 - DOCUMENTS NECESSARY

a) Initial Documentation The approval request must be made through an application to the DPC, as in Annex

1-B. An application shall be made for each model or material type intended for approval. The following documents shall be attached to the application:

1) A notarized copy of the company's Articles of Incorporation, duly registered at the competent Commercial Registry, indicating the name(s) of the partner(s) responsible for managing the company, a Certificate from the corresponding Commercial Registry identifying the company's manager-partner or Minutes of the General Assembly appointing the person responsible for managing the company. The latter may, if allowed by company acts, delegate to third parties the Legal Representation before the DPC.

In a foreign documentation, the Articles of Incorporation or equivalent document will indicate the person responsible for the company, who may appoint a natural or legal person as representative through a contract or power of attorney with specific powers for such, duly notarized and valid internationally.

If the company had already done so previously, and in the absence of an alteration to the Articles of Incorporation, it is not necessary to forward another copy. However, the DPC may request it at any time.

2) Descriptive Memorandum, drawings and all necessary technical documentation for the material's perfect description and specification, including eventual accessories.

b) Description of the Technical Documentation 1) Descriptive Memorandum

The Descriptive Memorandum shall be presented in two copies in ABNT A-4 format, with a cover showing the document’s name and number, alterations, date and signature(s) of technically responsible person(s) clearly identified. The document shall contain data of the material to be approved, such as model, dimensions, weight, material used, detailed description of manufacturing raw materials, process and assembling, operational requirements and other necessary information for its complete characterization and registration.

2) Drawings The drawings shall be presented in two copies following ABNT Standards,

preferably in format A-4, containing at least the document's name, number, alteration, unit, scale, date and signature of the technician(s) responsible with legible name(s).

3) Quality Control Documentation Present documents verifying that the production, and the product's quality

control running tests and essays are compliant with the ISO Standards of Series 9000. 4) Production

Present a signed Statement by the company's Responsible Technician, assuring that the prototypes have been manufactured following requirements established in


a relevant IMO resolution, and that the production will follow the same, in order to achieve a correct and permanent quality control.

5) Other technical documents: (a) Assembly arrangements; (b) Component Lists; (c) Manuals or booklets of operation instructions; and (d) Suggested testing spreadsheet for the prototype's approval.

0303 - APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

a) The Approval Certificate will follow the model shown in Annex 3-B. The Certificate will be issued in two original copies. One original copy will be delivered to the applicant, against receipt, together with the documents provided for the granting of the Approval Certificate, endorsed through a stamp as in the model of Annex 1-C. The DPC will file the Certificate's other original copy, together with one copy of the documents, drawings and assessments carried out;

b) The Approval Certificate of a SOLAS-type material will be bilingual, following the same model of Annex 3-B. In these Certificates, the international Codes or Standards met by the approved product will also be entered;

c) The Certificate’s back may be used for entering data or other relevant information; and

d) The life-saving appliances' validity shown in the Approval Certificates is not compulsorily considered as an impediment to their use if expired. If they are not perishable, what determines the acceptability is their actual physical state, which depends on their maintenance and conservation. Special attention must be given to the manufacturing date shown in the appliance's tag. This date must be anterior to the Certificate's expiration date. All the lifejackets with Certificates numbered after 5/7/1997 have been tested in accordance with the requirements provided for in NORMAM 05/DPC. 0304 - TESTING SPREADSHEETS

The Testing Spreadsheets of SOLAS Life-Saving Appliances available on the DPC website http://www.dpc.mar.mil.br/, through the link "Segurança do Tráfego Aquaviário" (Waterways Traffic Safety), are based on provisions of the International Life-Saving Appliance (LSA) Code and IMO Resolution MSC.81(70), and must be used to guide the conduction of tests and data recording.

Resolution MSC.81(70) provides a greater precision for test conduct and clarifies possible questions regarding the methods applied. It was also placed together with the Spreadsheets under the title "Requirements of Life-Saving Appliance Tests", and must also be consulted for a better testing efficiency. 0305 - GENERAL PRESCRIPTIONS

Unless expressly provided otherwise, all life-saving appliances described in this chapter shall:

a) be well built and with adequate materials; b) where applicable, be rot-proof, corrosion-resistant and not unduly affected by

seawater, oil, or fungal attack; c) where exposed to sunlight, be resistant to deterioration; d) be of a highly visible orange color in all parts where this will assist detection. A

possible use of other colors shall be the object of a technical consultation to the DPC; e) be capable of operating satisfactorily if used in rough sea;


f) be clearly marked with approval information, including the Administration which approved it and any operational restrictions; and

g) where applicable, be fitted with electrical short-circuit protection to prevent damage or injury.

SECTION II

LIFEBUOYS

0306 - UTILIZATION CLASSES Lifebuoys are classified as: a) CLASS I (SOLAS) manufactured according to requirements provided in the

International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS). Used in open-sea vessels and platforms. Their use is effective in any water type, rough sea and remote places where the rescue may be delayed.

b) CLASS II - manufactured based on the SOLAS requirements, but softened for the use in vessels employed in open sea navigation and only in waters under national jurisdiction. They have the same buoyancy requirements as for class I lifebuoys.

c) CLASS III - intended for use in vessels engaged in the inland navigation. 0307 - REQUIREMENTS FOR CIRCULAR LIFEBUOYS

a) the specifications for class I lifebuoys (SOLAS) are in the Testing Spreadsheets mentioned in item 0304. They shall:

b) be manufactured according to the dimensions and masses shown in the following table:

Class Maximum

external diameter Minimum Internal

diameter Minimum mass

(kg)Class I 800 400 2.5 Class II 650 200 1.5 Class III 650 200 1.5

c) be made of a rot-proof material resistant to seawater, fresh water, oil and derivatives, and fungal attack;

d) be constructed of inherently buoyant material, not being dependent upon rushes, straw, wood dust, cork shavings, granulated cork, any other loose granulated material or any air compartment which depends on inflation for buoyancy;

e) a buoy constructed of solid cork must be lined with adequate material serving as fire protection, strengthener, and also enabling the painting and marking;

f) for classes II and III, the ambient temperature variation will be of -1oC through + 65o C; and the water temperature variation will be of 10o C through 30o C;

g) be resistant to deterioration of exposed parts, caused by sunlight; h) their color shall be orange, according to the provisions of item 0305,

subparagraph d); i) be fitted with a grabline of diameter not less than

9.5mm and length of at least 4 times the buoy's outside diameter. The grabline shall be secured at four equidistant points around the buoy's circumference,


to form four equal loops, and in a way as to enable its replacement in case of damage. The grabline's rupture strength shall be no lower than 5 kN;

j) not sustain burning or continue melting after being totally enveloped in a fire for a period of 2 seconds;

k) be constructed to withstand a drop into the water from the height at which it is stowed above the waterline in the lightest seagoing condition or 30 m, whichever is the greater, without impairing either its operating capability or that of its attached components;

l) be fitted, in classes I and II, with four (4) retro-reflective tapes, at 90o from each other, with dimensions of at least 30 cm radially by 5 cm transversally (see. figure below), as specified in Resolution A.658 (16). The retro-reflective tape shall be of a type approved by the DPC. Class III buoys are exempted from bearing such tapes;

m) be fitted with a buoyant lifeline that:

1) does not form kinks; 2) in buoys of classes I and II, have a length of not less than twice the height at

which it is stowed above the waterline in the lightest seagoing condition or 30 m, whichever is the greater. Its diameter shall be of not less than 9.5 mm. For class III buoys, the buoyant lifeline length may be of 20m; and

3) has a rupture strength of not less than 5 kN; n) Self-Igniting Light Device - lifebuoys of classes I and II shall be capable of bearing

a self-igniting light device with the following characteristics: 1) the device shall be secured to the buoy by a cord or other similar attachment

means; 2) be such that it cannot be extinguished or impaired by fresh or salt water; 3) be capable of functioning in all directions of the upper hemisphere, continuously

with a luminous intensity of not less than 2 candles, or flashing at a rate of not less than 50 flashes per minute with at least the corresponding effective luminous intensity;

4) be provided with a source of energy capable of ensuring its functioning as set forth in the previous item for a period of at least 2 hours; and

5) be capable of withstanding a drop into the water from the height at which it is stowed above the waterline in the lightest seagoing condition or 30 m, whichever is the greater, without impairing its performance.

o) the buoy shall be marked in a permanent way, on one of the faces, with a label of size 5cm x 9cm showing the following information:


BRAZILIAN NAVY

DIRECTORATE OF PORTS AND COASTS

CERTIFICATE No. / CLASS MANUFACTURER

MODEL SERIAL No.

MANUFACTURING DATE

p) buoys of classes II and III shall be submitted to and approved in the followingtests:

LIFEBUOY TESTS ANNEX 1 Conformity with specifications 3-E 2 Drop test 3-Q 3 Flotation test 3-I 4 Fire test 3-L 5 Strength test of the buoy 3-J 6 Strength test of the grabline and lifeline 3-J 7 Temperature cycling test 3-F 8 Test for oil resistance 3-G 9 Self-igniting lighting device test 3-R 10 Self-activating smoke signal test 3-S 11 Final inside inspection 3-P

0308 - REQUIREMENTS FOR BUOYANT SEATS a) The manufacturer may request approval of buoyant seats for the use as class III

lifebuoys. b) Buoyant seats shall be submitted to the same tests as for class III lifebuoys,

excepting the tests of tensile strength and resistance to flames.

0309 - REQUIREMENTS FOR HORSESHOE-SHAPED LIFEBUOYS The class III lifebuoys (Inland Navigation) may be manufactured in the horseshoe

shape, as shown in the figure below. They must be submitted to the same tests as for round lifebuoys, excepting the flame-resistance test and with a different arrangement for the tensile test.

0310 - SAMPLE SELECTION FOR TESTING LIFEBUOYS For testing, the manufacturer shall present three buoys per class and type intended

for approval. These samples will be marked with letters A, B and C, being all them submitted to examination regarding the prototype characteristics. Next, the samples will be submitted to the following tests:

a) Sample A - temperature cycling, drop, resistance to oil, and buoyancy, in thisorder;

b) Sample B - temperature cycling, drop, resistance to flames, and buoyancy, in thisorder; and


c) Sample C - mechanical strength. The latter will also be used for comparison withbuoys A and B, at the tests' end.

0311 - SAMPLE SELECTION FOR TESTING SELF-IGNITING LIGHT AND SELF-ACTIVATING SMOKE DEVICES USED ON LIFEBUOYS The tests provided in Item 1 of IMO Resolution MSC.81 (70), annexed to Resolution

MSC 70/23/Add.1, will be conducted in accordance with the spreadsheets mentioned in item 0304.

SECTION III

LIFEJACKETS

0312 - UTILIZATION CLASSES

Lifejackets are classified as: a) CLASS I (SOLAS) manufactured according to requirements provided in the

International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS). Used in open-sea vessels and platforms. Their use is effective in any water type, rough sea and remote places where the rescue may be delayed.

b) CLASS II - manufactured based on the SOLAS requirements, but softened for theuse in vessels employed in open sea navigation only in waters under national jurisdiction. They met the same buoyancy requirements as of lifejackets Class I (SOLAS). The only difference is the absence of lighting.

c) CLASS III - intended for use in vessels engaged in the inland navigation.

d) CLASS IV - manufactured to be used for long periods, by people involved injobs performed near the vessel's edge, wharf or suspended by planks or other devices, having the risk of accidentally falling into the water.

e) CLASS V - manufactured to be used in sports activities such as personalwatercraft, banana-boat, water ski, windsurf, parasail, sportive fishing, canoeing, small vessels classified as sports and/or recreation, mid-size sports and/or recreation vessels used in inland navigation and others.

f) CLASS V SPECIAL - manufactured to be used in sports activities developed inriver rapids, such as rafting or other activities known as of white waters.

0313 - REQUIREMENTS FOR RIGID LIFEJACKETS

The lifejacket shall be manufactured to meet the following requirements: a) enable a person, after demonstration, to don it correctly in no more than one

minute; b) enable inside-out donning, unless it can clearly be donned only in one way, being

so eliminated the possibility of incorrect donning; c) be comfortable to wear;d) for jackets of classes I, II, III, V and V Special, enable the wearer to jump into the

water from a height of 4.5 m without being injured or damaging/dislodging the lifejacket; e) for jackets of classes IV, V and V Special intended for high-speed activities, enable

the wearer to jump into the water from a height of 10 m without being injured or damaging/dislodging the lifejacket;


f) the lifejacket shall not sustain burning or continue melting after being totallyenveloped in a fire for a period of 2 seconds;

g) the lifejacket should show no sign of damage while under the effect of asurrounding temperature varying from - 30º to + 65º C for jackets class I and - 1º to + 65ºC for jackets class II. These requirements are not applied to jackets of the classes III, IV, V and V SPECIAL;

h) be capable of working, when in the water, under temperatures varying from - 1ºto 30ºC;

i) Rigid lifejackets may be manufactured in two types:1) YOKE - for overhead donning; and2) JACKET - for donning like a jacket.

j) The materials used in the lifejacket manufacture must be rot-proof and not undulyaffected by seawater, fresh water, oil and derivatives, or fungal attack;

l) Fasteners and buckles shall be of material resistant to oxidation, smooth and withno sharp edges that may harm the users or others;

m) Each lifejacket shall be fitted with a whistle made of material resistant tooxidation, firmly secured by a cord (except for classes IV, V and V SPECIAL);

n) The color for classes V and V Special does not need to follow a standard.

0314 - BUOYANCY AID (EAF) a) Concept:

A smaller jacket with less buoyancy, used in nautical activities as a replacementfor the traditional lifejacket in nautical sports or contests. It is used due to the difficulty to perform those activities when wearing a regular lifejacket.

The EAF shall be used by skilled swimmers (in sheltered waters and not in rough sea), capable of staying afloat until getting help by a rescue boat or other means. The EAF is intended to provide a minimum buoyancy to the user, ensuring his/her safety throughout the sports activity.

The EAF and the competition-type class V Special lifejacket, intended for the use by skilled swimmers, may be manufactured in a single size and their minimum effective buoyancy shall be of 6.0 kg (60N). The test shall be applied by the nautical event's Organizing Commission by using a simple iron weight with 6kg of mass. The EAF and class V Special lifejacket shall withstand the weight applied and stay afloat.

b) Requirements:The EAF shall be manufactured to meet the following requirements:1) enable a person, after demonstration, to don it correctly in no more than one

minute; 2) enable inside-out donning, unless it can clearly be donned only in one way,

being so eliminated the possibility of incorrect donning; 3) be comfortable to wear;4) enable the wearer to jump into the water from a height of 4.5 m without being

injured or damaging/dislodging the lifejacket; 5) enable the wearer, in activities involving high speed, to jump into the water from

a height of 10 m without being injured or damaging/dislodging the EAF; 6) be capable of working, when in the water, under temperatures varying from -1º to 30ºC; 7) the EAF may be manufactured in two types:

I) YOKE - for overhead donning; andII) JACKET - for donning like a jacket.


8) fasteners and buckles shall be of material resistant to oxidation, smooth andwith no sharp edges that may harm the users or others;

9) the EAF's do not need to use a standard color.10) they shall bear a printed marking with the following text: “NOT A LIFE-

SAVING EQUIPMENT, AND MUST BE USED ONLY BY SWIMMERS”.

0315 - BUOYANCY AND STABILITY a) Lifejackets of classes I (SOLAS) and II shall have enough buoyancy and stability

in calm, fresh water to: 1) lift the mouth of an exhausted or unconscious person not less than 120 mm

clear of the water with the body inclined backwards at an angle of not less than 20º from the vertical position and maximum 50º;

2) turn the body of an unconscious person in the water from a forward leaningposition to one where the mouth is clear of the water in not more than 5 seconds;

3) not have the buoyancy reduced by more than 5% after 24 h submersion in freshwater;

4) allow the wearer to swim a short distance and to board a survival craft;b) The lifejackets shall be manufactured in different sizes, as follows:

1) Lifejackets Classes I (SOLAS) and IIEXTRA-LARGE - for persons with mass of 110 kg or greater, with minimum

effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 15.6 kg (156N). LARGE - for persons with mass of 55 kg or greater but lower than 110 kg,

with minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 13.6 kg (136N). MEDIUM - for persons with mass above 35 kg but lower than 55 kg, with

minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 7.0 kg (70N). CHILDREN - for persons with mass of 35 kg or lower, with minimum effective

buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 5.0 kg (50N); 2) Lifejackets Classes III and V

EXTRA-LARGE - for persons with mass of 110 kg or greater, with minimumeffective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 10.0 kg (100N).

LARGE - for persons with mass of 55 kg or greater but lower than 110 kg, with minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 7.5 kg (75N).

MEDIUM - for persons with mass above 35 kg but lower than 55 kg, with minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 5.5 kg (55N).

CHILDREN I - for persons with mass above 25 kg but lower than 35 kg, with minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 3.5 kg (35N);

CHILDREN II - for persons with mass of 25 kg or lower, with minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 2.5 kg (25N).

3) Lifejackets Class IVMay be manufactured in a single size with minimum effective buoyancy of 9.0

kg (90N). c) The class V Special lifejackets shall be manufactured in different sizes, as

follows: LARGE - for persons with mass of 55 kg or lower, with minimum effective

buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 12.0 kg (120N); MEDIUM - for persons with mass above 35 kg but lower than 55 kg, with

minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 8.0 kg (80N). COMPETITION - in a single size, with minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to

a mass of 6.0 kg (60N).


d) The EAF shall be manufactured in different sizes, as follows:EXTRA-LARGE - for persons with mass of 110 kg or greater, with minimum

effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 9.0 kg (90N); LARGE - for persons with mass of 55 kg or greater but lower than 110 kg, with

minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 7.0 kg (70N); and MEDIUM - for persons with mass above 35 kg but lower than 55 kg, with

minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to a mass of 4.0 kg (40N); and COMPETITION - in a single size, with minimum effective buoyancy equivalent to

a mass of 6.0 kg (60N); e) The lifejackets and EAF shall be so manufactured as to ensure that the buoyancy

is provided by the solid material approved for filling, not depending on any closed-air compartment. Granulated or flocculated materials should not be used for filling, in order to prevent losses by tearing of the jacket or EAF.

0316 - LIGHT (ONLY FOR CLASS I LIFEJACKETS) The testing will be conducted following the spreadsheets mentioned in item 0304.

0317 - RETRO-REFLECTIVE TAPE (ONLY FOR CLASS I AND II JACKETS) As specified in Resolution A.658 (16), lifejackets class I and II shall have attached

six (6) strips of a retro-reflective material approved by the DPC, with approximately 5 cm X 10 cm on the jacket's outer face:


0318 - MARKING OF LIFEJACKETS AND EAF a) The lifejackets and EAF shall bear a sewed or printed label in a clearly visible

place, as in the following model:

LIFEJACKET CLASS (I, II, III, IV) DPC APPROVAL CERTIFICATE No. . MANUFACTURING DATE: /

MANUFACTURER: MODEL:SIZE:

SERIAL No.: MASS OF USER:

WARNINGS: - DO NOT CUT THE STRAPS OR MODIFY ANY PART OF THE LIFEJACKET.

- WASH IN FRESH WATER AND DRY AFTER USE. - DO NOT USE AS SEAT OF BACKREST.

- DO NOT PLACE HEAVY OR POINTED OBJECTS ON TOP.

- STORE IN A VENTILATED PLACE. - DO NOT DRY IN THE SUN OR NEAR HEAT SOURCES LIKE RADIATORS AND HEATERS

- VENTILATE IF STORED FOR A LONG TIME

- IDENTIFY THE LIFEJACKET WITH THE VESSEL'S NAME.

TRY WEARING THE LIFEJACKET BEORE PUTTING TO SEA.

- SHOW THE CHILDREN HOW TO USE IT - CHECK REGULARLY ITS CONSERVATION STATE

. - REPLACE THE LIFEJACKET WHEN IN POOR STATE

- DO NOT USE IN HIGH-SPEED ACTIVITIES.

LIFEJACKET CLASS (V, V SPECIAL) OR EAF

DPC APPROVAL CERTIFICATE No. . COMMERCIAL USE IN WHITE WATERS OR RECREATION OR COMPETITION (SPORTIVE USE) MANUFACTURING DATE: / / MANUFACTURER: MODEL: SERIAL No.: SIZE: MASS OF USER: FOR A PERSON ABOVE 55 KG THE NORMAL

SIZE AND SMALL SIZE FOR PERSONS ABOVE 25 KG WARNINGS: - DO NOT CUT THE STRAPS OR MODIFY ANY PART OF THE

LIFEJACKET. - WASH IN FRESH WATER AND DRY AFTER USE. - DO NOT USE AS SEAT OF BACKREST. - DO NOT PLACE HEAVY OR POINTED OBJECTS ON TOP. - STORE IN A VENTILATED PLACE. - DO NOT DRY IN THE SUN OR NEAR HEAT SOURCES LIKE

RADIATORS AND HEATERS - VENTILATE IF STORED FOR A LONG TIME


- IDENTIFY THE LIFEJACKET WITH THE VESSEL'S NAME. - TRY WEARING THE LIFEJACKET BEORE PUTTING TO SEA. - SHOW THE CHILDREN HOW TO USE IT. - CHECK REGULARLY ITS CONSERVATION STATE. - REPLACE THE LIFEJACKET WHEN IN POOR

CONSERVATION STATE. - DO NOT USE IN HIGH-SPEED ACTIVITIES.

The warning for not using the lifejacket in high-speed activities is applicable when the jacket has not been submitted to the 10m drop test.

b) Lifejackets of classes IV (working lifejacket), V (sports lifejacket), V Special (sportslifejacket for white waters) and the Buoyancy Aid (EAF) shall show, if not fitted with a device for keeping the head of an unconscious person clear of the water, the following warning besides that mentioned in the previous item, in a visible and prominent place:

WARNING USE UNDER SUPERVISION OR MONITORING - EQUIPMENT UNCAPABLE OF KEEPING THE HEAD OF AN UNCONSCIOUS PERSON CLEAR OF THE WATER

c) The lifejackets shall be marked with the manufacturing size. Those intended foruse by children shall also be marked with the symbol below:

d) The EAF's shall bear a printed marking with the following text: “NOT A LIFE-SAVING EQUIPMENT, AND MUST BE USED ONLY BY SWIMMERS”.

0319 - APPROVAL THROUGH TESTS The lifejackets shall be submitted to and approved in the following tests:

CLASSES TES

T No. LIFEJACKET TESTS I * II III IV V EAF ANNEX

1. Conformity with specifications X X X X X X 3-E 2. Temperature cycling applied to the

material used to provide buoyancy

X - - - - - 3-F

3. Temperature cycling applied tothe jacket itself

X X - - - - 3-F


CLASSES TES

T No. LIFEJACKET TESTS I * II III IV V EAF ANNEX

4. Oil resistance, applied to the materialused to provide buoyancy X - - - - - 3-G

5. Oil resistance, applied to the jacketitself

X X - - - - 3-G

6. Water absorption, applied to thematerial used to provide buoyancy X - - - - - 3-H

7. Buoyancy, applied to the jacket itself X X X X

X

X 3-I **

8. Strength, applied to the jacket itselfX X X X X X 3-J

9. Strength, applied to the cover andstraps

X X X X X X 3-J

10. Fire test X X X X - - 3-L 11. Seawater resistance X X - - - - 3-M 12. Donning X X X X X X 3-N 13. Light device functioning X - - - - - 3-O 14. Final inside inspection X X X X X X 3-P 15. Materials for cover, tapes and

seamsX X X X X X 3-J

16. Strength of the lifejacket body andloops

X X X X X X 3-J

17. Shoulder strengthX X X X X X 3-J

18. Additional for lifejacket materialsother than cork or kapok -

stability under temperature cycling. X X X X X X 3-F

19. Additional for lifejacket materialsother than cork or kapok - waterabsorption.

X X X X X X 3-H

20. Performance in the water - rightingX X X X X X 3-N

21. Performance in the water - drop X X X X X X 3-N 22. Performance in the water -

swimming and boardingX X X X X X 3-N

* The tests for class I lifejackets will be carried out in compliance with item 0304.** Annex 3-N shows a method for buoyancy measurement that can be applied to class I lifejackets.

0320 - TEST REPORT Shall be forwarded to the DPC upon conclusion of the tests and prototype

approval, by the person in charge of testing. It will necessarily contain the following items:

1) Name and address of the lab or entity where the tests have been conducted;2) Name and address of the testing Responsible Technician;3) Report's identification number;4) Date(s) in which the tests were conducted;


5) Legal Name and address of the prototype manufacturer, and if applicable, of its component manufacturers;

6) Product or prototype description (including dimensions, materials, closings, thickness, accessories, etc.), manufacturing process and dated pictures (average of eight) with reference to drawings;

7) Maximum capacity;; 8) Specific technical characteristics in the test's conduct, such as temperature,

viscosity, density, pressure, etc.; 9) Brief description of the tests and respective results, citing their supporting

legislation; 10) Express statement signed by the Responsible Technician, declaring that the

tests have been conducted in compliance with the legislation referred in item 9) and Maritime Authority Standards in force, acknowledging that the application of other methods or components or any divergence with the approved prototype should invalidate the results;

11) Signature with name and function of the Responsible Technician previously accredited by the manufacturer. 0321 - REQUIREMENTS FOR INFLATABLE LIFEJACKETS

Inflatable lifejackets (adult and child) shall be tested in compliance with the testing spreadsheets mentioned in item 0304. 0322 - REQUIREMENTS FOR CHILDREN LIFEJACKETS

Lifejackets intended for use by children shall meet, as far as possible, the requirements provided for in the previous items, following the corrections introduced in their respective tests.

The tests of the spreadsheets mentioned in item 0304 are applicable as mentioned below:

a) selection of children; b) performance in the water; c) righting; d) drop; and e) mobility.

0323 - SAMPLE SELECTION FOR TESTING LIFEJACKETS OR EAF

a) For testing, the manufacturer shall present six lifejackets per class, type and size for approval, or six EAF samples. They will be randomly marked by the DPC in each group, with letters A, B, C, D, E and F.

Specimen A will undergo the tests of prototype conformity, temperature cycling, oil resistance, seawater resistance, strength, buoyancy, donning and performance, in this order.

Specimen B will undergo the tests of prototype conformity, temperature cycling, fire resistance, seawater resistance, strength, buoyancy, donning and performance, in this order.

Specimens C, D, E and F will undergo the tests of buoyancy, donning and performance, and will serve as comparison with lifejackets A and B, after being submitted to their respective tests.


TESTING SEQUENCE (SIX FOR EACH CLASS, TYPE AND SIZE)

LIFEJACKETS/EAF SAMPLES

TESTS The B C / D / E / F

1 Prototype conformity 1st A 1stB

2 Temperature cycling 2nd A 2ndB

3 Oil resistance 3rd A

4 Seawater resistance 4th A 4thB

5 Strength, applied to the jacket itself 5th A 5thB

6 Buoyancy 6th A 6thB 1stC / D / E / F

7 Donning and performance 7th A 7thB 2ndC / D / E / F

8 Fire test 3rdB

9 Final inside inspection 8thA 8thB 3rdC / D / E / F

Specimens A and B must be compared with C, D, E and F in the final inspection.

b) For testing the cover and straps, the manufacturer shall present a number of specimens in accordance with ANNEX 3-J.

c) For testing the lifejacket and EAF buoyant material, eight specimens of 300mm2 and same thickness as in the lifejacket or EAF shall be prepared.

SECTION IV

PYROTECHNIC ARTIFACTS

0324 - CONCEPTUALIZATION The artifacts provided in the International Life-Saving Appliance Code (LSA Code)

and Resolution MSC.81(70) are subject to approval: Rocket Parachute Flare, Hand Flare and Buoyant Smoke Signal. The requirements are provided in the IMO Resolutions MSC/70/23/Add 1 and MSC 81/70 annex 6, with the testing spreadsheets annexed to MSC/CIRC 980, both in the DPC website as mentioned in item 0304.

The Approval Certificate for these artifacts will be issued both in Portuguese and English, and the text will clearly mention that the tests followed the guidance provided in the Resolutions cited above. 0325 - REQUIREMENTS FOR PYROTECHNIC SIGNALS

a) Distress Signals Distress signals are resources used at sea or onshore, in daylight or at night, for

requesting help and consist in the following pyrotechnic artifacts: 1) Rocket Parachute Flare

This artifact shall: (a) be contained in a water resistant enclosure; (b) show brief instructions printed on the enclosure, or diagrams, clearly

illustrating its way of use; (c) have an integrated ignition system; (d) be so designed as to not cause discomfort to the person holding the

enclosure, when used in accordance with the manufacturer instructions;


(e) when launched vertically, reach a height of not less than 300 m. At the trajectory's highest point, or near it, the rocket shall eject a parachute

flare that shall: - burn issuing a bright red light; - burn uniformly, with an average luminous intensity not lower than 30,000

candles; - have a combustion period of not less than 40 seconds; - have a downward speed not higher than 5 m/s; and - not damage the parachute or its accessories during the combustion.

2) Hand Flare. This artifact shall: (a) be contained in a water resistant enclosure; (b) show brief instructions printed on the enclosure, or diagrams, clearly

illustrating its way of use; (c) have an integrated ignition system; (d) be so projected as to not cause discomfort to the person holding the

enclosure and not present danger to the survival craft with combustion residues or incandescent material, when used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions;

(e) burn issuing a bright red light; (f) burn uniformly, with an average luminous intensity not lower than 15,000

candles; (g) have a combustion period of not less than 1 minute; and (h) keep burning after submerged in water for a period of 10 seconds, at 100

mm below the water surface. 3) Buoyant Smoke Signal

This artifact shall: (a) be contained in a water resistant enclosure; (b) not explode when ignited, if used in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions; (c) show brief instructions printed on the enclosure, or diagrams, clearly

illustrating its way of use; (d) release an orange smoke, uniformly, for a period of at least 3 minutes when

floating in calm waters; (e) not emit any flame while releasing

smoke; (f) not sink in a rough sea; and (g) keep releasing smoke after submerged for a period of

10 seconds, 100 mm beneath the water surface. b) Approval of Pyrotechnic Signals

Besides these Standards' provisions, the approval process of pyrotechnic signals requires compliance with the IMO requirements, and submission to the tests provided for in specific Standards of the Navy Directorate of Weapon Systems (DSAM).

SECTION V

SURVIVAL CRAFT

0326 - REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFERAFTS The testing will be conducted following the spreadsheets mentioned in item 0304.


a) Liferaft construction 1) Every liferaft shall be so constructed as to be capable of withstanding the

exposure to weather for 30 days, floating. 2) A liferaft shall be so constructed that if launched into the water from a height of

18 meters, together with its equipment, it will work satisfactorily. If stowed at a height greater than 18 meters above the waterline in the lightest seagoing condition, it shall be of a type already drop-tested from a height at least the same in which the raft is stowed. The approval certificates issued shall specify the raft's drop testing height.

3) A liferaft, when floating, shall be capable of withstanding repeated jumps onto it, from a height of at least 4.5 m above its floor, with or without having its canopy erected.

4) A liferaft and its accessories shall be so constructed as to allow its towing at a speed of 3 knots in calm waters, when carrying the full complement of persons and equipment, with one of its sea-anchors streamed.

5) A liferaft shall be fitted with a canopy to protect its occupants from exposure to the weather, automatically erected upon the raft's launching and becoming waterborne. The canopy shall meet the following requirements:

(a) provide insulation against heat and cold, by means of two coverage layers separated by air or any other equally effective means. Means of preventing accumulation of water in the air gap shall be provided;

(b) its interior shall be of a color that does not cause discomfort to the occupants;

(c) each entrance shall be clearly indicated and fitted with adjustable and effective closing devices, capable of an easy and quick opening from inside and outside by people wearing immersion suits, and closing from inside, enabling the ventilation but blocking the entry of seawater, wind and cold. Liferafts accommodating more than eight people shall have, at least, two diametrically opposite entrances;

(d) admit always sufficient air for its occupants, even with the entrances closed; (e) be fitted with at least one viewing port; (f) be provided with rainwater collection means; (g) be provided with means to mount a survival craft radar transponder at a

height of at least 1 meter above the sea level; and (h) be high enough for sheltering all the occupants seated, in all parts of the

canopy. 6) The liferaft manufacturing facility must meet the provisions set forth in

Installation Requirements for Maintenance Stations (item 0504). b) Minimum carrying capacity and mass of liferafts

1) No liferaft will be approved if its carrying capacity is lower than six persons. 2) Unless the liferaft must be deployed by a launching appliance approved

according to the provisions of item 0333, or is not required to be stowed in a place enabling a quick side-to-side transfer, the liferaft's total mass including its container and equipment shall not be greater than 185 kg.


c) Liferaft accessories 1) Lifelines shall be firmly attached around the liferaft, both in the outside and the

inside. 2) The liferaft shall be fitted with an efficient painter of length 10 m or greater plus

the distance from the stowage position to the waterline with the ship in the lightest seagoing condition, or 15 meters, whichever is the greater. The painter system's rupture strength, including its means of securing to the liferaft and excluding the weak link, shall not be lower than: 15.0 kN for liferafts authorized to accommodate over 25 persons, 10.0 kN for liferafts authorized to accommodate between 9 and 25 persons, and 7.5 kN for any other liferaft.

3) The liferaft's canopy top shall be fitted externally with a manually controlled lamp. The light shall be white and capable of working continuously for at least 12 hours with a luminous intensity not lower than 4.3 candles, in all directions of the upper hemisphere. In case of a flashing light, it shall flash at a rate not lower than 50 times per minute and not higher than 70 times per minute, during a working period of 12 hours, with a corresponding effective luminous intensity. The lamp shall turn on automatically when the canopy is erected. The batteries shall be of a type that does not deteriorate with humidity, with the liferaft stowed.

4) A manually controlled lamp shall be fitted inside the liferaft, capable of working continuously for 12 hours. It shall turn on automatically when the canopy is erected, and have enough intensity to allow the reading of instructions on survival and the equipment. The batteries shall be of a type that does not deteriorate with humidity, with the liferaft stowed.

d) Davit-launched liferafts 1) In addition to the above requirements, a liferaft for use with an approved

launching appliance shall: (a) when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment, be capable

of withstanding a lateral impact against the ship's side, at an impact velocity of not less than 3.5 m/s and also a drop into the water from a height of not less than 3 m without damage that will affect its function;

(b) be provided with means for bringing the liferaft alongside the embarkation deck and holding it securely during embarkation.

2) Every passenger ship davit-launched liferaft shall be so arranged that it can be rapidly boarded by its full complement of persons.

3) Every cargo ship davit-launched liferaft shall be so arranged that it can be boarded by its full complement of persons in not more than 3 minutes from the time the instruction to board is given.

e) Liferaft equipment 1) The normal equipment of every liferaft shall consist of:

(a) one buoyant rescue quoit, attached to not less than 30 m of buoyant line; (b) one knife of the non-folding type with a buoyant handle and lanyard,

attached and stowed in a pocket on the canopy's outside near the point at which the painter is attached to the liferaft. In addition, a liferaft authorized to accommodate 13 persons or more shall be provided with a second knife, not necessarily of the non-folding type;


(c) one buoyant bailer, for liferafts authorized to accommodate not more than 12 persons. Two buoyant bailers, for liferafts authorized to accommodate 13 persons or more;

(d) two sponges; (e) two sea-anchors each with a shock-resistant hawser, one being spare and

the other permanently attached to the liferaft in such a way that when the liferaft inflates or is waterborne it will cause the liferaft to lie oriented to the wind in the most stable manner. The strength of each sea-anchor and its hawser shall be adequate to all sea conditions. The sea-anchors shall have means to prevent twisting of the line and shall be of a type which is unlikely to turn inside out between its shrouds Sea-anchors permanently attached to davit-launched liferafts and to liferafts fitted on passenger ships shall be arranged for manual deployment only. All other liferafts shall be fitted with sea-anchors which are automatically deployed when the liferaft inflates;

(f) two buoyant paddles; (g) three tin-openers (when the ration comes in tins) and a pair of scissors.

Safety knives with special tin-opener blades are satisfactory for this requirement; (h) one waterproof first-aid case, capable of being closed tightly after use; (i) one whistle or equivalent sound signal

; (j) four rocket parachute flares of the approved type; l) six hand flares of the approved type; (m) two buoyant smoke signals of the approved type; (n) one waterproof electric torch suitable for Morse signalling,

with a spare set of batteries and a spare bulb, in a waterproof container; (o) an efficient radar reflector, unless a survival craft radar transponder

is stowed in the liferaft; (p) one daylight signalling mirror with instructions on its use for signalling to

ships and aircraft; (q) one copy of the life-saving signals referred to in the SOLAS Regulation

V/16 on a waterproof card or in a waterproof container; (r) one set of fishing tackle; (s) a food ration with a total of not less than 10,000 kJ for each person the

liferaft is authorized to accommodate. These rations shall be palatable, edible throughout the recommended shelf life, and packed in a manner which can be readily divided and easily opened. The rations shall be kept in airtight packaging and be stowed in a watertight container;

(t) watertight receptacles containing a total of 1.5 liter of fresh water for each person the liferaft is authorized to accommodate, of which either 0.5 l per person may be replaced by a desalting apparatus capable of producing an equal amount of fresh water in two days or 1 l per person may be replaced by a manually powered reverse-osmosis desalinator, capable of producing an equal amount of fresh water in two days;

(u) one unbreakable graduated drinking cup;


(v) anti-seasickness medicine enough for at least 48 hours and one seasickness bag for each person the liferaft is authorized to accommodate;

(x) instructions on how to survive; (y) instructions for immediate action; and (z) thermal protective aids complying with the provisions of item 0417, sufficient

for 10% of the number of persons the liferaft is authorized to accommodate or two, whichever is the greater.

2) The marking on liferafts equipped in full compliance with these Standards shall be “PACOTE SOLAS - A”, in capital letters of the Roman alphabet.

3) In the case of passenger ships engaged in coastal or inland navigation of such a nature and duration that, in the opinion of the DPC, not all of the items specified are necessary, the DPC may allow the liferafts carried on any such ships to be provided with a reduced equipment supply. The liferaft marking, in this case, shall be “PACOTE SOLAS - B”, in capital letters of the Roman alphabet.

4) The equipment shall be stowed in a container which, if it is not an integral part of, or permanently attached to, the liferaft, shall be stowed and secured inside the liferaft and be capable of floating in water for at least 30 minutes without damage to its contents.

f) Float-free arrangements for liferafts 1) The liferaft painter system shall provide a connection between the ship and the

liferaft and shall be so arranged as to ensure that the liferaft when released and, in the case of an inflatable liferaft, inflated, is not dragged under by the sinking ship.

2) If a weak link is used in the float-free arrangement, it shall:

(a) not be broken by the force required to pull the painter from the liferaft container

; (b) if applicable, be strong enough to allow the liferaft to inflate; and (c) break under a straining force of 2.2 0.1 kN.

3) If a hydrostatic release unit is used in the float-free arrangements, it shall: (a) be constructed of corrosion resistant, compatible materials so as to prevent

malfunction of the unit. Galvanizing or other forms of metallic coating on parts of the hydrostatic release unit shall not be accepted;

(b) automatically release the liferaft at a depth of not more than 4 m; (c) have drains to prevent the accumulation of water in the hydrostatic chamber

when the unit is in its normal position; (d) be so constructed as to prevent release when washed over by

waves; (e) be permanently marked on its exterior with its

type and serial number; (f) be permanently marked on the unit or identification plate securely attached

to the unit, with the date of manufacture, type and serial number and whether the unit is suitable for use with a liferaft capable of accommodating more than 25 persons;

(g) be such that each part connected to the painter system has a strength of not less than that required for the painter; and


(h) if disposable, it shall be marked with means of determining its date of expiry. g) Inflatable liferafts

1) Inflatable liferafts shall comply, in addition to the prescriptions above, with the following requirements:

(a) The main buoyancy chamber shall be divided into not less than two separate compartments, each inflated through a non-return inflation valve on each compartment. The buoyancy chambers shall be so arranged that, if any one of the compartments is damaged or fails to inflate, the intact compartments shall be able to support, with positive freeboard over the liferaft's entire periphery, the number of persons which the liferaft is authorized to accommodate, each having a mass of 75 kg and seated in their normal positions.

(b) The liferaft's floor shall be waterproof and sufficiently insulated against cold by any of the following means:

- one or more compartments that the occupants can inflate, or which inflate automatically and can be deflated and re-inflated by the occupants; or

- by other equally efficient means not dependent on inflation. (c) The liferaft shall be capable of being inflated by one person. The liferaft shall

be inflated with a non-toxic gas. Inflation shall be completed within a period of 1 minute at an ambient temperature of between 18º C and 20º C and within a period of 3 minutes at an ambient temperature of -30º C. After inflation, the liferaft shall maintain its form when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment.

(d) Each inflatable compartment shall be capable of withstanding a pressure equal to at least three times the working pressure and shall be prevented from reaching a pressure exceeding twice the working pressure either by means of relief valves or by a limited gas supply. Means shall be provided for fitting a topping-up pump or bellows, so that the working pressure can be maintained.

h) Carrying capacity of inflatable liferafts The maximum number of persons that a liferaft shall be permitted to accommodate

shall be equal to the lesser of the following, but never less than six: 1) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing by 0.096 the volume, measured

in cubic meters, of the main buoyancy tubes (which for this purpose shall include neither the arches nor the thwarts, if fitted) when inflated; or

2) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing by 0.372 the inner horizontal cross-sectional area of the liferaft measured in square meters (which for this purpose may include the thwart or thwarts, if fitted) measured to the innermost edge of the buoyancy tubes; or

3) the number of persons having an average mass of 75 kg, all wearing either immersion suits and lifejackets or, in the case of davit-launched liferafts, lifejackets, that can be seated with sufficient comfort and headroom without interfering with the operation of any of the liferaft's equipment.

i) Access to inflatable liferafts 1) At least one entrance shall be fitted with a semi-rigid boarding ramp, capable

of supporting a person weighing 100 kg, to enable persons to board the liferaft from the sea. The boarding ramp shall be so arranged as to prevent significant deflation of the liferaft if the ramp is damaged. In the case of a davit-launched liferaft having more than one entrance,


the boarding ramp shall be fitted at the opposite entrance of the bowsing lines and embarkation facilities.

2) Entrances not provided with a boarding ramp shall have a boarding ladder, the lower step of which shall be situated not less than 0.4 m below the liferaft's light waterline.

3) There shall be means inside the liferaft to assist persons to pull themselves into the liferaft from the ladder.

j) Stability of inflatable liferafts 1) Every inflatable liferaft shall be so constructed that, when fully inflated and

floating with the canopy uppermost, it is stable in a seaway. 2) A liferaft's stability when in the inverted position shall be such that one person

can right it in a seaway or in calm water. 3) A liferaft's stability when loaded with its full complement of persons and

equipment shall be such that it can be towed at speeds of up to 3 knots in calm water. 4) The liferaft shall be fitted with water pockets complying with the following

requirements: (a) the water pockets shall be of a highly visible color; (b) the design shall be such that the pockets fill to at least 60% of their capacity

within 25 seconds after deployment; (c) the pockets shall have an aggregate capacity of at least 220 liters for liferafts

of up to 10 persons; (d) the pockets for liferafts certified to carry more than

10 persons shall have an aggregate capacity of not less than 20N liters, where N = number of persons carried; and

(e) the pockets shall be positioned symmetrically around the liferaft's circumference. Means shall be provided to enable air to readily escape from underneath the liferaft.

l) Containers for inflatable liferafts 1) The liferaft shall be packed in a container that is:

(a) so constructed as to withstand hard wear under conditions encountered at sea;

(b) of sufficient inherent buoyancy, when packed with the liferaft and its equipment, to pull the painter from within and to operate the inflation mechanism should the ship sink; and

(c) as far as practicable watertight, except for drain holes in the container bottom.

2) The liferaft shall be packed in its container in such a way as to ensure, as far as possible, that the waterborne liferaft inflates in an upright position on breaking free from its container.

3) The container shall be marked with: (a) maker's name or trade mark; (b) serial number; (c) name of approving authority and the number of persons it is permitted

to carry; (d) SOLAS class II or III; (e) type of emergency pack enclosed; (f) date when last serviced; (g) length of painter; (h) maximum permitted height of stowage above waterline (depending on

drop-test height and length of painter); and (i) launching instructions.


m) Markings on inflatable liferafts Inflatable liferafts shall be marked with: (a) maker's name or trade mark;

(b) serial number; (c) date of manufacture (month and year); (d) name of approving authority; (e) name and place of the servicing station where it was last serviced, and date

when last serviced; and (f) number of persons it is permitted to accommodate, over each entrance in

characters not less than 100 mm in height of a color contrasting with that of the liferaft. 2) Each liferaft shall be marked with the name and port of registry of the ship to

which it is to be fitted. This marking shall be made in such a form that the ship’s identification can be changed at any time without opening the container.

n) Davit-launched inflatable liferafts 1) In addition to complying with the above requirements, a liferaft for use with an

approved launching appliance shall, when suspended from its lifting hook or bridle, withstand a load of:

(a) four times the mass of its full complement of persons and equipment, at an ambient temperature and a stabilized liferaft temperature of 20º C 3º C, with all relief valves inoperative; and

(b) 1.1 times the mass of its full complement of persons and equipment at an ambient temperature and a stabilized liferaft temperature of -30º C with all relief valves operative.

2) Rigid containers for liferafts to be launched by a launching appliance shall be so secured that the container or parts of it are prevented from falling into the sea during and after inflation and launching of the contained liferaft.

o) Additional equipment for inflatable liferafts In addition to the equipment prescribed in item 0326 e), every inflatable liferaft

shall be provided with: (a) one repair outfit for repairing punctures in buoyancy compartments; and (b) one topping-up pump or bellows. 2) The knives and scissors shall be of the safety type.

p) Tests for approval of inflatable liferafts 1) Rigid liferafts shall be submitted to the approval tests provided in item 0304. 2) The fabric used for manufacturing the liferaft shall be tested in accordance with

Annex 3-T. 3) The emergency rations shall be approved by the DPC.

0327 - REQUIREMENTS FOR RIGID LIFERAFTS Rigid liferafts shall comply with the requirements of item 0326, besides the

provisions of this item. a) Construction of rigid liferafts

The buoyancy of the liferaft shall be provided by approved inherently buoyant material placed as near as possible to the liferaft's periphery. The buoyant material shall be fire-retardant or be protected by a fire-retardant covering.

2) The floor of the liferaft shall prevent the ingress of water and behave as thermal insulator.


b) Carrying capacity of rigid liferafts The number of persons a liferaft shall be permitted to accommodate shall be equal

to the lesser of: 1) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing by 0.096 the volume,

measured in cubic meters, of the buoyancy material multiplied by a factor of 1 minus the specific gravity of that material; or

2) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing by 0.372 the horizontal cross-sectional area of the liferaft's floor measured in square meters; or

3) the number of persons having an average mass of 75 kg, all wearing immersion suits and lifejackets, that can be seated with sufficient comfort and headroom without interfering with the operation of any of the liferaft's equipment.

c) Access into rigid liferafts 1) At least one entrance shall be fitted with a rigid boarding ramp, to enable persons

to board the liferaft from the sea. In the case of a davit-launched liferaft having more than one entrance, the boarding ramp shall be fitted at the entrance opposite the bowsing lines and embarkation facilities.

2) Entrances not provided with a boarding ramp shall have a boarding ladder, the lower step of which shall be situated not less than 0.4 m below the liferaft's light waterline.

3) There shall be means inside the liferaft to assist persons to pull themselves into the liferaft from the ladder.

d) Stability of rigid liferafts 1) Unless the liferaft is capable of operating safely whichever way up it is floating, its

strength and stability shall be such that it is either self-righting or can be readily righted in a seaway and in calm water by one person.

2) A liferaft's stability when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment shall be such that it can be towed at speeds of up to 3 knots in calm water.

e) Markings on rigid liferafts Rigid liferafts shall be marked with: 1) name and port of registry of the ship to which they belong; 2) maker's name or trade mark; 3) serial number; 4) name of approving authority; 5) number of persons it is permitted to accommodate, over each entrance in

characters not less than 100 mm in height of a color contrasting with that of the liferaft. 6) SOLAS; 7) type of emergency pack enclosed; 8) length of painter; 9) maximum permitted height of stowage above waterline (drop-test height); and 10) launching instructions.

f) Davit-launched rigid liferafts In addition to complying with the above requirements, a rigid liferaft for use with

an approved launching appliance shall, when suspended from its lifting hook or bridle, withstand a load of four times the mass of its full complement of persons and equipment.


g) Tests for approval of rigid liferafts Rigid liferafts shall be submitted to the approval tests provided in item 0304.

0328 - REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS II AND CLASS III LIFERAFTS

The technical requirements to be met by Class II and Class III liferafts are, basically, the same as for Class I liferafts, with the following softened conditions:

a) Endurance time afloat at sea of fifteen (15) days; b) Drop height to the water of nine (9) meters; c) Use of a canopy erected manually and dispensed from the two layers with air gap, for liferafts of Class II; d) Canopy exemption for Class III liferafts; e) Use of a buoyant element divided into not less than two compartments; f) Use of a single-layer floor; g) Minimum ambient temperature for inflation 0 C; h) Flooding test with waves of up to 0.3 m height; i) Carry the following equipment:

Item Description Liferaft Class II Liferaft Class III01 Buoyant Rescue Quoit with 30 m Line 01 - x - 02 Buoyant Knife, Safety Type 01 01 03 Buoyant Bailer 01 01 04 Sponges 02 02 05 Topping-up Pump or Bellows 01 01 06 Sea-Anchor 01 01 07 Buoyant Paddles 02 02 08 Whistle 01 01

09 Manual Rocket, Red Star w/Parachute

02

0210 Hand Flares, Red Light 03 02 11 Buoyant Smoke Signal 01 - x -

12 Waterproof Flashlight with Spare Batteries and Bulb

01

01

13 Radar Reflector 01 - x - 14 Signaling Mirror 01 01 15 Fishing Tackle 01 01

16 First-Aid Outfit with Seasickness Pills

01 set with 02 /person

01 set

17 Repair Kit 01 01

18

Solid Ration 02 env./person

(3333 kJ/ person) 02 env./person

(3333kJ/ person)19 Liquid Ration 1 liter/person 0.5 liter/person 20 Graduated Cup 01 - x -

21 Instructions Manual on How to Survive

01

01

22 Instructions for Immediate Action 01 01 23 Rescue Signals Card 01 - x - 24 Thermal Protection Aid 01 - x -


Liferafts Class III which are part of the life-saving appliances of vessels engaged in inland navigation are not required to carry all the equipment prescribed above, except items 02, 03, 04, 05, 07 and 17. Furthermore, the container shall show the marking “SOMENTE NAVEGAÇÃO INTERIOR”. 0329 - REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFEBOATS

The testing will be conducted following the spreadsheets mentioned in item 0304. a) Lifeboat construction

1) All lifeboats shall be of adequate construction in accordance with an approved

design and shall be of such form and proportions that they have ample stability and adequate freeboard when loaded with their full complement of persons and equipment. All lifeboats shall have rigid hulls, shall be capable of maintaining positive stability when in an upright position in calm water, loaded with their full complement of persons and equipment, and holed in any one location below the waterline, assuming no loss of buoyancy material and no other damage.

2) Each lifeboat shall be fitted with an Approval Certificate (model shown in

Annex 3-B). 3) The Approval Certificate shall carry attached the drawings and a Report as in

the model shown in item 0402, specifying: (a) material of hull construction, in such detail as to ensure that compatibility

problems in repair should not occur; (b) total mass fully equipped and fully manned.

4) All lifeboats shall be of sufficient strength to:

(a) enable them to be safely launched into the water, when loaded with their full complement of persons and equipment; and

(b) be capable of being launched and towed when the ship is making headway at a speed of 5 knots in calm water.

5) Hulls and rigid covers shall be fire-retardant or non-combustible. 6) Seating shall be provided on thwarts, benches or fixed chairs which are so

constructed as to be capable of supporting: (a) a static load equivalent to the number of persons, each weighing 100 kg, for

which seats are provided in compliance with the provisions of item 0329 b); (b) a load of 100 kg in any single seat location when a lifeboat is launched by

falls into the water from a height of at least 3 m; and (c) a load of 100 kg in any single seat location when a free-fall lifeboat is

launched from a height of at least 1.3 times its free-fall approval height. 7) Except for free-fall lifeboats, every lifeboat to be davit-launched shall be of

sufficient strength to withstand a load, without residual deflection on removal of that load: (a) in the case of boats with metal hulls, 1.25 times the total mass of the lifeboat

when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment; or


(b) in the case of other boats, twice the total mass of the lifeboat when loaded with its full complement or persons and equipment.

8) Except for free-fall lifeboats, every lifeboat to be davit-launched shall be ofsufficient strength to withstand, when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment and with, where applicable, skates or fenders in position, a lateral impact against the ship's side at an impact velocity of at least 3.5 m/s and also a drop into the water from a height of at least 3 m.

9) The vertical distance between the floor surface and the interior of the enclosureor canopy over 50% of the floor area shall be:

(a) not less than 1.3 m for a lifeboat permitted to accommodate nine personsor less;

(b) not less than 1.7 m for a lifeboat permitted to accommodate 24 persons ormore; and

(c) not less than the distance as determined by linear interpolation between1.3 m and 1.7 m for a lifeboat permitted to accommodate between nine and 24 persons.

10) The fuel tanks shall be approved in compliance with the provisions of item0421.

b) Carrying capacity of lifeboats

1) No lifeboat shall be approved to accommodate more than 150 persons.

2) The number of persons which a lifeboat to be davit-launched shall be permittedto accommodate shall be equal to the lesser of:

(a) the number of persons having an average mass of 75 kg, all wearinglifejackets, that can be seated in a normal position without interfering with the means of propulsion or the operation of any of the lifeboat's equipment ; or

(b) the number of spaces that can be provided on the seating arrangements in accordance with the Figure below. The shapes may be overlapped as shown, provided footrests are fitted, there is sufficient room for legs, and the vertical separation between the upper and lower seat is not less than 350 mm.

3) Each seating position shall be clearly indicated in the lifeboat.


c) Access into lifeboats 1) Every passenger ship’s lifeboat shall be so arranged that it can be rapidly

boarded by its full complement of persons. Rapid disembarkation shall also be possible. 2) Every cargo ship’s lifeboat shall be so arranged that it can be boarded by its full

complement of persons in not more than 3 minutes from the time the instruction to board is given. Rapid disembarkation shall also be possible.

3) Lifeboats shall have a boarding ladder that can be used at any boarding entrance of the lifeboat to enable persons in the water to board the lifeboat. The lower step of the boarding ladder shall be situated not less than 0.4 m below the lifeboat's light waterline.

4) The lifeboat shall be so arranged that helpless people can be brought on board either from the sea or on stretchers.

5) All surfaces on which persons might walk shall have a non-skid finish. d) Lifeboat buoyancy

All lifeboats shall have inherent buoyancy or shall be fitted with inherently buoyant material. Seawater, oil or oil products shall not adversely affect this material. The buoyancy shall be sufficient to float the lifeboat with all its equipment on board when flooded and open to the sea. Additional inherently buoyant material, equal to 280 N of buoyant force per person, shall be provided for the number of persons the lifeboat is permitted to accommodate. Buoyant material, unless in addition to that required above, shall not be installed external to the hull of the lifeboat.

e) Lifeboat freeboard and stability

1) All lifeboats shall be stable and have a positive GM value when loaded with 50% of the number of persons the lifeboat is permitted to accommodate in their normal positions to one side of the centerline.

2) Under the loading condition established above: (a) each lifeboat with side openings near the gunwale shall have a freeboard,

measured from the waterline to the lowest opening through which the lifeboat may become flooded, of at least 1.5% of the lifeboat's length or 100 mm, whichever is the greater.

(b) each lifeboat without side openings near the gunwale shall not exceed an angle of heel of 20º and shall have a freeboard, measured from the waterline to the lowest opening through which the lifeboat may become flooded, of at least 1.5% of the lifeboat's length or 100 mm, whichever is the greater.

f) Lifeboat propulsion

1) Every lifeboat shall be powered by a compression-ignition engine. No engine shall be used for any lifeboat if its fuel has a flash point of 43º C or less (closed-cup test).

2) The engine shall be provided with either a manual starting system, or a power starting system with two independent rechargeable energy sources. Any necessary starting aids shall also be provided. The engine starting systems and starting aids shall start the engine at an ambient temperature of -15º C within 2 minutes of commencing the start procedure, unless the nature of particular


voyages in which the ship carrying the lifeboat is constantly engaged, a different temperature is considered as appropriate. The starting systems shall not be impeded by the engine casing, seating or other obstructions.

3) The engine shall be capable of operating for not less than 5 minutes after starting from cold with the lifeboat out of the water.

4) The engine shall be capable of operating when the lifeboat is flooded up to the centerline of the crankshaft.

5) The propeller shaft shall be so arranged that the propeller can be disengaged from the engine. Provision shall be made for ahead and astern propulsion of the lifeboat.

6) The exhaust pipe shall be so arranged as to prevent water from entering the engine in normal operation.

7) All lifeboats shall be designed with due regard to the safety of persons in the water and to the possibility of damage to the propulsion system by floating debris.

8) The speed of a lifeboat when proceeding ahead in calm water, when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment and with all engine-powered auxiliary equipment in operation, shall be at least 6 knots. When towing a 25-person liferaft loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment or its equivalent, the speed ahead shall be at least 2 knots. Sufficient fuel, suitable for use throughout the temperature range expected in the area in which the ship operates, shall be provided to run the fully loaded lifeboat at 6 knots for a period of not less than 24 hours.

9) The lifeboat’s engine, transmission and engine accessories shall be enclosed in a fire-retardant casing or other suitable arrangement providing similar protection. Such arrangement shall also protect persons from coming into accidental contact with hot or moving parts and protect the engine from exposure to weather and sea. Adequate means shall be provided to reduce the engine’s noise so that a shouted order can be heard. The starter batteries shall be provided with casings which form a watertight enclosure around the bottom and sides of the batteries. The battery casings shall have a tightly fitting top which provides for the necessary gas venting.

10) The lifeboat’s engine and accessories shall be designed to limit electromagnetic emissions so that the engine’s operation does not interfere with the operation of radio life-saving appliances used in the lifeboat.

11) Means shall be provided for recharging all engine’s starting, radio and searchlight batteries. Radio batteries shall not be used to provide power for engine starting. Means shall be provided for recharging lifeboat batteries from the ship's power supply at a supply voltage not exceeding 50 V which can be disconnected at the lifeboat embarkation station, or by means of a solar battery charger.

12) Water-resistant instructions for starting and operating the engine shall be provided and mounted in a conspicuous place near the engine starting controls.

g) Lifeboat fittings 1) All lifeboats except free-fall lifeboats shall be provided with at least one drain

valve fitted near the lowest point in the hull, which shall automatically open to drain water from the hull when the lifeboat is not waterborne and shall automatically close to prevent


entry of water when the lifeboat is waterborne. Each drain valve shall be provided with a cap or plug to close the valve, which shall be attached to the lifeboat by a lanyard, a chain or other suitable means. Drain valves shall be readily accessible from inside the lifeboat and their position shall be clearly indicated.

2) All lifeboats shall be provided with a rudder and tiller. When a wheel or other

remote steering mechanism is also provided, the tiller shall be capable of controlling the rudder in case of failure of the steering mechanism. The rudder shall be permanently attached to the lifeboat. The tiller shall be permanently installed on, or linked to, the rudder stock. However, if the lifeboat has a remote steering mechanism, the tiller may be removable and securely stowed near the rudderstock. The rudder and tiller shall be so arranged as not to be damaged by operation of the release mechanism or the propeller.

3) Except near the rudder and propeller, suitable handholds shall be provided or

a buoyant lifeline shall be secured around the lifeboat outside above the waterline and within reach of a person in the water.

4) Lifeboats that are not self-righting when capsized shall have suitable handholds

on the underside of the hull to enable persons to cling to the lifeboat. The handholds shall be fastened to the lifeboat in such a way that, when subjected to an impact sufficient to cause them to break away from the lifeboat, they break away without damaging the lifeboat.

5) All lifeboats shall be fitted with sufficient watertight lockers or compartments to

provide for the storage of the small items of equipment, water and provisions. The lifeboat shall be equipped with means for collecting rainwater or producing drinking water from seawater with a manually powered desalinator. The desalinator must not be dependent upon solar heat, nor on chemicals other than seawater. Means shall be provided for the storage of collected water.

6) Every lifeboat to be launched by a fall or falls, except a free-fall lifeboat, shall

be fitted with a release mechanism complying with the following requirements: (a) be so arranged that all hooks are released simultaneously. (b) have two release capabilities as follows:

- a normal release capability which will release the lifeboat when it is waterborne or when there is no load on the hooks; and

- an on-load release capability which will release the lifeboat with a load on the hooks. This release shall be so arranged as to release the lifeboat under any conditions of loading from no load with the lifeboat waterborne to a load of 1.1 times the total mass of the lifeboat when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment. This release capability shall be adequately protected against accidental or premature use. Adequate protection shall include special mechanical protection not normally required for off-load release, in addition to a danger sign. To prevent an accidental release during recovery of the boat, the mechanical protection (interlock) should only engage when the release mechanism is properly and completely reset. To prevent a premature on-load release, on-load operation of the release mechanism should require a deliberate and sustained action by the operator.


The release mechanism shall be so designed that crew members in the lifeboat can clearly observe when the release mechanism is properly and completely reset and ready for lifting. Clear operating instructions should be provided with a suitably worded warning notice.

(c) the release control shall be clearly marked in a color that contrasts with its surroundings.

(d) the fixed structural connections of the release mechanism in the lifeboat shall be designed with a calculated factor of safety of 6 based on the ultimate strength of the materials used, assuming the mass of the lifeboat is equally distributed between the falls.

(e) where a single fall and hook system is used for launching a lifeboat or rescue boat in combination with a suitable painter, the requirements of subparagraph b) above may be replaced by a single capability to release the boat to be used only when it is fully waterborne.

7) Every lifeboat shall be fitted with a device to secure a painter near its bow. This

device shall be such that the lifeboat does not exhibit unsafe or unstable characteristics when being towed by the ship making headway at speeds of up to 5 knots in calm water. Except for free-fall lifeboats, the painter-securing device shall include a release device to enable the painter to be released from inside the lifeboat, with the ship making headway at speeds of up to 5 knots in calm water.

8) Every lifeboat that is fitted with a two-way VHF radiotelephone apparatus with

an antenna that is separately mounted shall be provided with arrangements for installing and securing the antenna effectively in its operation position.

9) Lifeboats intended for launching down the side of a ship shall have skates and

fenders as necessary to facilitate launching and prevent damage to the lifeboat. 10) A manually controlled lamp shall be fitted. The light shall be white and capable

of working continuously for at least 12 hours with a luminous intensity not lower than 4.3 candles, in all directions of the upper hemisphere. However, if the light is a flashing light it shall flash at a rate not lower than 50 flashes and not higher than 70 flashes per minute, during a working period of 12 hours, with an equivalent effective luminous intensity as required in Resolution MSC 81(70).

11) A manually controlled lamp or source of light shall be fitted inside the lifeboat

to provide illumination for not less than 12 hours to permit reading of survival and equipment instructions; however, oil lamps shall not be permitted for this purpose.

12) Every lifeboat shall be so arranged that an adequate view forward, aft and to

both sides is provided from the control and steering position for safe launching and maneuvering.

h) Lifeboat equipment

All of the components of lifeboat equipment, whether required in this item or in any other item of this chapter, shall be secured within the lifeboat by lashings, storage in lockers or compartments, storage in brackets or similar mounting arrangements or other suitable means.


However, in the case of a lifeboat to be launched by falls, the boat hooks shall be kept free for fending-off purposes. The equipment shall be secured in such a manner as not to interfere with any abandonment procedures. All items of lifeboat equipment shall be as small and of as little mass as possible and shall be packed in a suitable and compact form. Except where otherwise stated, the normal equipment of every lifeboat shall consist of:

1) except for free-fall lifeboats, sufficient buoyant oars to make headway in calm seas. Thole pins, crutches or equivalent arrangements shall be fitted for each oar provided. Thole pins or crutches shall be attached to the boat by lanyards or chains;

2) two boat-hooks; 3) a buoyant bailer and two buckets; 4) a survival manual; 5) an operational magnetic compass which is luminous or provided with suitable

means of illumination. In a totally enclosed lifeboat, the compass shall be permanently fitted at the steering position; in any other lifeboat, it shall be provided with a binnacle to protect it from the weather, and suitable mounting arrangements;

6) a sea-anchor of adequate size fitted with a shock-resistant hawser which provides a firm hand grip when wet. The strength of the sea anchor, hawser and tripping line, if fitted, shall be adequate for all sea conditions.

7) two efficient painters of a length equal to not less than twice the distance from the lifeboat's stowage position to the waterline in the lightest seagoing condition or 15 m, whichever is the greater. On lifeboats to be launched by free-fall, both painters shall be stowed near the bow, ready for use. On other lifeboats, one painter attached to the release device shall be placed at the forward end of the lifeboat and the other shall be firmly secured at or near the bow, ready for use;

8) two hatchets, one at each end of the lifeboat; 9) watertight receptacles containing a total of 3 liters of fresh water for each person the lifeboat is permitted to accommodate, of each either 1 liter per person may be replaced by a desalting apparatus capable of producing an equal amount of fresh water in two days or 2 liters per person may be replaced by a manually powered reverse-osmosis desalinator capable of producing an equal amount of fresh water in two days.

10) a rustproof dipper with lanyard; 11) a rustproof graduated drinking vessel; 12) a food ration with a total of not less than 10,000 kJ for each person the lifeboat

is permitted to accommodate; these rations shall be kept in airtight packaging and be stowed in a watertight container;

13) four rocket parachute flares of an approved type; 14) six hand flares of an approved type; 15) two buoyant smoke signals of an approved type; 16) two waterproof electric torches suitable for Morse signaling, together with one

spare set of batteries and one spare bulb, in a waterproof container;


17) one daylight signaling mirror with instructions on its use for signaling to ships and aircraft;

18) one copy of the life-saving signals prescribed by Regulation V/16 on a waterproof card or in a waterproof container;

19) one whistle or equivalent sound signal; 20) a first-aid outfit in a waterproof case capable of being closed tightly after use; 21) anti-seasickness medicine enough for at least 48 hours and one seasickness

bag for each person; 22) a jack-knife, to be kept attached to the lifeboat by a lanyard; 23) two buoyant rescue quoits, attached to not less than 30 m of buoyant line; 24) if the lifeboat is not automatically self-bailing, a manual pump suitable for

effective bailing; 25) one set of fishing tackle; 26) sufficient tools for minor adjustments to the engine and its accessories; 27) portable fire-extinguishing equipment, of an approved type, suitable for

extinguishing oil fires; 28) a searchlight with a horizontal and vertical sector of at least 6º and a measured

luminous intensity of 2,500 candles which can work continuously for not less than 3 hours; 29) an efficient radar reflector, unless a survival craft radar transponder is stowed

in the lifeboat; 30) thermal protective aids sufficient for 10% of the number of persons the lifeboat

is authorized to accommodate or two, whichever is the greater; and 31) in the case of ships engaged on voyages of such a nature and duration that,

in the opinion of the DPC, the ration and the fishing tackle set are unnecessary, the DPC may allow these items to be dispensed with.

32) Composition of first-aid outfits for life-saving craft with capacity of up to 12 persons:

DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY. SAFETY PIN (DIAPER TYPE) UN 6

CREPE BANDAGE RL 4.5 m X 10cm UN 6

WATERPROOF CASE UN 1

STERILE SURGICAL PAD 23 X 25 cm, PK w/ 05 UN PK 3

STERILE DOUBLE PAD 7.5 X 7.5 cm, PK w/ 10 UN UN 12

ADHESIVE BANDAGE (BAND-AID TYPE) BX w/10 UN BX 2

DIAZEPAN 10 mg TT 60

DIPIRONE 500 mg TT 60

ADHESIVE TAPE RL10 cm x 4.5 m UN 1

SOLAR SCREEN SPF MINIMUM 30 - 120ml JAR UN 3

LOPERAMIDE 2 mg TT 60

THERAPEUTIC MEMENTO OF MEDICATIONS CONTAINED IN THE FIRST-AID OUTFIT

UN 1


DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY.

METOCLOPRAMIDE 10 mg TT 60

PVPI SOLUTION (TOPIC) 100 ml JR JR 2

SALINE SOLUTION 0.9% 500 ml JR JR 1

SILVER SULFADIAZINE 2% 400 g JR JR 1

STRAIGHT MAYO SCISSORS 15 cm UN 1

AMERICAN SLING, ADULT UN 2

33) Composition of first-aid outfits for life-saving craft with capacity of up to 25 persons (for higher capacities, the supply shall be increased proportionately except for the permanent material):

DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY. SAFETY PIN (DIAPER TYPE) UN 12

CREPE BANDAGE RL 4.5 m X 10 cm UN 12

WATERPROOF CASE UN 1

STERILE SURGICAL PAD 23 X 25 cm, PK w/ 5 UN PK 6

STERILE DOUBLE PAD 7 X 7.5 cm, PK w/ 10 UN UN 24

ADHESIVE BANDAGE (BAND-AID TYPE) BX w/10 UN BX 4

DIAZEPAN 10 mg TT 120

DIPIRONE 500 mg TT 120

ADHESIVE TAPE RL 10 cm X 4,4 m UN 2

SOLAR SCREEN SPF MINIMUM 30 - 120ml JAR UN 6

LOPERAMIDE 2mg TT 120

THERAPEUTIC MEMENTO OF MEDICATIONS UN 1

METOCLOPRAMIDE 10 mg TT 120

PVPI SOLUTION (TOPIC) 100 ml JR JR 4

SALINE SOLUTION 0.9% 500 ml JR JR 2

SILVER SULFADIAZINE 2% 400 g JR JR 2

STRAIGHT MAYO SCISSORS 15 cm UN 1

AMERICAN SLING, ADULT UN 4

34) THERAPEUTIC MEMENTO

Consists of a guidance document on how to use the supply mentioned above, printed in clearly legible characters on a card included in the first-aid case:

DESCRIPTION HOW TO USE CREPE BANDAGE RL 4.5 m X 10 cm

Use for immobilizations or to secure bandages over wounds.

STERILE SURGICAL PAD 23 X 25 cm, PK w/ 05 UN

Use for dressings.

STERILE DOUBLE PAD 7.5 X 7.5 cm, PK w/ 10 UN

Use for dressings.

ADHESIVE BANDAGE (BAND-AID TYPE) BX w/ 10 un

Use for dressings.


DESCRIPTION HOW TO USE

DIAZEPAN 10 MG.

Sedative medication. Use in cases of emotional unbalance, stress, anxiety. Dosage: 01 tab (10 mg) per day.

DIPIRONE 500 MG.

Analgesic and fever reducer. Use for pain relief or to reduce fever. Dosage: 01 tab (500 mg) up to every 6 hours.

ADHESIVE TAPE RL 10 cm X 4,5 m Use for dressings.

SOLAR SCREEN SPF MINIMUM 30 120ml JAR

Use to protect against sunburn. Apply the lotion directly on the exposed skin every 3 hours. Avoid diving, to preserve the product.

LOPERAMIDE 2 MG.

Use for diarrhea. Dosage: 01 tab (2 mg) after liquid evacuation, up to a maximum daily dose of 8 tabs.

METOCLOPRAMIDE 10 MG.

Use in cases of vomit or seasickness. Dosage: 01 tab (10 mg) up to every 6 hours.

PVPI SOLUTION (TOPIC) 100 ml JR

Apply on wounds already cleaned, for dressings.

SALINE SOLUTION 0.9 % 500 ml JR

Use for cleaning wounds, before dressings. Use also for washing eyes in case of a foreign body.

SILVER SULFADIAZINE 2% 400 g JR

Use for dressings on burns. Apply a thin layer on the burnt surface after cleaning. Replace the dressing daily.

AMERICAN SLING, ADULT Used for immobilization of upper limbs.

i) Lifeboat markings

1) The number of persons for which the lifeboat is approved shall be clearly marked on it in clear permanent characters.

2) The name and port of registry of the ship to which the lifeboat belongs shall be marked on each side of the lifeboat's bow in block capitals of the Roman alphabet.

3) The identification of the ship to which the lifeboat belongs and the lifeboat's number shall be marked in such a way that they are visible from above.

j) Partially enclosed lifeboats

1) Partially enclosed lifeboats shall be provided with permanently attached rigid covers extending over not less than 20% of the lifeboat's length from the stem and not less than 20% of the lifeboat's length from its aftermost part. The lifeboat shall be fitted with a permanently attached foldable canopy which, together with the rigid covers, completely encloses the occupants in a weatherproof shelter and protects them from exposure.


The lifeboat shall have entrances at both ends and on each side. Entrances in the rigid covers shall be weathertight when closed. The canopy shall be so arranged that:

(a) it is provided with adequate rigid sections or tubes to permit erection of the canopy; (b) it can be easily erected by not more than two persons; (c) it is insulated to protect the occupants against heat and

cold by means of not less than two layers of material separated by an air gap or other equally efficient means; means shall be provided to prevent accumulation of water in the air gap;

(d) its exterior is of a highly visible color and its interior is of a color which does not cause discomfort to the occupants;

(e) entrances in the canopy are provided with efficient adjustable closing arrangements which can be easily and quickly opened and closed from inside or outside so as to permit ventilation but exclude seawater, wind and cold; means shall be provided for holding the entrances securely in the opened and closed positions;

(f) with the entrances closed, it admits sufficient air at all times for its occupants;

(g) it has means for collecting rainwater; and (h) the occupants can escape if the lifeboat capsizes.

2) The lifeboat's interior, except the internal part of the canopy, shall be of a highly

visible color. 3) If a fixed two-way VHF radiotelephone apparatus is fitted in the lifeboat, it shall

be installed in a cabin large enough to accommodate both the equipment and the person using it. No separate cabin is required if the construction of the lifeboat provides a sheltered place to the satisfaction of the DPC.

l) Totally enclosed lifeboats

1) Enclosure - Every totally enclosed lifeboat shall be provided with a rigid

watertight enclosure which completely encloses the lifeboat. The enclosure shall be so arranged that:

(a) it provides shelter for the occupants; (b) access to the lifeboat is provided by hatches which can be closed to make

the lifeboat watertight; (c) except for free-fall lifeboats, hatches are positioned so as to allow launching

and recovery operations to be performed without any occupant having to leave the enclosure; (d) access hatches are capable of being opened and closed from both inside

and outside and are equipped with means to hold them securely in the open position; (e) except for a free-fall lifeboat, it is possible to row the lifeboat; (f) it is capable, when the lifeboat is in the capsized position with the hatches

closed and without significant leakage, of supporting the entire mass of the lifeboat including all equipment, machinery and its full complement of persons;

(g) it includes windows or translucent panels which admit sufficient daylight to the inside of the lifeboat with the hatches closed to make artificial light unnecessary;

(h) its exterior is of a highly visible color and its interior is of a color which does not cause discomfort to the occupants;


(i) handrails provide a secure handhold for persons moving about the lifeboat's exterior, and help in embarkation and disembarkation;

(j) persons have access to their seats from an entrance without having to climb over thwarts or other obstructions; and

(l) during operation of the engine with the enclosure closed, the atmospheric pressure inside the lifeboat shall never be above or below the outside atmospheric pressure by more than 20 mbar.

2) Capsizing and righting

a) Except in free-fall lifeboats, a safety belt shall be fitted at each indicated

seating position. The safety belt shall be designed to hold a person with a mass of 100 kg securely in place when the lifeboat is in a capsized position. Each set of safety belts for a seat shall be of a color that contrasts with the belts for seats immediately adjacent. Free-fall lifeboats shall be fitted with a safety harness at each seat in contrasting color with those of immediately adjacent seats, designed to hold a person with a mass of 100 kg securely in place during a free-fall launch as well as with the lifeboat in capsized position.

b) The lifeboat's stability shall be such that it is inherently or automatically self-righting when loaded with its full or a partial complement of persons and equipment and all entrances and openings are closed watertight and the persons are secured with safety belts.

c) The lifeboat shall be capable of supporting its full complement of persons and equipment when the lifeboat is in the damaged condition as described in item 0329 a) 1) and its stability shall be such that, in the event of capsizing, it will automatically attain a position that will provide an above-water escape for its occupants. When the lifeboat is in a stable but flooded condition, the water level inside the lifeboat, measured along the seat backs, shall not be more than 500 mm above the seat pan of any occupant.

d) The design of all engine exhaust pipes, air ducts and other openings shall be such that water is excluded from the engine when the lifeboat capsizes and re-rights.

3) Propulsion

a) The engine and transmission shall be controlled from the helmsman's position. b) The engine and its installation shall be capable of running in any position during

capsize and continue to run after the lifeboat returns to the upright, or shall automatically stop on capsizing and be easily restarted after the lifeboat returns to the upright. The design of the fuel and lubricating system shall prevent the loss of fuel and the loss of more than 250 ml of lubricating oil from the engine during capsize.

c) Air-cooled engines shall have a duct system to take in cooling air from, and exhaust it to, the outside of the lifeboat. Manually operated dampers shall be provided to enable cooling air to be taken in from, and exhausted to, the interior of the lifeboat.

m) Protection against acceleration

Notwithstanding the use of skates and fenders, a totally enclosed lifeboat, except a free-fall lifeboat, shall be so constructed and fendered that the lifeboat


renders protection against harmful accelerations resulting from an impact of the lifeboat, when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment, against the ship's side at an impact velocity of not less than 3.5 m/s.

n) Requirements for free-fall lifeboats

Free-fall lifeboats shall comply with the provisions of subparagraph l) above, as well as with this subparagraph.

1) The tests required for free-fall lifeboats are provided in item 0304. 2) Carrying capacity of a free-fall lifeboat The carrying capacity of a free-fall lifeboat is the number of persons that can be

provided with a seat without interfering with the means of propulsion or the operation of any of the lifeboat's equipment. The width of the seat shall be at least 430 mm. Free clearance in front of the backrest shall be at least 635 mm. The backrest shall extend at least 1,000 mm above the seat pan.

3) Performance requirements

a) Each free-fall lifeboat shall make positive headway immediately after water entry and shall not come into contact with the ship after a free-fall launching against a trim of up to 10º and a list of up to 20º either way from the certification height when fully equipped and loaded with:

(a) its full complement of persons; (b) occupants so as to cause the center of gravity to be in the most forward

position; (c) occupants so as to cause the center of gravity to be in the most aft

position; (d) its operating crew only.

b) For oil tankers, chemical tankers and gas carriers with a final angle of heel greater than 20º calculated in accordance with the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto and the IMO recommendations, as applicable, a lifeboat shall be capable of being free-fall launched with the ship at the final angle of heel and on the base of the final waterline of that calculation.

c) The required free-fall height shall never exceed the Free-fall Certification Height.

4) Construction

Each free-fall lifeboat shall be of sufficient strength to withstand, when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment, a free-fall launch from a height of at least 1.3 times the Free-fall Certification Height.

5) Protection against harmful acceleration

Each free-fall lifeboat shall be so constructed as to ensure that the lifeboat is capable of rendering protection against harmful accelerations resulting from being launched from the height for which it is to be certified, in calm water under unfavorable conditions of trim of up to 10º and list of up to 20º either way, when it is fully equipped and loaded with:

(a) its full complement of persons; (b) a number of occupants so as to cause the center of gravity to be in the

most forward position;


(c) a number of occupants so as to cause the center of gravity to be in the most aft position; and

(d) its operating crew only.

6) Free-fall lifeboat fittingsEach free-fall lifeboat shall be fitted with a release system that shall:a) have two independent activation systems for the release mechanisms which

may only be operated from inside the lifeboat and be marked in a color that contrasts with its surroundings;

b) be so arranged as to release the boat under any condition of loading fromno load up to at least 200% of the normal load caused by the fully equipped lifeboat when loaded with the number of persons for which it is to be approved;

c) be adequately protected against accidental or premature use;d) be so designed as to allow the release system to be tested without

launching the lifeboat; and e) be designed with a factor of safety of 6, based on the ultimate strength of the

materials used.

7) Certificate of approvalIn addition to the common requirements for other vessels, the certificate of approval for a free-fall lifeboat shall also state:

a) Free-fall Certification Height;b) Required launching ramp length; andc) Launching ramp angle for the free-fall certification height.

o) Lifeboats with a self-contained air support systemIn addition to complying with the provisions of subparagraphs l) or n) above, as applicable, a lifeboat with a self-contained air support system shall be so arranged that, when proceeding with all entrances and openings closed, the air in the lifeboat remains safe and breathable and the engine runs normally for a period of not less than 10 minutes. During this period, the atmospheric pressure inside the lifeboat shall never fall below the outside atmospheric pressure nor shall exceed it by more than 20 mbar. The system shall have pressure gauges indicating the air supply pressure at all times.

p) Fire-protected lifeboats

1) In addition to complying with the provisions of subparagraph o) above, a fire-protected lifeboat, when waterborne, shall be capable of protecting the number of persons it is permitted to accommodate when subjected to a continuous oil fire that envelops the lifeboat for a period of not less than 8 minutes.

2) Water spray systemA lifeboat that has a water spray fire-protection system shall comply with the

following: a) water for the system shall be drawn from the sea by a self-priming motor

pump. It shall be possible to turn "on" and "off" the flow of water over the exterior of the lifeboat;

b) the seawater intake shall be so arranged as to prevent the intake offlammable liquids from the sea surface; and

c) the system shall be arranged for flushing with fresh water and allowingcomplete drainage.


q) Lifeboat testing The tests a lifeboat shall be submitted to for approval are contained in the testing

spreadsheets provided for in Resolution MSC 81/70. 0330 - REQUIREMENTS FOR BUOYANT APPARATUSES

a) Buoyant apparatuses are rigid or inflatable, and may be manufactured in the shape of a parallelogram (see figure below), circle, ellipse, and full or hollow-core;

b) Circular (or elliptical) and hollow-core parallelogram apparatuses may have a rectangular, elliptical or circular cross-section;

c) Shall be built in such a way that they can be piled up to the height of five appliances;

d) Shall be so arranged or built as to be capable of being released and floating freely from the position they are stowed on board, if the vessel sinks;

e) Shall be capable of being launched into the water from a height of not less than 12 m without sustaining damage;

f) Shall be made of material resistant to sunlight, seawater, fresh water, oil and derivatives, and fungal attack;

g) Shall be built in such a way that the buoyancy of the apparatuses is ensured by the adequate solid material used for filling, without depending on any closed air volume. Granulated or flocculated materials, or shavings, should not be used for filling, in order to prevent losses from tearing or rupturing of the buoyant apparatus (rigid apparatuses);

h) Finishing shall be in the color orange; i) Their buoyancy shall not be reduced by more than 5% after submerged in fresh

water for 24 hours; j) Shall be provided with a buoyant grabline or one of a material which absorbs little

water, secured externally at four equidistant points to form four equal loops which will serve as hand-holds for shipwreck survivors. The grabline shall resist a tension of at least 5kN and its diameter shall be not less than 8 mm. The length of each loop shall be of not less than 0.3 m and not more than 0.8 m. The grabline material shall be resistant to sunlight, especially ultraviolet radiation;

l) Shall be fitted with a buoyant painter secured by one of its ends, with a length of not less than 10 m and the same mechanical properties of the grabline;

m) All corners and edges shall be rounded with a minimum radius of 75 mm; n) They shall have enough stability to withstand, without capsizing, all the survivors

corresponding to the maximum number of persons holding on the side of lesser resistance to capsize;

o) They shall be capable of use with any face up when floating; p) They shall have an internal floor platform not less than 600 mm wide and

600 mm long or with a minimum equivalent area, allowing the accommodation of persons. In the case of apparatuses without a hollow-core, the upper face shall be of not less than 800 mm by 800 mm or equivalent area;


q) They shall have a mass of not more than 180kg, unless coming with an approveddevice allowing the launching into the water without manual lifting;

r) They shall have a capacity determined by the lower of two results obtained by thecriteria below but limited to 25 persons for rigid buoyant apparatuses and 50 persons for inflatable buoyant apparatuses:

1) dividing by 14.5 the mass in kg the apparatus can support in fresh waterwithout sinking; or

2) dividing by 305 the apparatus' external perimeter in mm;s) They shall bear a marking label in a visible place following the model shown

below:

DIRECTORATE OF PORTS AND COASTS CERTIFICATE No. / CLASS MANUFACTURER

MODEL SERIAL No.

MANUFACTURING DATE

t) fasteners, rings and other accessories shall be of material resistant to oxidation,galvanically compatible with other materials in contact, smooth and with no sharp edges that may harm the users

u) in the case of inflatable buoyant apparatuses, the list above shall be observedexcepting subparagraph e), and the following requirements are added:

1) Be packed in a container;2) Be arranged with at least two separate compartments;3) Inflate automatically when launched into the water;4) If one compartment loses buoyancy, the other compartment shall be capable

of maintaining the apparatus' buoyancy with full complement of persons; and 5) Be fitted with a relief valve in each compartment to avoid excessive inner

pressure capable of damaging the apparatus. v) They shall be submitted to, and approved in, the following tests:

BUOYANT APPARATUS TESTS ANNEX 1 Prototype conformity 3-E 2 Water absorption 3-H (*) 3 Stability and freeboard 3-CC 4 Buoyancy under damage 3-Z 5 Pressure 3-BB 6 Drop test 3-Q 7 Platform strength 3-DD 8 Filling test 3-EE 9 Painter and grabline strength 3-J 10 Fabric 3-T

(*) Not applicable to inflatable buoyant apparatuses.

x) For the buoyant apparatus tests, the manufacturer shall present one sample pertype intended for approval.

Initially, all buoyant apparatuses are assessed regarding their characteristics and dimensional compliance with the corresponding specifications.


The inflatable buoyant apparatuses are, in this stage, assessed only in aspects that can be addressed with the container closed. After the first test in which the container has to be opened, the further necessary assessment shall be conducted. Inflatable buoyant apparatuses are not submitted to the fire resistance test.

A sample of rigid buoyant apparatus will be subsequently submitted to the tests of dropping, platform resistance, stability and buoyancy.

A sample of inflatable buoyant apparatus will be subsequently submitted to the tests of dropping, filling, platform resistance, stability, buoyancy, pressure and damage.

0331 – (CANCELLED ITEM)

SECTION VI

RESCUE BOATS

0332 - REQUIREMENTS FOR RESCUE BOATS The testing will be conducted following the spreadsheets mentioned in item 0304.

a) General prescriptions

1) Except as provided by this standard, all rescue boats shall comply with therequirements of subparagraphs a) through g)4), g)6), g)7), g)10) and i), all from item 0329. A lifeboat may be approved and used as a rescue boat if it meets all of the requirements of this standard, if it successfully completes the testing for a rescue boat required in Regulation III/4.2, and if its stowage, launching and recovery arrangements on the ship meet all of the requirements for a rescue boat.

2) Notwithstanding the provisions of subparagraph 0329 d), required buoyantmaterial for rescue boats may be installed external to the hull, provided it is adequately protected against damage and is capable of withstanding exposure to the weather.

3) Rescue boats may be of either rigid or inflated construction or a combinationof both and shall:

4) be not less than 3.8 m and not more than 8.5 m in length; and

5) be capable of carrying at least five seated persons and a person lying on astretcher. Seating, except for the helmsman, may be arranged on the floor, provided that the seating space analysis uses shapes similar to the figure shown in subparagraph 0329 b), but altered to an overall length of 1,190 mm to provide for extended legs. No part of a seating space shall be on the gunwale, transom, or on inflated buoyancy at the sides of the boat.

6) Rescue boats that are a combination of rigid and inflated construction shallcomply with the prescriptions of this standard.

7) Unless the rescue boat has adequate sheer, it shall be provided with a bowcover extending for not less than 15% of its length.


8) Rescue boats shall be capable of maneuvering at a speed of at least 6 knots and maintaining that speed for a period of at least 4 hours.

9) Rescue boats shall have sufficient mobility and maneuverability in a seaway to

enable persons to be retrieved from the water, marshal liferafts and tow the largest liferaft carried on the ship when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment or its equivalent at a speed of at least 2 knots.

10) A rescue boat shall be fitted with an inboard or outboard engine. If it is fitted

with an outboard engine, the rudder and tiller may form part of the engine. Gasoline-driven outboard engines with an approved fuel system may be fitted in rescue boats provided the fuel tanks are specially protected against fire and explosion..

11) Arrangements for towing shall be permanently fitted in rescue boats and shall

be sufficiently strong to marshal or tow liferafts. 12) Unless expressly provided otherwise, every rescue boat shall be provided with

effective means of bailing or be automatically self-bailing. 13) Rescue boats shall be fitted with weathertight stowage for small items of

equipment. b) Rescue boat equipment

1) All items of rescue boat equipment, with the exception of boat-hooks which shall

be kept free for fending-off purposes, shall be secured within the rescue boat by lashings, storage in lockers or compartments, storage in brackets or similar mounting arrangements, or other suitable means. The equipment shall be secured in such a manner as not to interfere with any launching or recovery procedures. All items of rescue boat equipment shall be as small and of as little mass as possible and shall be packed in a suitable and compact form.

2) The normal equipment of every rescue boat shall consist of:

(a) sufficient buoyant oars or paddles to make headway in calm seas. Thole pins, crutches or equivalent arrangements shall be provided for each oar. Thole pins or crutches shall be attached to the boat by lanyards or chains;

(b) a buoyant bailer;

(c) a binnacle containing an efficient compass which is luminous or provided with suitable means of illumination;

(d) a sea-anchor and tripping line, if fitted, with a hawser of adequate strength not less than 10 m in length;

(e) a painter of sufficient length and strength, attached to the release device and placed at the forward end of the rescue boat;

(f) one buoyant line, not less than 50 m in length, of sufficient strength to tow a liferaft;

(g) one waterproof electric torch suitable for Morse signaling, together with one spare set of batteries and one spare bulb, in a waterproof container;

(h) one whistle or equivalent sound signal;


(i) a first-aid outfit in a waterproof case, capable of being closed tightly after use; (j) two buoyant rescue quoits, attached to not less than 30 m of buoyant line; (l) a searchlight with a horizontal and vertical sector of at least 6º and a

measured luminous intensity of 2,500 candles which can work continuously for not less than 3 hours;

(m) an efficient radar reflector; (n) thermal protective aids complying with the provisions of Regulation 35,

sufficient for 10% of the number of persons the rescue boat is permitted to accommodate or two, whichever is the greater; and

(o) portable fire-extinguishing equipment of an approved type, suitable for extinguishing oil fires.

3) In addition to the equipment required for all rescue boats, the normalequipment of every rigid rescue boat shall include:

(a) a boat-hook; (b) a bucket; and c) a knife or hatchet.

4) In addition to the equipment required for all rescue boats, the normalequipment of every inflatable rescue boat shall include:

(a) a buoyant safety knife; (b) two sponges; (c) an efficient manually operated bellows or pump; (d) a repair kit in a suitable container for repairing punctures; and

(e) a safety boat-hook.

c) Additional requirements for inflatable rescue boats

1) The requirements of 0329 a) 4) and 0329 a) 6) do not apply to inflatablerescue boats.

2) An inflated rescue boat shall be constructed in such a way that, whensuspended by its bridle or lifting hook:

(a) it is of sufficient strength and rigidity to enable it to be lowered and recovered with its full complement of persons and equipment;

(b) it is of sufficient strength to withstand a load of four times the mass of its full complement of persons and equipment at an ambient temperature of 20º C 3º C, with all relief valves inoperative; and

(c) it is of sufficient strength to withstand a load of 1.1 times the mass of its full complement of persons and equipment at an ambient temperature of -30º C, with all relief valves operative.

3) Inflated rescue boats shall be so constructed as to be capable of withstandingexposure:

(a) when stowed on an open deck on a ship at sea; (b) for 30 days afloat in all sea conditions.

4) Besides complying with the provisions of subparagraph 0329 i), inflatablerescue boats shall be marked with a serial number, the maker's name or trade mark and the date of manufacture.


5) The buoyancy of an inflated rescue boat shall be provided by either a single tube subdivided into at least five separate compartments of approximately equal volume or two separate tubes, neither exceeding 60% of the total volume. The buoyancy tubes shall be so arranged that the intact compartments shall be able to support, with positive freeboard over the rescue boat's entire periphery, the number of persons which the rescue boat is permitted to accommodate, each having a mass of 75 kg and seated in their normal positions, under the following conditions:

(a) with the forward buoyancy compartment deflated; (b) with all the buoyancy compartments on one side of the rescue boat

deflated; and (c) with all the buoyancy compartments on one side and the bow

compartment deflated. 6) The buoyancy tubes forming the boundary of the inflatable rescue boat shall

provide, when inflated, a volume of not less than 0.17 m3 for each person the rescue boat is permitted to accommodate.

7) Each buoyancy compartment shall be fitted with a non-return valve

for manual inflation and means for deflation. A safety relief valve shall also be provided unless the DPC considers this device unnecessary.

8) Underneath the bottom and on vulnerable places on the outside of the inflated

rescue boat, rubbing strips shall be provided to the satisfaction of the DPC. 9) If the inflatable rescue boat is fitted with a transom, it shall not be inset by more

than 20% of the boat's overall length. 10) Suitable patches shall be provided for securing the painters fore and aft and

the becketed lifelines inside and outside the boat. 11) The inflatable rescue boat shall be maintained at all times in a fully inflated

condition. 12) The tests these boats shall undergo for approval are contained in the

spreadsheets of Resolution MSC 81/70. d) Requirements for fast rescue boats

1) The requirements for fast rescue boats are contained in Resolution MSC 81/70;

and 2) The tests these boats shall undergo for approval are contained in Resolution

MSC 81/70.


SECTION VII

LAUNCHING AND EMBARKATION DEVICES 0333 - REQUIREMENTS FOR LAUNCHING AND EMBARKATION DEVICES

The testing will be conducted following the spreadsheets mentioned in item 0304. a) General prescriptions

The Code for the Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (MODU Code, 1989) prescribes that all cranes, including structures used for transferring equipment, materials or personnel (personnel transfer baskets) between the unit and support ships such as: cranes, personnel elevators and drilling cranes, shall have their design and construction approved by the DPC, adequate to the service and complying with the requirements from the International Maritime Organization (IMO).

On occasion of the installation of each one of these devices, a survey by a DPC Inspector shall be requested, or by a legal representative from the manufacturer monitored by a Classification Society.

Operational and loading tests shall be conducted upon final assembly and prior to entering in service, duly witnessed by a DPC Inspector or a person from a duly recognized organization. Test records and other relevant information for the initial approval shall be kept permanently available.

Each crane shall undergo inspection at least every 12 months, and re-testing with emission of a new certificate at least every five years or upon any alteration or structural repairs.

The launching and embarkation devices recommended for rescue boats have their requirements and testing specified in the spreadsheets referred to in item 0304 of the present NORMAM:

1) With the exception of the secondary means of launching for free-fall lifeboats, each launching appliance shall be so arranged that the fully equipped survival craft or rescue boat it serves can be safely launched against unfavorable conditions of trim of up to 10º and a list of up to 20º either way:

(a) when boarded, as required by SOLAS Regulation III/23 or III/33, by its full complement of persons; and

(b) with no more than the required operating crew on board. 2) Lifeboat launching appliances for oil tankers, chemical tankers and gas carriers

with a final angle of heel greater than 20º calculated in accordance with the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto and the IMO recommendations, as applicable, a lifeboat shall be capable of operating at the final angle of heel on the lower side of the ship, taking into consideration the final damaged waterline of the ship.

3) A launching appliance shall not depend on any means other than gravity or stored mechanical power, which is independent of the ship's power supplies to launch the survival craft or rescue boat it serves in the fully loaded and equipped condition and also in the light condition.

4) Each launching appliance shall be so constructed that only a minimum amount of routine maintenance is necessary. All parts requiring regular maintenance by the ship's crew shall be readily accessible and easily maintained.


5) The launching appliance and its attachments other than winch brakes shall be of sufficient strength to withstand a static proof load on test of not less than 2.2 times the maximum working load.

6) Structural elements and all blocks, falls, pad eyes, links, fastenings and all other fittings used in connection with launching equipment shall be designed with a factor of safety based on the maximum working load assigned and the ultimate strengths of the materials used for construction. A minimum factor of safety of 4.5 shall be applied to all structural members, and a minimum factor of safety of 6 shall be applied to falls, suspension chains, links and blocks.

7) Each launching appliance shall remain effective under conditions of icing, as far as practicable.

8) A lifeboat-launching appliance shall be capable of recovering the lifeboat with its crew.

9) Each rescue boat-launching appliance shall be fitted with a powered winch motor capable of raising the rescue boat from the water with its full rescue boat complement of persons and equipment at a rate of not less than 0.3 m/s.

10) The arrangement of the launching appliance shall be such as to enable safe boarding of the survival craft.

11) The attachments of the equipment's steel cables shall also be made of steel, ensuring the same resistance as of the cable,\.

b) Launching appliances using falls and a winch

1) Every launching appliance using falls and a winch, except for secondary launching appliances for free-fall lifeboats, shall comply with the provisions of paragraph a) above, besides the provisions of this paragraph.

2) The launching mechanism shall be so arranged that one may actuate it from a position on the ship's deck and, except for secondary launching appliances for free-fall lifeboats, from a position within the survival craft or rescue boat. When launched by a person on the ship's deck, the survival craft or rescue boat shall be visible to that person.

3) Falls shall be of rotation-resistant and corrosion-resistant steel wire rope .

4) In the case of a multiple-drum winch, unless an efficient compensatorydevice is fitted, the falls shall be so arranged as to wind off the drums at the same rate when lowering, and to wind on to the drums evenly at the same rate when hoisting.

5) The winch brakes of a launching appliance shall be of sufficient strength to withstand:

(a) a static test with a proof load of not less than 1.5 times the maximum working load; and

(b) a dynamic test with a proof load of not less than 1.1 times the maximum working load at maximum lowering speed.

6) An efficient hand gear shall be provided for recovery of each survival craft and rescue boat. Hand-gear handles or wheels shall not be rotated by moving parts of the winch when the survival craft or rescue boat is being lowered or when it is being hoisted by power

7) Where davit arms are recovered by power, safety devices shall be fitted which will automatically cut off the power before the davit arms reach the stops, in order to


prevent overstressing the falls or davits, unless the motor is designed to prevent such overstressing.

8) The speed at which the fully loaded survival craft or rescue boat is lowered to the water shall not be less than that obtained from the formula:

S = 0.4 + 0.02H where: S is the lowering speed in meters per second and H is the height in meters from the davit head to the waterline with the ship in the lightest sea-going condition.

9) The lowering speed of a fully equipped liferaft without persons on board shall not be less than 0.17 m/s. The lowering speed of other survival craft, fully equipped but without persons on board, shall be at least 70% of that required in paragraph 8).

10) The maximum lowering speed shall be 1.0 m/s, having regard to the design of the survival craft or rescue boat, the protection of its occupants from excessive forces and the strength of the launching arrangements taking into account inertia forces during an emergency stop. Means shall be incorporated into the appliance to ensure that this speed is not exceeded.

11) Every launching appliance shall be fitted with brakes capable of stopping the descent of the survival craft or rescue boat and holding it securely when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment. Brake pads shall be protected from water and oil.

12) Manual brakes shall be so arranged that the brake is always applied unless the operator, or a mechanism activated by the operator, holds the brake control in the "off" position.

c) Float-free launching When a survival craft requires a launching appliance and is also designed to float

free, the float-free release of the survival craft from its stowed position shall be automatic. d) Free-fall launching appliances

1) Every free-fall launching appliance shall comply with the applicable requirements of item 0333, besides the provisions of this paragraph.

2) The launching appliance shall be designed and installed so that it and the lifeboat it serves operate as a system to protect the occupants from harmful acceleration forces, and to ensure effective clearing of the ship's side.

3) The launching appliance shall be so constructed as to prevent sparking and incendiary friction during the launching of the lifeboat.

4) The launching appliance shall be designed and arranged so that, in its ready-to-launch position, the distance from the lowest point on the lifeboat it serves to the water surface with the ship in its lightest seagoing condition does not exceed the lifeboat's free-fall certification height.

5) The launching appliance shall be so arranged as to preclude accidental release of the lifeboat in its unattended stowed position. If the means provided to secure the lifeboat cannot be released from inside the lifeboat, it shall be so arranged as to preclude boarding the lifeboat without first releasing it.

6) The release mechanism shall be so arranged that at least two independent actions from inside the lifeboat are required in order to launch the lifeboat.


7) Each free-fall launching appliance shall be provided with a secondary means to launch the lifeboat by falls. Such means shall comply with the provisions of 0333 a) except 0333 a) 3), and 0333 b) except 0333 b) 6). It shall be capable of launching the lifeboat against unfavorable conditions of trim of up to 2º either way and list of up to 5º either way, and it does not need to comply with the speed requirements of paragraphs 0333 b) 8) and 0333 b) 9). If the secondary launching appliance is not dependent on gravity, stored mechanical power or other manual means, the launching appliance shall be connected to both the ship’s main and emergency power supplies.

The secondary means of launching shall be equipped with at least a single off-load capability to release the lifeboat.

Liferaft launching appliances Every liferaft launching appliance shall comply with the requirements of

paragraphs 0333 a) and 0333 b), except with regard to embarkation in the stowed position, recovery of the loaded liferaft and that manual operation is permitted for turning out the appliance. The launching appliance shall include an automatic release hook arranged so as to prevent premature release during lowering and shall release the lifeboat when waterborne. The release hook shall include a capability to release the hook under load. The on-load release control shall:

1) be clearly differentiated from the control that activates the automatic release function;

2) require at least two separate actions to operate; 3) with a load of 150 kg on the hook, require a force of at least 600 N and not more

that 700 N to release the load, or provide equivalent adequate protection against inadvertent release of the hook; and

4) be designed such that the crew members on deck can clearly observe when the release mechanism is properly and completely set.

f) Launching appliances used exclusively for rescue boats The davit-type launching appliance used exclusively for launching rescue boats weighing not more than 6000 N when fully loaded but without persons, may have its rotation effected by one person through a manually powered reduction gear. The maximum effort permitted on a handle with not more than 350 mm radius shall be 160 N. This launching appliance also does not need to feature the control inside the boat as prescribed in paragraph 0333-b) 2).

g) Testing of launching appliances The launching devices for life-saving craft shall be submitted to the tests

prescribed in ANNEX 3-FF. h) Conformity of mass-produced appliances

Mass-produced launching appliances, after prototype approval by the DPC, shall be tested by the Classification Society of the ship they are going to be installed on. This Classification Society shall, then, issue a statement of conformity with the approved prototype for each tested appliance, following the model of ANNEX 3-GG. 0334 - MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS OF EMBARKATION LADDERS

The specifications provided for in Regulation III-11/7 of SOLAS 74 as amended, and item 6.16, chapter VI of the LSA Code apply. Regulation V-23 addresses the pilot embarkation and disembarkation appliance and the mechanical elevator.


The following requirements specified in NBR-7020 (Embarkation Ladders for Maritime Use), Annex 3-C, are considered:

a) Handholds shall be provided to ensure a safe passage from the deck to the head of the ladder and vice-versa.

b) The steps of the ladder shall be: 1) made of hardwood, free from knots or other irregularities, smoothly machined

and free from sharp edges and splinters, or of suitable material of equivalent characteristics; 2) provided with and efficient non-slip surface, either by longitudinal grooving or

by application of an approved non-slip coating; 3) not less than 480 mm long, 115 mm wide and 25 mm thick, excluding any non-

slip surface or coating; 4) equally spaced not less than 300 mm or more than 380 mm apart and secured

in such a manner that they will remain horizontal; and 5) capable of withstanding a load of 495 kg for one minute, both with the ladder in

the vertical position and inclined by 15º to the vertical. The load shall be attached to the center and both ends of the step, being so distributed among these three points.

c) The side ropes of the ladder shall consist of two uncovered manila ropes not less than 65 mm in circumference, on each side. Each rope shall be continuous, with no joints below the top step. Other materials may be used provided the dimensions, breaking strain, weathering, stretching and gripping properties are at least equivalent to those of manila rope. All rope ends shall be secured to prevent unravelling.

d) The cables and painters shall be dimensioned with a safety factor of 6. e) Markings shall be applied under two steps, with capital letters well visible and

permanent, with the following information:

BRAZILIAN NAVY DIRECTORATE OF PORTS AND COASTS CERTIFICATE NO. / MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURING DATE

j) each ladder shall be submitted to, and approved in, the following tests: 1) Step loading test as described above; and 2) Prototype conformity.

0335 - MARINE EVACUATION SYSTEMS

The systems shall be submitted to, and approved in, the tests contained in the spreadsheets mentioned in Chapter 3, item 0304.

SECTION VIII - EMERGENCY RATIONS

0336 - REQUIREMENTS Each emergency ration unit consists of: a) Emergency Food Ration 1) The food units Emergency Rations are based on consist, generally, of stable

carbohydrates (sugar) and starch or equivalent, in a quantity sufficient to enable its use for a period of six days, providing the shipwrecked person with favorable metabolic and energetic


conditions for survival. The ration may be supplied in the form of gum, cookies, caramels, candies or similar and shall be supplied ready for consumption with no need for hydration, heating or any other care.

2) The emergency ration shall consist of the following components per person that the lifeboat or liferaft is permitted to accommodate:

Food unit: 500 to 550 g Energy: Minimum of 10,000 kJ Packaging: Tightly sealed (can) or vacuum-closed (flexible packaging).

Ingredients: Moisture ..........3 to 7% Salt .................maximum 0.2% Carbohydrates ........60 to 70% in weight or 50 to 60% in energy Fat ...................18 to 23% in weight or 33 to 43% in energyProtein .............6 to 10% in weight or 5 to 8% in energy

The presence of up to 5% in weight of white or slightly gray ash in this compound is acceptable (according to the National Committee on Norms and Standards - Resolution CNNPA 38/77).

The ration shall be palatable, edible from the package and packed in a manner which can be readily divided and easily opened.

The packaging seams and closures shall be impact-resistant and the enclosure shall be waterproof (verified through a rain-exposure test).

b) Emergency Drinking Water For the use as ration, its registration is not required by ANVISA (National Sanitary Surveillance Agency

), for not being considered as a public consumption item. Liquid emergency rations are divided in two types: A) and B). Ration type A is that submitted and approved, within the complement of an inflatable

liferaft, in the drop test prescribed in item 4.1.4 of MSC.81(70) with a drop height of 36 m; Ration type B is that submitted and approved in the same test, but with a drop height

of not less than 18m and less than 36m. In the drop test from a height above 18m, for both A and B types, a leaking in 5% of

the packages may be accepted if the following conditions are met: I) the liferaft equipment list indicates that an extra 5% of liquid ration beyond the

standard required amount is being carried, or that the liferaft carries a desalting device capable of producing an equivalent quantity of water;

II) the water recipients are contained in waterproof enclosures.

1) General requirements for emergency drinking water: a) The water shall be filled in a clean and hygienic place through an automatic filling

system with filters and ultraviolet lamps (germicidal lamp) in the ambient, reservoir and filling point;

b) The water shall not contain more than 500mg/l of salt; c) The water shall be submitted to Drinking Water Analysis, Physical-Chemical Analysis and

Bacteriological Analysis (including PH between 7.0 and 9.0); and Sensory Analysis for testing its flavor;

d) The packaging shall not transfer to the content any undesirable, toxic or contaminating substances presenting risk to the human health.


2) Tests Emergency Drinking Water tests are conducted in accordance with MIL-STD-3010 -

Test Procedures for Packaging Materials; MIL-PRF-131J - Barrier Materials, Watervaporproof, Greaseproof, Flexible, Heat-Sealable; and ASTM B 117- 73 - Standard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.

a) CHEMICAL, PHYSICAL AND BIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS: it shall be evidenced that the water meets the requirements for drinking water, and its sterilization, salt content and the presence of organisms, sediments and odor shall be verified;

b) STORAGE TEMPERATURE: two empty and two filled packagings shall be prepared and sealed under the same conditions. In the case of flexible packagings, the samples without water shall be filled with air as much as possible. The four samples shall be placed in a cycling chamber for 24 hours at a temperature of - 30°C, followed by another 24 hours at a temperature of 65°C. All samples shall then be examined. No sign of damage to the packagings, protective covers if existing, closures or markings shall be observed.

c) TIGHTNESS: the two empty packagings used in the storage temperature test shall be submitted to the tightness test. The hot water method for metal packagings or smashing (compression) for flexible packagings shall be applied.

I) the samples shall be kept at ambient temperature for at least four hours before the test. The samples shall be submerged in heated water at a temperature at least 10o C above their initial temperature, with a distance of not more than 25.4 mm between the top of the samples and the water surface. The samples shall be kept in that position for 8 minutes, an then turned repeatedly in the search for leaking;

II) During the closing, the samples at ambient temperature shall be filled with air as much as possible. They shall then be submerged in water (at a distance of not more than 50 mm and not less than 25.4 mm between the top of the samples and the water surface), and repeatedly compressed for 8 minutes with all joints and seals being observed. The samples shall not produce a continuous flow or a succession of bubbles from any part of their surface or their seams.

d) IMMERSION IN WATER: the two filled samples used in the storage temperature test shall be immersed in salt water with the approximate salinity of seawater, for 24 hours. Upon the end of this period, the samples shall be examined. No sign of damage to the packagings, their markings and closures shall be observed.

e) EXTERNAL CORROSION: In the case of metal packagings, the samples used in the durability test shall be submitted to the corrosion test (salt spray test) for 120 hours in a regular mist of a solution of 5% Sodium Chloride (NaCl) with initial PH of 7.1, at a temperature of 35°C.

f) DROP: Two filled samples shall be dropped onto a concrete surface from a height of 3 meters. One sample shall drop with the bottom facing the concrete surface, and the other, with the side facing that surface. Neither leaks nor damage to the seams of the tested samples shall be observed. This test aims at simulating situations in which the packages are used in rafts or boats normally launched from high levels. If this test is found insufficient regarding a real situation, modifications and additional tests may be required.

g) INTERNAL CORROSION: For metal packagings, two filled, closed samples shall be immersed in boiling water for 6 to 8 hours. Upon the end of this period, the samples shall be cooled until reaching the ambient temperature.


The samples shall then be placed inside a freezer in the vertical position, at a temperature of - 20°C for 16 hours, after which the frozen samples shall immediately start a new cycle. Six cycles alternating boiling and freezing shall be completed. Once the cycles are completed, the water from the tested samples and also non-tested water from the same source shall be chemically analyzed. The water from the tested samples shall not contain, when compared with the non-tested water, any increase in corrosion elements.

h) AGING TEST (flexible packaging) - 3 samples of 91.44 cm by 15.4 cm, cut from the same roll, with no dimension above 91,44 cm, shall be submitted to the following aging cycle: 8 hours in a humid chamber, at the temperature of 38 ± 2 o C and relative humidity of 90 to 95%; and 16 hours in an air-circulated oven at the temperature of 71 ± 2 o C. The aging cycle shall be repeated for five consecutive days per week. The samples shall be kept in the air-circulated oven within the specified conditions on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays. The holidays shall not exceed the total of two days during the whole test period. The aging procedure shall last for 14 consecutive days. The samples shall be folded, hung, handled and left on a flat surface inside the test chamber throughout the aging period. Upon the end of the period, the samples shall be brought to the ambient temperature and examined in all ends in the search for tearing. Any tearing observed shall not have an extension greater than 13mm measured from the bag's side end.

i) SEALING STRENGTH TEST(flexible packaging) - For this test a sealing machine is required with adequate control of temperature, time interval and sealing pressure; clamps 25.4 mm wide for holding a weight of 1.6 Kg; and a frame for assembling the whole set. Three sealed samples shall be picked from a production lot for the testing. Samples with double seal shall be avoided. The test shall be conducted at ambient temperature. One end of the sample shall be attached to the frame, leaving the other end free. Carefully, and without causing impact, the other end shall be attached to the 1.6 kg weight holding it for five minutes. After withdrawing the weight, the tested sample shall be examined. No opening greater than 1/32" shall be accepted.

3 Validity Periods 1) The validity period of emergency rations shall be not less than twenty-four (24)

months from the manufacturing date. 2) This period includes the time necessary for the storage and/or distribution to

the users. 3) A rigorous control of these perishable foods is necessary. Thus, every lot

manufactured shall have a sample deposited in a DPC-accredited laboratory which will certify the lot's validity for 24 months. Such information shall be forwarded to the DPC, being one specimen submitted to the Physical/Chemical/ Bacteriological Analysis and the Drinking Water Analysis with copies of the two reports forwarded to the DPC. The manufacturer shall store an additional sample of same lot. If there is no production for a three-month period, the need remains for sending to the DPC the two reports mentioned above.

4) If a lot is not approved, the DPC may cancel the Approval Certificate and withdraw the same from the Catalog of Approved Materials, and require the manufacturer to replace all lots sold and submit a new prototype to a new approval


process for the emission of an Approval Certificate in replacement to the cancelled certificate.

5) Markings

1) Ration

(a) On the packaging’s external face, the following information shall be shown: DPC APPROVAL No. EMERGENCY RATION (EMERGENCY DRINKING WATER) SOLID FOOD FOR ONE PERSON / 6 DAYS Divide the content for six days Keep non-consumed food inside the package Lot: Manufacturing date: / / Validity: / /

(b) The marking on packagings shall be of a color contrasting with that of the packaging.

2) Liquid Ration On the packaging’s external face, the following information shall be shown:

DPC APPROVAL No. EMERGENCY DRINKING WATER VOLUME ml. Keep the packagings protected from sunlight and heat. Open only a small orifice to avoid wasting. Drink only the minimum necessary in small gulps. Lot: Manufacturing date: / / Validity: / /


CHAPTER 4

OTHER APPROVABLE APPLIANCES 0401 - APPLICATION

The DPC is in charge of the approval of all life-saving appliances mentioned in SOLAS chapter III regarded by the Brazilian Law as subject to approval. The LSA Code provisions will be observed, and in the absence of specific criteria in the Code, the DPC will decide if other existing criteria may be accepted or will issue its own criteria. Furthermore, standards issued by countries or entities of recognized technological capacity may be adopted.

Chapter 3 addresses the several life-saving appliances and devices subject to approval. The scope of present chapter is complementary to that matter.

Likewise, SOLAS chapter II, the International Code for Application of Fire Test Procedures (FTP Code) and the International Code for Fire Safety Systems (FSS Code) set standards to be followed for the approval of equipment and systems.

The absence of specific tests and the existence of ABNT standards imply the possibility of waiving the approval by the DPC and accepting for the maritime sector the certification under standards of the Brazilian Association of Technical Standards by its accredited entities (see items 0403 and 0404). 0402 - TEST REPORT

This report shall be forwarded to the DPC upon conclusion of the tests and prototype approval, by the person in charge of testing. It will necessarily contain the following items:

1) Name and address of the lab or entity where the tests have been conducted; 2) Name and address of the testing’s Responsible Technician; 3) Report's identification number; 4) Date(s) in which the tests were realized; 5) Legal Name and address of the prototype manufacturer, and if applicable, of its

component manufacturers; 6) Product or prototype description (including dimensions, materials, closings,

thickness, accessories, etc.), manufacturing process and dated pictures (average of eight) with reference to drawings;

7) Maximum capacity; 8) Specific technical characteristics of the tests' conduct, such as temperature,

viscosity, density, pressure, etc.; 9) Brief description of the tests and respective results, citing their supporting

legislation; 10) Express statement signed by the Responsible Technician, declaring that the tests

have been conducted in compliance with the legislation referred to in item 9) and Maritime Authority Standards in force, acknowledging that the application of other methods or components or any divergence with the approved prototype should invalidate the results;

11) Signature with name and function of the Responsible Technician previously accredited by the manufacturer. 0403 - FIRE HOSE

This material does not have a provision for approval in the SOLAS. It is recommended that the Customer acquires hoses manufactured by companies holding the Brand Conformity Certificate issued by the ABNT - Brazilian Association of Technical Standards, and meeting the provisions of NBR 11861.


0404 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER The specifications to be followed are those provided in Regulation II-2/3 of SOLAS

74, as amended, and IMO Resolution A.951 (23). The capacity of fire extinguishers shall be between 9 liters and 13.5 liters. Specifications regarding their construction, periodic inspections, validity,

maintenance, classes and approval tests are for the INMETRO and not for the DPC. Ordinance 111 of 9/28/1999 from the Ministry of Development, Industry and Foreign

Trade (MEDIC) determines that national and imported extinguishers are required to be certified within the Brazilian Certification System (SBC) following the regulations of INMETRO (NIE-DINQP-087 Standard of June, 2000), which licenses companies with the right to apply the Compliance Marking on the extinguishing agent container of the fire extinguishers, providing at least the following information:

a) the stated manufacturer's guarantee, expressly registered in months and years, with the notice that upon its expiration the extinguisher shall be submitted to maintenance service;

b) the requirement for hydrostatic testing every five years or when the equipment presents corrosion or is thermally or mechanically damaged; and

c) deadline (month and year) for the first hydrostatic test. 0405 - OIL DISCHARGE MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM AND OIL

FILTRATION EQUIPMENT Any ship between 400 and 10000 GT shall be provided with an oil filtration equipment

in accordance with MARPOL 73/78 Regulation 16 and approved by the Administration in such conditions as to ensure that any mixture discharged to the sea after processed by the system will not contain more than 15 parts of oil per million. The constructive design of such equipment of pollution prevention by oily mixtures from the ships' machinery compartments, and the necessary tests verifying the requirements to be met, shall follow Resolution MEPC 60 (33) of the Marine Environment Protection Committee.

Any ship with GT 10000 or above shall be fitted with the oil filtration equipment and alarm devices capable of stopping automatically the discharge of oily mixture when the oil contained in the effluent exceeds 15 ppm. The carriage of great amounts of oil is made by ships that need to stay at sea for long periods due to the nature of their operation and merchandise. Under these circumstances, these ships require ballast in order to keep adequate stability conditions and navigation safety.

The Administration shall waive the requirements above when the ship is engaged in voyages within specific areas where the following conditions are met:

a) the ship has a storage tank of adequate volume, to the satisfaction of the Administration, for the full retention and stowage on board of the oily water;

b) all the oily water is retained on board for future discharge to reception equipment; c) the Administration determines the availability of reception equipment for receiving

the oily water in a sufficient number of ports or terminals visited by the ship; d) the International Oil Pollution Prevention Certificate (IOPP), when required, is

endorsed for the fact that the ship is engaged exclusively in voyages within specific areas; and

e) the quantity, time and port of discharge is recorded in the Oil Registry Book.


The Administration shall ensure that ships with less than 400 GT are equipped, as far as practicable, to retain on board the oil, oil mixture or their discharge, according to the requirements for ships of above 400 GT which are not tankers, meaning:

a) the ship is not in a "special area" (that recognized for technical reasons and specific traffic characteristics, where more effective methods are adopted for preventing pollution of the sea by oil);

b) the ship is on its course; c) the non-diluted oil does not exceed 15 ppm; and d) the ship is operating the equipment required by regulations. The oil filtration equipment shall have its design approved by the Administration, and

ensure that all the oil mixture discharged to the sea after passing through the system or systems does not contain oil exceeding 15 ppm. Alarm devices shall be provided to indicate when such level is not maintained. The system shall also have a device ensuring that any discharge of oil mixture is interrupted automatically when the effluent contains oil exceeding 15 ppm. The design of such system and devices shall be approved by the Administration as meeting the recommendations of the IMO-MEPC (Marine Environment Protection Committee).

Ships delivered prior to 7/6/1993 had these requirements applied in 7/6/1998 under the condition of maintaining operation of water/oil separators, equivalent to 100 ppm.

The Oil Discharge Control and Monitoring System operation instructions shall contain the Operation Manual approved by the Administration. The latter shall contain both the manual and the automatic operations. (Reg. 15, 3c). 0406 - AUTONOMOUS BREATHING APPARATUS

This individual protection equipment provided in SOLAS chapter II-2 is detailed in chapter 3 of the International Code for Fire Safety Systems - FSS Code).

The recommendations of NBR 13716 and complementary documents mentioned therein will also be followed for approval.

The main requirements are: a) the air volume contained in the cylinder shall be at least 1200 liters; b) the cylinder shall be capable of operating for at least 30 minutes, as an alternative

to the previous subparagraph; c) a guide line must be provided of at least 30 meters with a quick-connection

hardware capable of being attached to the equipment’s harness or to its own belt, extensible when starting the operation. The line shall be tested to withstand a force of 3.5 kN for 5 minutes and be fireproof, according to the provisions of the International Code for Application of Fire Test Procedure (FTP Code). 0407 - EMERGENCY BREATHING DEVICE

Consists of a device that supplies air or oxygen, enabling the escape from a compartment with a dangerous atmosphere. It shall be of an approved type.

Emergency Escape Breathing Devices (EEBD) are the approved type, with standards set forth in the International Code for Fire Safety Systems - FSS Code and MSC/Circ. 849 of June 08, 1998 with the following requirements:

a) feature a fireproof mask capable of fully and safely covering the eyes, nose and mouth;


b) feature a fireproof hood fully covering the head and neck, besides part of the shoulders;

c) the EEBD shall be capable of operating for at least 10 minutes and includes as integral parts the mask and hood mentioned in a) and b) above, made of fire-resistant material , and present an opening for visibility;

d) be capable of leaving the hands free when used or being carried, and not be affected by the ambient atmosphere when stored;

e) brief instructions or diagrams indicating clearly how to use shall be printed on the EEBD. The procedures shall be easily understandable in the short time necessary for the user to evade from an atmosphere dangerous to human life or human health;

f) the EEBD shall be clearly marked with the data of the Approval Certificate, manufacturer and serial number; and

g) EEBD units reserved for the use in drills shall be clearly marked as such. The tests to be conducted shall verify the above-mentioned specifications and also, if

applicable, those provided in the NBR 13716. When it comes to fireproof accessories, the provisions of the International Code for Application of Fire Test Procedures (FTP Code) shall be met.

The analysis to be made shall consider the provisions of chapters 14 of both the IBC Code and IGC Code stating that the service time for escape in the ships covered by those codes is 15 minutes. 0408 - PERSONNEL TRANSFER BASKET

a) Conceptualization It is a device capable of safely transferring persons in transshipment operations

between an offshore installation and a vessel and vice versa. It is addressed in regulation 12.2 of the MODU Code (Code for the Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units).

It is recommended for daylight use, with good visibility and the operator having the transported personnel at sight, wind below 30 knots and wave height of less than four (4) meters.

b) Additional regulations Standard NBR 10876/1989 - the component nomenclature adopted was based on

the figure and table shown in the annex to this standard. The manufacturer will be responsible for the specification of the basket

components, and when selecting similar materials, for their compliance with their purposes, operation, and requirements of the above-mentioned Standard in items 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.3; the dimensions recommended in item 4.1.2, and the accessories as stipulated in 4.2 and 4.3. The documents sent for the approval shall include the Quality Certificates of all materials used.

c) Marking A steel plate, firmly attached to the bottom ring, shall contain: 1) name of the manufacturer; 2) complement; 3) type and model; 4) serial number; 5) manufacturing date; and 6) the words: Approval Certificate No....

d) Tests 1) Basket Loading Test


Proceed as indicated in NBR 10876/89 item 5.3.1, noting that the load to apply will be 5 times the design weight of the fully loaded basket, both for lifting and for straining, being never less than 3000 kgf;

2) Load and Attachment Test of the Bottom Float (or Shock Absorber) Proceed as indicated in Standard 10876/89 item 5.3.2, placing the 150 kgf

loads at each of the accesses. The minimum access size will be 500 mm wide; 3) Elasticity Test of the Stabilizer Set

Proceed as in item 5.3.3 of the Standard, considering a minus tolerance of 300 mm;

4) Buoyancy Test Proceed as in item 5.3.4 of the Standard, considering an additional load of 15

kgf per person of the design complement, i.e., 105 kgf per person; 5) Basket Bottom Load Test

Proceed as in item 5.3.5 of the Standard; 6) Basket Lateral Impact Test

The basket with its full design load shall be submitted to a pendulum action in order to cause an impact at the speed of 3.4 m/s over a flat, rigid surface. No damage capable of impairing its safe operation shall occur.

e) Maintenance The baskets shall be serviced every 12 months, observing the following

requirements: Be serviced by a basket manufacturer of similar equipmentalready approved; and

The technical staff doing the servicing shall work in the servicing company and be duly qualified for performing that service. 0409 - USE OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

Important requirements shall be observed in compliance with SOLAS 74/78 chapter II-2, which have been incorporated in the International Code for Application of Test Procedures - FTP. The latter specifies also the tests the materials shall be submitted to.

Definitions: Non-combustible material - a material which neither burns nor emits flammable vapors

in sufficient quantity for self-ignition when reaching a temperature of approximately 750 0 C as determined in accordance with the International Code for Application of Fire Test Procedures - FTP Code.

Standard Fire Test is the test in which selected specimens of bulkheads and decks are placed inside furnaces under temperatures near those of a standard time-temperature curve.

"A" class divisions - means those formed by bulkheads and decks which are: built of steel or equivalent material; adequately stiffened; capable of preventing the passage of smoke and flame for one hour under the standard test, and insulated with approved non-combustible materials such that the average temperature and the temperature of any single point, including joints, on the unexposed side do not rise more than 140°C and 180°C, respectively, above the original temperature within the following time frames:

Class A - 60: 60 minutes Class A - 30: 30 minutes Class A - 15: 15 minutes Class A - 0: 0 minutes - "B" class divisions - means those formed by bulkheads, decks, ceilings and linings

which are: built in such a way as to be capable of preventing the passage of flame for


at least half an hour of the standard fire test; built of approved non-combustible material; insulated in such a way that the average temperature and the temperature of any single point, including joints, on the unexposed side do not rise more than 140 0 C and 2250 C, respectively, above the original temperature within the following time frames:

Class B - 15: 15 minutes Class B - 0: 0 minutes "C" class divisions - means those constructed of approved non-combustible materials.

They do not need to meet neither requirements relative to the passage of smoke and flame nor limitations relative to the temperature rise.

"F" class divisions - means those formed by bulkheads, decks, ceilings and linings which comply with the following: be so constructed as to be capable of preventing the passage of flame for at least half an hour of standard fire test; and be insulated in such a way that the average temperature and the temperature of any single point, including joints, on the unexposed side do not rise more than 139 0 C and 2250 C, respectively, above the original temperature for the first one-half hour of the standard fire test (regulation V/2-6 of the Consolidated Text annexed to the International Convention on the Safety of Fishing Vessels, 1977, amended by the Torremolinos Protocol, 1993).

The materials are: a) Divisions; b) Non-combustible material; c) Material capable of emitting smoke and toxic products; d) Control System for fire-testing of doors; e) Finishing material for decks, ceilings and similar surfaces; f) Deck-coating material; g) Textile material installed vertically; h) Upholstered furniture; and i) Bed linen

NOTE: The FTP Code provides also the procedures for testing:

a) Sprinkler systems; b) High-speed craft materials; c) Requirements for measuring contents of smoke and toxic products; d) Fixed sprinkler system of high-speed craft; e) Fire-resistant divisions for high-speed craft; f) Flame dampers; g) Halon gas fire-extinguishing system; and h) Fixed fire-extinguishing system.

0410 - FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS

The international requirements for the fire safety systems provided in chapter II-2 of SOLAS 74/78 are set forth in the International Code for Fire Safety Systems - FSS Code.


0411 - SEARCHLIGHT Used on rescue boats and lifeboats; addressed in Resolution MSC.81 (70), item 13

with the requirements to meet for approval. 0412 - LINE-THROWING APPLIANCES

Every line-throwing appliance shall: a) be capable of throwing a line with reasonable accuracy to at least 230 m in calm

water; b) include not less than four projectiles; c) include not less than four lines, each having a breaking strength of at least 2 kN; d) have an Instruction Manual or diagrams clearly illustrating its

use; and

e) contain the projectiles and lines in a water-resistant casing. In the case of a pistol-fired rocket, the line and rockets together with the means of ignition shall be

stowed in a container which provides protection from the weather. The procedures provided for in NBR - 10878 shall be adopted.

0413 - DAYLIGHT SIGNALLING LAMP

Its application is addressed in SOLAS chapter V, approved by the MSC.73/21/Add.2 annex 7, for all ships of over 150 gross tonnage and passenger ships, providing an efficient daylight or night signalling means between ships or ship to shore, which shall not be solely dependent upon the ship's main source of electrical power.

The technical requirements to be met are contained in Resolution MSC.95 (72) of 5/22/2000, annex 13 of MSC 72/23/Add.1. 0414 - CHARACTERISTICS OF VISUAL SIGNALS SUBJECT TO APPROVAL

The Visual Signals provided in the LSA Code shall meet the following characteristics: a) Rocket Parachute Flare: 1) be contained in a water resistant enclosure; 2) show brief instructions printed on the enclosure, or diagrams, clearly illustrating its

way of use; 3) have an integrated ignition system; 4) be so designed as to not cause discomfort to the person holding the enclosure,

when used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions; 5) reach an altitude of not less than 300 m when fired vertically. At the trajectory's

highest point, or near it, the rocket shall eject a parachute flare which shall: 5.1 - burn with a bright red light; 5.2 - burn uniformly, with an average luminous intensity not lower than

30,000 candles; 5.3 - have a burning period of not less than 40 seconds; 5.4 - have a rate of descent of not more than 5 m/s; and 5.5 - not damage the parachute or its attachments while burning. b) Hand Flares: 1) be contained in a water-resistant enclosure; 2) show brief instructions printed on the enclosure, or diagrams, clearly illustrating its

way of use; 3) have a self-contained means of ignition; 4) be so designed as to not cause discomfort to the person holding the enclosure and

not endanger the survival craft with burning or glowing residues when used in


accordance with the manufacturer's operating instructions; 5) burn with a bright red light; 6) burn uniformly, with an average luminous intensity not lower than 15,000 candles; 7) have a burning period of not less than 1 minute; and 8) keep burning after submerged in water for a period of 10 seconds, at 100 mm below

the water surface. c) Buoyant Smoke Signal: 1) be contained in a water-resistant enclosure; 2) not ignite explosively when used in accordance with the manufacturer's operating

instructions; 3) show brief instructions printed on the enclosure, or diagrams, clearly illustrating its

way of use; 4) emit smoke of a highly visible color at a uniform rate for a period of at least 3 minutes

when floating in calm water; 5) not emit any flame during the entire smoke emission time; 6) not be swamped in a seaway; and 7) continue to emit smoke when submerged in water for a period of 10 seconds, at

100 mm below the water surface. 0415 - SOUND SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT

The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (COLREG) updated by Resolution A.910 (22), determine that the whistle, the bell and the gong shall meet the specifications set forth in their Annex III. 0416 - NAVIGATION LIGHTS AND MARKS

a) The requirements for navigation lights and marks are contained in Annex I of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea - RIPEAM-72, as amended;

b) For approval purposes, these items shall be submitted to laboratory tests necessary to verify their compliance with the requirements set forth in that Annex;

c) The DPC shall be given the testing program and, if finding it necessary, will follow-up its conduct. 0417 - IMMERSION AND ANTI-EXPOSURE SUITS AND THERMAL PROTECTIVE AIDS

They shall be submitted to, and approved in, the tests contained in the spreadsheets mentioned in Chapter 3, item 0304 and MSC / Circ. 1114/2004.

0418 - GENERAL ALARM AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

a) General Emergency Alarm System 1) The general emergency alarm system shall be capable of sounding the general

emergency alarm signal consisting of seven or more short blasts followed by one long blast on the ship's whistle or siren and additionally on an electrically operated bell or klaxon or other equivalent warning system, which shall be powered from the ship's main supply and the emergency source of electrical power required by SOLAS Regulation II-1/42 or II-1/43, as appropriate. The system shall be capable of being operated from the bridge and, except for the ship's whistle, also from other strategic points. The system shall be audible throughout all of the accommodation and normal crew working spaces.


The alarm shall continue to function after it has been triggered until it is manually turned off or is temporarily interrupted by a message on the public address system.

2) On passenger ships, the general emergency alarm system shall also be audible on all open decks.

3) The minimum sound pressure levels for the emergency alarm tone in interior and exterior spaces shall be 80 dB (A) and at least 10 dB (A) above ambient noise levels existing during normal equipment operation with the ship under way in moderate weather. In cabins without a loudspeaker installation, an electronic alarm transducer shall be installed, e.g. a buzzer or similar.

4) The sound pressure levels at the sleeping position in cabins, and in cabin bathrooms, shall be at least 75 dB (A) and at least 10 dB (A) above ambient noise levels.

b) Public address system 1) The public address system shall be a loudspeaker installation enabling the

broadcast of messages into all spaces where crew members or passengers, or both, are normally present, and to muster stations. It shall allow for the broadcast of messages from the navigation bridge and such other places on board a ship as the DPC deems necessary. It shall be installed with regard to acoustically marginal conditions and not require any action from the addressee. It shall be protected against unauthorized use.

2) With the ship under way in normal conditions, the minimum sound pressure levels for broadcasting emergency announcements shall be:

(a) in interior spaces, 75 dB (A) and at least 20 dB (A) above the speech interference level; and

(b) in exterior spaces, 80 dB (A) and at least 15 dB (A) above the speech interference level. 0419 - FIRE DAMPER

A device installed in ventilation systems, preventing the passage of fire to the interior of tanks.

The regulations for design, positioning and testing is provided for in resolution MSC/Circ. 677, published in the International Code for Application of Fire Test Procedures - FTP Code, combined with MSC/Circ. 450 Rev.1. 0420 - FIXED, NON-STRUCTURAL FUEL TANKS FOR SURVIVAL CRAFT AND

RESCUE BOATS a) Location - they shall be capable of accessing for inspection or maintenance with no

need for removal of the boat's structural parts, and securely attached in such a way that the use of tools is necessary for their removal.

b) General Requirements 1) They shall be so installed as to provide maximum protection against leaking, impact

and fire; 2) All the tank components, including accessories such as hoses, connections, inlets

and outlets shall be accessible for inspection; 3) Upon installation, the whole system shall be tested at a minimum pressure of 21

kPa (3lb/in2 or 0,21 kg/cm2) for a period of 30 minutes;


4) The tank shall be so designed and installed as to have at least 5% of its volume reserved for expansion of the fuel content when filled to its maximum operational capacity;

5) The tank and its accessories, when installed, shall not allow for the leaking of liquids and vapors to the boat's interior;

6) Any electrical component installed shall be protected against sparks; 7) Metal tanks shall be built of materials meeting the provisions of the following table.

Non-metallic materials may be considered in regard to corrosion resistance. However, they shall meet all other requirements of this item:

CORROSION RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS MATERIAL SPECIFICATION MINIMUM NOMINAL THICKNESSCopper-nickel ASTM - B127 Class A 0.79 mm Nickel-copper ASTM - B 122 1.14 mm Copper (1) ASTM - B152 type E.T.P. 1.45 mm Steel (2) ASTM A93 1.90 mm Aluminum Alloy 5052, 5083 or 5086 2.29 mm Stainless steel 316L 0.79 mm

Notes: (1) Copper tanks shall have their interior coated with tin through the electroplating

process; (2) Steel-plate tanks, when built for using with gasoline or alcohol, shall be galvanized

by hot immersion on the interior and exterior surfaces; 8) The tanks shall be so constructed as to prevent accumulation of humidity or fuel

residues externally; 9) Gasoline or alcohol tanks shall not be fitted with openings at the bottom or sides; 10) Every tank shall have a permanently attached plate showing at least the following

information: (a) Type of fuel to be filled; (b) Manufacturer's name; (c) Manufacturing year; (d) Capacity in liters; and (e) The words: Approval Certificate DPC No.

11) Gasoline or alcohol tanks shall not be a part of the hull;

12) Each tank shall have its own filling system; 13) The tank's filling system shall be operated from the deck

directly into the tank, in such a way that there is no vapor retention inside the boat; 14) The hoses, connections and other accessories shall be of adequate material for

the type of fuel used; 15) The minimum inside diameter of the filling tube shall be 32 mm (1 ¼”);

16) The tank venting system shall: (a) discharge the vapors outside the boat; (b) not allow the fuel to overflow to the boat's interior;


(c) minimize the accidental entry of water; (d) prevent the tank's internal pressure from exceeding 80% of the tank's operation

pressure; (e) the vent's flexible hoses shall have an internal diameter of not less than

15 mm (5/8”); and (f) be fitted with a fire damper.

0421 - SMOKE DETECTOR

This device has its installation addressed by SOLAS regulation II-2/7 and the requirements contained in chapter 9 of the FSS CODE (Fire Safety Systems Code), except for what is expressly modified by MSC/Circ.1935.

- 5 - 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 6

CHAPTER 5

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE STATIONS OF LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES

0501 - CONCEPTS

Maintenance Stations These are companies running the activity of maintenance and repair services of

inflatable life-saving appliances, in compliance with regulations of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea - SOLAS 74/78 and NORMAM 05/DPC. Their capability for these services is verified, as well as their availability of adequately trained personnel, appropriate tooling and standardized technical procedures.

Service Stations These are companies running the activity of maintenance and repair services of

rescue boats and survival craft and their launching devices, in compliance with regulations of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea - SOLAS 74/78 and NORMAM 05/DPC. 0502 - MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ESTABLISHMENT OF

MAINTENANCE STATIONS AND SERVICE STATIONS a) Maintenance Stations shall:

1) Be a Legal Person, under the terms of the laws in force; 2) Have adequate facilities and tooling for their specific activity; 3) Have their own personnel, adequately trained for their specific activity; 4) Have stated in their Articles of Incorporation, the purpose of running the

activity of maintenance and repair of life-saving appliances; and 5) Bear the ISO 9000 Certificate.

b) Service Stations shall: 1) Be a Legal Person, under the terms of the laws in force; 2) Have adequate facilities and tooling for their specific activity; 3) Have their own personnel, adequately trained for their specific activity; 4) Be a company registered at the Regional Counsel of Engineering,

Architecture and Agronomy (CREA); 5) Have as Responsible Technician, a mechanical or naval engineer with a

CREA register; 6) Have stated in their Articles of Incorporation, the purpose of running the

activity of maintenance and repair of equipment from rescue boats and survival craft and their launching devices; and

7) Bear the ISO 9000 Certificate. 0503 - ACCREDITATION CERTIFICATE

a) For Maintenance Stations: Issued by a Classification Society assigned by the DPC, approving the

Maintenance Stations that are in compliance with item 0502 above, Annex 5-A


of this NORMAM and the requirements provided for in the SOLAS 74/78 Convention; and

b) For Service Stations: Issued by a Classification Society, approving the Service Stations which

are in compliance with item 0502 above. 0504 - SERVICING OF LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES

a) Vessels bearing a Class Certificate, as defined in NORMAM-01/DPC, item 0301, shall have their life-saving appliances serviced in Maintenance Stations or Service Stations accredited by the Classification Society responsible for their classification, or by another if accepted by the Society; and

b) Other vessels shall have their life-saving appliances serviced in Maintenance Stations or Service Stations accredited by a Classification Society or Specialized Entity. 0505 - LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE SERVICING CERTIFICATE

a) After servicing an appliance, the Maintenance Station or Service Station shall issue a Life-Saving Appliance Servicing Certificate, written in Portuguese and English for Class I appliances and in Portuguese for all others.

b) The Life-Saving Appliance Servicing Certificate shall contain the following items:

1) Name, address, contact phones, and CNPJ of the Maintenance Station or Service Station that performed the service;

2) Vessel/platform name to which the serviced appliance belongs, and its port of or registry;

3) Type of life-saving appliance serviced, manufacturer, model, serial number, class, manufacturing date and number of the Approval Certificate; and

4) Name of the accrediting Classification Society/Specialized Entity and number of the Accreditation Certificate with its validity period.

c) When the appliance is serviced by a Service Station, the Life-Saving Appliance Servicing Certificate shall be signed by the station's Responsible Technician; and

d) The Servicing Certificates of rescue boats or survival craft and their launching devices shall be signed by a CREA-registered naval or mechanical engineer and come together with the respective ART (Annotation of Technical Responsibility). 0506 - CONTROL OF SERVICED APPLIANCES

Maintenance Stations and Service Stations shall keep control of the material they service or repair, so they can be capable of informing the DPC about the place of destination of serviced appliances and the type of service performed.


0507 - PERIODIC REPORTS Maintenance Stations and Service Stations shall keep on file a list of the life-

saving appliances they repaired or serviced in the last seventeen (17) months. 0508 - INSPECTION OF LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE MAINTENANCE STATIONS

AND SERVICE STATIONS The DPC, and the CP/DL/AG offices on request by the DPC, may conduct

unexpected inspections at the facilities of a Maintenance Station or Service Station, in order to check their compliance with these Standards.

According to the result of such inspections, the DPC may adopt the following actions:

a) Suspension of the repair and maintenance activities, the following measures being taken:

1) By the Maintenance Station/Repair Station: correct the non-conformities; 2) By the Classification Society/Specialized Entity:

I) Conduct an inspection to verify the correction of non-conformities; and II) Require, if deemed pertinent, that the repaired or serviced life-saving

appliances with the respective certificates still valid are submitted to a new service or repair at that same Maintenance Station or Service Station.

b) Cancellation of the Accreditation Certificate, the following measures being taken:

1) By the Maintenance Station/Repair Station: request to the Classification Society/Specialized Entity a new accreditation, after correcting the non-conformities; or

2) By the Classification Society/Specialized Entity: require that the repaired or serviced life-saving appliances with the respective certificates still valid are submitted to a new service or repair by an accredited Maintenance Station or Service Station.

ANNEX 1-A

- 1-A-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

COMPENSATION TABLE

MATERIAL APPROVAL / AUTHORIZATION OF MAINTENANCE STATION

ITEM

SERVICE VALUE

(IN REALS)

1

Process Analysis for approval of: a) Packagings for transportation of dangerous goods; b) Rescue boats or Survival Craft (except buoyant apparatus); c) Launching and Embarkation Devices on Vessels; and d) Other Appliances subject to Approval.

750.00

e) Life-Saving Appliances not in subparagraphs b, c and d; 380.00

2 Process analysis for authorization of a maintenance station:

750.00

3 Certificate Emission (approval and authorization) 190.00

4 Certificate Revalidation Analysis + Emission of the

5

Surveyor's trip for witnessing the tests of: a) Packagings for carrying dangerous goods; b) Rescue boats or Survival craft; c) Launching and Embarkation Devices for Boats; d) Other equipment subject to approval; and e) Life-saving appliances

500.00

500.00

500.00

6 Surveyor's trip for inspecting a maintenance station of inflatable equipment:

500.00

7

Withdrawal of demands contained in survey reports of a maintenance station for inflatable equipment

380.00

NOTES:

1) For each subsequent day of the surveyor's trip, an amount of R$ 250.00 (two-hundred fifty reals) will be added.

2) The cost of air tickets shall be added to the service value. Local ground transportation to be provided by the Company.

ANNEX 1-B

- 1-B-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

Hon. Mr. DIRECTOR OF PORTS AND COASTS

(Name, address, CGC), hereby requests the emission of an Approval (or Authorization) Certificate in compliance with the Maritime Authority Standards for Material, promising to comply with all their terms.

Under these terms, grant is requested.

______________________ , on ______ /_________________ / ________ . Place

SIGNATURE OF LEGAL REPRESENTATIVE

Annexes: A) Articles of Incorporation notarized copy (first approval or alteration); and

B) Applicable technical documents

AUTHORIZATION

I hereby authorize the DPC to collect samples of material related to the present

application, after its approval, in stores or other distribution centers, for inspection and control in compliance with the provisions of paragraph 0115 b) 3) of NORMAM 05/DPC.


ANNEX 1-C

STAMP MODEL

APPROVAL [ ]

AUTHORIZATION [ ]

CERTIFICATE

SEAL

OF THE DPC

DATE: / /

CERTIFICATE NUMBER:

____________________________

NOTES: 1) In the fields APPROVAL [ ] or AUTHORIZATION [ ], a single X will be filled in, specifying the type of certificate;

2) The fields related to DATE / / shall be filled with the day, month and year of emission of the certificate; and

3) The fields related to CERTIFICATE NUMBER ________ shall be filled with the corresponding certificate number (3 digits) and year of issue (2 digits).

-1-C-1- NORMAM-05/DPC

ANNEX 1-D

- 1-D-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4


(Name, address, CGC), hereby requests the grant of revalidation of the Approval (or Authorization) Certificate No. in compliance with the Maritime Authority Standards for Material which I declare to know and promise to comply with all their terms.

I further declare that the material keeps all its chemical, physical and structural characteristics as in the approved prototype.


_____________________ , on _____ / ________________ / _________ . Place


ANNEX 1-E.

- 1-E-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

STATEMENT OF TECHNICAL RESPONSIBILITY

I, (name, qualification, marital status, ID card w/ body of issue, and CPF) hereby state

in compliance with the provisions of NORMAM-05/DPC, to know that the tests have been

conducted in compliance with the IMDG (or FTP, FSS, LSA) Code and Maritime Authority

standards in force, and that the adoption of other configurations or different materials not

used in the prototype may invalidate the Certificate.

Place and date of signature.

COMPANY RESPONSIBLE TECHNICIAN

ANNEX 2-A


u n

APPROVAL No. XXX/XXXX

REPÚBLICA FEDERATIVA DO BRASIL

(FEDERATIVE REPUBLIC OF BRAZIL) MARINHA DO BRASIL

(BRAZILIAN NAVY) DIRETORIA DE PORTOS E COSTAS (DIRECTORATE OF PORTS AND COASTS)

CERTIFICADO DE HOMOLOGAÇÃO (APPROVAL CERTIFICATE)

1) PRODUTO (PRODUCT): 2) MODELO (MODEL):

3) FABRICADO POR (MANUFACTURED BY):

4) ENDEREÇO (ADDRESS):

5) NORMAS APLICÁVEIS (APPLICABLE STANDARDS): Código Internacional Marítimo para Transporte de Mercadorias Perigosas - Código IMDG e NORMAM 05/DPC (International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code - IMDG Code and NORMAM 05/DPC).

6) MARCAÇÃO (MARKING):

1A1/X/250/-- (Ano de fabricação)

(Year of manufacture)

BR/XX/DPC XXX/XXXX

7) DESENHO (DRAWING ):

8) DATA DE EMISSÃO (DATE OF ISSUE): 9) VALIDADE (VALIDITY):

Poderão ser embaladas, apenas, substâncias ou artigos compatíveis com o modelo homologado, cumpridos os requisitos previstos para embalagens e os tipos e limites descritos nas normas (Only substances or articles compatible with the approved model may be packaged, if meeting the requirements provided for packagings and the types and limits described in the regulations).

NAME RANK

Superintendente da Segurança do Tráfego Aquaviário (Superintendent of Waterway

Traffic Safety)

ANNEX 2-B

Mod 4

u n

CONFORMIDADE Nº (COMPLIANCE No.) XXX/YYYY

REPÚBLICA FEDERATIVA DO BRASIL (FEDERATIVE REPUBLIC OF BRAZIL)

MARINHA DO BRASIL (BRAZILIAN NAVY) DIRETORIA DE

PORTOS E COSTAS (DIRECTORATE OF PORTS AND COASTS)

RELATÓRIO DE CONFORMIDADE

(COMPLIANCE REPORT) 1) PRODUTO (PRODUCT): 2) MODELO (MODEL):

3) FABRICADO POR (MANUFACTURED BY): 4) ENDEREÇO (ADDRESS):

5) MARCAÇÃO (MARKING):

1A1/Z250/---- BR/CCCC/DPC XXX/YYYY

6) NÚMERO DE SÉRIE DAS EMBALAGENS (SERIAL NUMBER OF PACKAGINGS):

7) DATA DE EMISSÃO (DATE OF ISSUE): 9/28/2001

8) VALIDADE (VALIDITY): 7/31/2005

9) CONCLUSÃO (CONCLUSION): As embalagens citadas no item 6 foram inspecionadas e encontram-se de acordo com o Código Internacional Marítimo para Transporte de Mercadorias Perigosas - IMDG Code Item emenda: ) e NORMAM 05 (The packagings mentioned in item 6 were inspected and are in accordance with the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code - IMDG Code item amendment: and NORMAM 05).

Chefe do Departamento de Material (Head of Material Department)

- 2-B-1 - NORMAM-05/DPC

Mod 4

ANNEX 2-C

IS THE SUBSTANCE THERMALLY STABLE ?

YES

IS IT AN EXPLOSIVE

SUBSTANCE ?

YES

IS THE SUBSTANCE TOO DANGEROUS FOR

TRANSPORTATION IN THE FORM IT WAS TESTED ?

YES

PROCEDURES FOR FRAMING A SUBSTANCE OR ARTICLE IN CLASS 1

NEW SUBSTANCE NEW ARTICLE

WAS THE SUBSTANCE MANUFACTURED TO PRODUCE AN EXPLOSIVE OR PYROTECHNICAL

EFFECT ?

YES SUBSTANCE TO BE

CONSIDERED FOR

CLASS 1 ?

NO

SERIES 1 TEST SERIES 3 TEST

NO NO

SERIES 2 TEST NO

YES

IS THE SUBSTANCE TOO INSENSITIVE TO BE ACCEPTED IN CLASS 1 ?

NO

ENCAPSULATE OR PACK THE SUBSTANCE.

SERIES 4 TEST

YES IS THE ARTICLE, OR ARTICLE OF PACKED

SUBSTANCES, TOO DANGEROUS FOR

TRANSPORTATION ?

NO

NOT CLASS 1 REJECTED: THE SUBSTANCE

IS NOT STABLE

FOR TRANSPORTATION

REJECTED:

THE ARTICLE, OR ARTICLE OF PACKED SUBSTANCES, IS SUITABLE FOR TRANSPORTATION IN THE FORM IT WAS TESTED

PROVISIONALLY

ACCEPTED IN CLASS 1

(GO TO

ANNEX 2)

- 2-C-1 - NORMAM-05/DPC

Mod 4

ANNEX 2-D

IS THERE RISK TO

APPROACHING FIREMEN WITHIN A

RADIUS OF 5 M ?

DIVISION

1.5 DIVISION 1.4

COMPATIBILITY

GROUP S

YES

PROCEDURES FOR FRAMING IN A DIVISION OF CLASS 1

ARTICLE OR SUBSTANCE PROVISIONALLY ACCEPTED IN

CLASS 1 (COMING FROM ANNEX 2 C)

IS THE ARTICLE INTENDED OR DIVISION 1.6 ?

YES

NO

IS THE SUBSTANCE A CANDIDATE FOR

DIVISION 1.5 ?

NO PACK THE

SUBSTANCE SERIES 6 TEST

YES

IS THE ARTICLE EXTREMELY

INSENSITIVE ? NO

SERIES 5 TEST IS THE RESULT A MASS

EXPLOSION ?

NO

YES

IS THE EXPLOSIVE SUBSTANCE VERY

INSENSITIVE WITH RISK OF MASS EXPLOSION ?

NO

IS THE GREATEST

RISK THAT OF PROJECTIONS ?

YES

NO

NO WAS THE SUBSTANCE MANUFACTURED TO PRODUCE AN EXPLOSIVE OR PYROTECHNICAL EFFECT ?

NO DESPITE THAT, IS THERE A SMALL RISK

OF IGNITION OR INITIATION ?

NO IS THE MAJOR HAZARD RADIANT AND/OR VIOLENT

BURNING BUT WITH NO DANGEROUS BLAST OR PROJECTION HAZARD ?

YES

YES IS THE PRODUCT

AN ARTICLE EXCLUDED BY DEFINITION ?

NO

NOT

CLASS 1 DIVISION 1.6

DIVISION

1.3

DIVISION

1.2

DIVISION

1.1

- 2-D-1 - NORMAM-05/DPC

SERIES 7 TEST

YES

NO

Division 1.4Compatibility

Groups other thanS

ANNEX 2-E.


CHECKLIST

DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, INSPECTION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS OF PORTABLE TANKS

IMDG - Chapter 6.7 6.7.2.2 - General requirements of design and construction 6.7.2.2.1

Was the carcass designed and built according to the requirements of a known pressure vessel regulation ?

As per ASME code, section VIII, div. 1. Descriptive Memorandum and calculation records. For a welded carcass, duly qualified welders were employed and tests were conducted to check the welding quality ?

Welders Qualification Certificates, and liquid penetrant inspection conducted ? Do the building process or material require the carcass to be thermally treated to

ensure adequate toughness of the welding and heat-affected areas ? Is that addressed in the Descriptive Memorandum ? If affirmative, was it done ? In a fine-grain steel used to build the tank ? Copy of the steel quality certificate available ? If affirmative, is the yield strength below 460 N/mm2 and the upper limit of tension

strength below 725 N/mm2? Is aluminum used as building material ? If affirmative, have the recommendations provided been followed ?

6.7.2.2.2 and 6.7.2.2.3

Are the carcass, accessories, piping and gaskets made of materials resistant to attack by the substances carried ?

Was the tank designed for transportation of substances not aggressive to the steel used ? 6.7.2.2.4 and 6.7.2.2.5

Was the carcass built with lining ? Is that Is that shown in the Descriptive Memorandum ?

If affirmative, have the recommendations provided been followed ? 6.7.2.2.6

Was the tank built with different materials in contact ? And in the carcass’s attachment to the frame, and the flange's attachment to the outlet pipe ? Is that stated in the Descriptive Memorandum ? If affirmative, were measures taken to prevent damage from galvanic action ?

Which ones ? Is that shown in the Descriptive Memorandum ?

ANNEX 2-E.


6.7.2.2.9 Was the tank designed to withstand the pressure and loading provided in this item ? Check the existence of calculation records duly signed by

the calculist or Responsible Technician. 6.7.2.2.10 and 6.7.2.2.11

Is the carcass equipped with a vacuum relieve device ? If affirmative or negative, have the recommendations provided been followed ? Is that shown in the Descriptive Memorandum and calculation record ?

6.7.2.2.12 and 6.7.2.2.13 Do the tank and its fasteners absorb their related static forces separately applied,

when loaded with the maximum permitted load ? Check the test results.

6.7.2.2.15 Is the tank electrically grounded ?

6.7.2.3 - Design criteria

6.7.2.3.2 Was the carcass designed and built to withstand a testing hydraulic pressure

above 1.5 times the design pressure ? Consider the test pressure, design pressure and MAWP. Check the hydrostatic

test result and the Descriptive Memorandum.

6.7.2.3.3.1 For the steel used to build the tank, were the minimum values specified in

compliance with national or international standards for the yield strength Re and for the minimum tension strength Rm adopted ?

Are the values in accordance with the ASTM standard and the steel supplier's quality certificate ?

6.7.2.3.3.2 Is the ratio Re/Rm of the steel used to build the carcass below 0.85 ? Is that in accordance with the supplier's quality certificate ?

6.7.2.3.3.3 Does the steel used to build the carcass have a % elongation above 10.000/RM,

with a minimum of 16% for fine-grain steels and 20% for all remaining steels ? Is that in accordance with the supplier's quality certificate ?

6.7.2.4 - Minimum thickness

6.7.2.4.1 Was the carcass’s minimum thickness determined based on the greatest

thickness calculated as specified below ?

ANNEX 2-E.


a) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the requirements of 6.7.2.4.2 through 6.7.2.4.10;

b) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with approved pressure vessel regulations including the requirements in 6.7.2.3; and

c) The minimum thickness specified in the applicable instructions for portable tanks, contained in 4.2.4.2.6, or in a special provision for tanks indicated in column 13 of the dangerous goods list.

Does the carcass have additional damage protection, the test pressure correctly calculated and a diameter of up to 1.80 m (6.7.2.4.3) ? Does the formula prescribed in 6.7.2.4.6 for equivalence of the reference steel has its application in the calculation records ? Was the minimum thickness of 3 mm used for construction to meet 6.7.2.4.4? 6.7.2.4.4

Independently of the steel used, was a minimum thickness of 3 mm considered to build the tank's carcass (cylindrical parts, extremities/caps, and manhole covers) ?

Was the plate thickness checked at not less than two points of the body, cover and bottom ?

6.7.2.5 - Service equipment (loading, unloading, ventilation, safety, heating, cooling, thermal insulation and measuring instruments) 6.7.2.5.1

Is the unloading device protected from the risk of being wrenched or damaged during the transportation or handling ?

Are the loading and unloading devices protected from inadvertent opening ? 6.7.2.5.2

Do the case openings for loading or unloading have manually operated closings fitted the nearest possible to the carcass ? Are they shown in the drawing provided ? 6.7.2.5.3

Is there a manhole of adequate size to enable inside inspection of the tank ? 6.7.2.5.5

Do the connections show visible marks indicating their respective functions ?

6.7.2.5.6

Were the shutting valves designed and built for a calculated pressure not below the carcass’s maximum admissible working pressure ?

Manufacturer’s certification available ? Or calculation record ? Are the position (opened or closed) and the closing direction clearly indicated ?

ANNEX 2-E.


Are the shutting valves with threaded stem closed by turning the wheel clockwise ?

6.7.2.6 - Bottom openings 6.7.2.6.3

Does the bottom discharge orifice have, except in the case of tanks that carry solid, crystallizing or high-viscosity substances, three shutting devices installed in series

and mutually independent as specified ?

Reported in the Descriptive Memorandum (butterfly/ball valves and cap) ?

6.7.2.7 - Safety device 6.7.2.7.1

Is the tank fitted with at least one pressure relief device ? Shown in the Descriptive Memorandum and drawings ?

6.7.2.8 - Pressure relief device 6.7.2.8.1

Is the tank's capacity above 1,900 liters ? If affirmative, has it one or more pressure relief valves, spring-type and with

enough capacity to prevent the carcass’s rupturing by excessive pressurization or vacuum

caused by the loading, unloading or content heating ?

Besides visual inspection, see the Descriptive Memorandum and calculation

record. Are they according to 6.7.2.2.10 ?

6.7.2.8.2 Were the pressure relief devices designed to prevent admission of foreign bodies,

liquid leaking and building of dangerous overpressure ? Is that clearly stated in the Descriptive Memorandum and calculation record ?

ANNEX 2-E.


6.7.2.8.3 Do these item's provisions require installation of a frangible disc preceding a

spring-type pressure relief device ? Is the pressure relief valve material compatible with the cargo ? Is that addressed

in the Descriptive Memorandum ? If affirmative, was a pressure gauge or adequate indicating instrument installed

between the frangible disc and the spring-type pressure relief device to detect the rupture of the disc, a perforation or leaking capable of causing a system malfunction ?

Was the frangible disc designed to burst at a nominal pressure 10% above that triggering the relief device ? Where is that clearly mentioned ?

6.7.2.8.4 If the tank's capacity is below 1900 liters, is it fitted with a spring-type pressure

relief device or a frangible disc as required in this item ?

6.7.2.8.5 Is the carcass equipped for discharging any overpressure? If affirmative, is the supply line provided with an adequate pressure relief device

calibrated to operate at a pressure not above the maximum admissible working pressure, and a shutting valve installed near the carcass?

6.7.2.9 - Pressure relief device calibration 6.7.2.9.1 and 6.7.2.9.2

Is the required pressure relief device adjusted to start discharging, and later close, according to the pressure data provided in this item? Is this adjustment compatible with the design pressure or MAWP, and contained in the Descriptive Memorandum and calculation records?

6.7.2.10 - Fusible elements 6.7.2.10.1

Is it necessary to install fusible elements on the tank? If affirmative, are they designed to meet the temperature and pressure data set forth in this item?

ANNEX 2-E.


6.7.2.11 - Frangible discs

6.7.2.11.1 Is it necessary to install frangible discs on the tank? If affirmative, are they designed to burst at a nominal pressure equal to the test

pressure corresponding to the design temperature range?

6.7.2.12 - Pressure relief device capacity

6.7.2.12.1 Does the spring-type pressure relief device have a transverse flow section at least

equivalent to an orifice of 31.75 mm diameter? Shown in the Descriptive Memorandum and drawing?

Does the vacuum relief device, when used, have a transverse flow section of at

least 284 mm²?

Is the transverse section area shown in the Descriptive Memorandum and drawing?

6.7.2.12.2 Was the total capacity of relief devices, considered as the sum of individual

capacities of the several devices, determined through the formula provided for in 6.7.2.12.2.1 or in the table of 6.7.2.12.2.3?

Calculation record available?

6.7.2.13 - Pressure relief device marking

6.7.2.13.1 Are the data mentioned below indicated on all pressure relief devices, when

applicable ? a) Pressure (in bar or KPa) or temperature (in ºC) it is adjusted to discharge at;

b) The admissible tolerance of discharge pressure for a spring-type device;

c) The reference temperature corresponding to the calculated pressure, forfrangible discs;

d) The admissible tolerance of temperature for fusible elements;

e) The device's nominal air-flow capacity in m³/s; and

f) When applicable, manufacturer's name and number of the relevant catalog.

ANNEX 2-E.


6.7.2.13.2 Was the nominal flow capacity marked on the pressure relief devices determined

in accordance with ISO 4126-1: 1996 ? Calculation record available ?

6.7.2.14 - Pressure relief device connections 6.7.2.14.1

If the tank has connections at the pressure relief devices, are they of sufficient dimensions to enable the necessary discharge passing without restrictions to the safety device ?

If there is a shutting valve between the carcass and pressure relief devices, does it meet the restrictions provided for in this item?

6.7.2.15 - Pressure relief device location 6.7.2.15.1

Are the inlets of pressure relief devices located at the casing's top and, when possible, in a position near its longitudinal and transverse center?

6.7.2.16 - Measuring instruments 6.7.2.16.1

Is the tank loaded by weight? If negative, is it fitted with one or more measuring devices made of resistant

materials, especially if positioned in direct contact with the carcass’s contents?

6.7.2.17 - Supports, frames and devices for lifting and fastening portable tanks

6.7.2.17.2 Do the combined stresses caused by the supports (berths, frames, etc.) and

lifting and fastening accessories of the tank induce excessive stresses in any part of the

carcass ?

Is there a finite element calculation record?

ANNEX 2-E.


Is the tank equipped with permanent accessories for lifting and fastening, and are they attached to tank supports or carcass reinforcement plates in supporting points? Is that clear in the drawings?

. 6.7.2.17.4

Do the tank’s characteristics described in this item indicate the need for closing the forklifting recesses?

Is the tank one of single compartment, less than 3.65m long and well protected from the impact of forklift blades? 6.7.2.17.5

Are the casing and service equipment protected against damage caused by lateral or longitudinal impact, and toppling?

Are the external accessories protected against loss of the casing's contents due to impact or toppling?

6.7.2.20 - Marking 6.7.2.20.1, 6.7.2.20.2 and 6.7.2.20.3 IMO - International Maritime Organization

Does the tank have an approval plate as specified in IMO circular MSC/860 of 5/22/1998?

ANNEX 2-F

- 2-F-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 6

STATEMENT OF ACCORDANCE

Legal Name: CNPJ: Address: City / State / CEP:

I, ...................(Name and Function)...................., declare to be in accordance with the Maritime Authority Standards - NORMAM-05/DPC and in particular the regulations on refurbished packaging contained in paragraph 0206 b) III, promising to follow them in all their terms.

(Place and Date)

Signature of the Legal Representative

ANNEX 3-A



(Name, address, CGC), hereby requests the granting of an Approval Certificate of (MATERIAL / functioning Authorization of Maintenance Station for Inflatable Life-Saving Appliances), in compliance with the Maritime Authority Standards for Material, declaring to know them and promising to comply with all their terms.


_____________________ , on _____ / _________________ / ________ . Place

Annexes:

A) Copy of the Articles of Incorporation; and

B) Applicable technical documents


(For material approval only):

AUTHORIZATION

I hereby authorize the DPC to collect samples of material related to the present application, after its approval, in stores or other distribution centers, for inspection and control in compliance with the provisions of paragraph 0115 b) of NORMAM 05/DPC.


ANNEX 3-AA

- 3-AA-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

CANCELLED

ANNEX 3-B

- 3-B-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

APPROVAL No. XXX/XXXX

REPÚBLICA FEDERATIVA DO BRASIL (FEDERATIVE REPUBLIC OF BRAZIL)

MARINHA DO BRASIL (BRAZILIAN NAVY)

DIRETORIA DE PORTOS E COSTAS (DIRECTORATE OF PORTS AND COASTS)

CERTIFICADO DE HOMOLOGAÇÃO (APPROVAL CERTIFICATE)

1) PROTÓTIPO DO PRODUTO (SPECIMEN EXAMINED):

2) MODELO (MODEL):

3) FABRICADO POR (MANUFACTURED BY):

4) ENDEREÇO (ADDRESS):

5) NORMAS APLICÁVEIS (APPLICABLE STANDARDS):

6) PROPÓSITO OU USO (ACCEPTABLE FOR THE PURPOSE OF):

7) DESENHO E RELATÓRIO DE TESTES (DRAWING AND TEST REPORT):

8) DATA DE EMISSÃO (DATE OF ISSUE): 9) VALIDADE (VALIDITY):

NOTA (NOTE): O PROTÓTIPO É CONSIDERADO SATISFATÓRIO ENQUANTO FABRICADO EM CONFORMIDADE COM ALEGISLAÇÃO ESPECIFICADA NO ITEM 5 E A DOCUMENTAÇÃO DO ITEM 7, E ARQUIVADA NESTA DIRETORIA. ESTE CERTIFICADO NÃO É VÁLIDO PARA O PROTÓTIPO QUE VENHA A SOFRER ALTERAÇÕES OU MODIFICAÇÕES EM RELAÇÃO AO QUE FOI TESTADO (THE SPECIMEN IS ACCEPTABLE IF MANUFACTURED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF ITEM 5 AND DRAWING/TEST REPORT OF ITEM 7, FILED IN THIS DIRECTORATE. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT APPLY TO EQUIPMENT WHICH HAS BEEN ALTERED OR MODIFIED FROM THE SPECIMEN TESTED).

NAME RANK

Superintendente da Segurança do Tráfego Aquaviário (Superintendent of Waterways Traffic Safety)

ANNEX 3-BB

-3-BB-1- NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

MANUFACTURER: ______________________________________________________ BUOYANT APPARATUS TYPE: _________ NUMBER OF SAMPLES: ______________

MODEL: ________________________ DRAWING No.: _______________

PRESSURE TEST

This pressure test is intended for inflatable buoyant apparatuses and shall be applied to the sample.

The apparatus' relief valves shall be made inoperable, and the filling shall be effected slowly (over 1 minute) through a source of compressed air, until reaching a pressure twice the normal working pressure.

Upon reaching the established pressure, the compressed air source shall be isolated and removed. The apparatus shall then stay in this situation for a period of 60 minutes.

Normal filling pressure: Test pressure (measured by pressure gauge): Filling start: hr min. Filling end: hr min.

End of the pressure exposure period: hr min. Exposure period end-pressure: Pressure percent drop: Defects found (displacement, cracks, holes, etc.): yes / no

For approval in this assessment, the samples shall not present a pressure drop over 5% of the initial test pressure, and shall not present any signs of detachment, cracks, holes or other damage.

Note:

Testing place:

Date: / /

Test result:

EXAMINER'S NAME, RANK, GRADUATION AND/OR FUNCTION

Annexes: - photographs - other test records

ANNEX 3-C

-3-C-1 - NORMAM-05/DPC

ANNEX 3-C


ANNEX 3-CC

- 3-CC-1 NORMAM-05/DPC

LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: ____________________________________ TYPE: ___________________________ MODEL: ________________________ NUMBER OF SAMPLES: ____________ DRAWING No.: __________________

STABILITY AND FREEBOARD TEST

For this test, the buoyant apparatus shall be placed normally waterborne. If the

apparatus is of the inflatable type, its filling must have been made by the automatic device as it was launched into the water in a real situation.

1) Testing of buoyant apparatuses

a) With the apparatus floating, steel pieces with 14.5 kg each shall be attached in equal number to the number of persons the equipment is intended to support, equally distributed along the lifeline.

In this situation, the buoyant apparatus shall not submerge and shall keep a freeboard of not less than 10% of its height (depth), measured in its normal floating position. The freeboard shall be recorded.

b) With the apparatus floating, steel pieces with 14.5 kg each shall be separately attached on one side, in equal number to the number of persons the equipment is intended to support on that side, equally distributed along the lifeline. The test shall be repeated on each of the unequal sides.

For example, if the apparatus is of rectangular shape, the weights shall be distributed along one of the longer sides in a number equal to that of the persons intended for that side only. Subsequently, the weights are removed and placed on one of the smaller sides, in number corresponding to the persons for that side.

In this situation, the buoyant apparatus shall not capsize and shall keep a freeboard on the tested side of not less than 10% of its height (depth), measured in its normal floating position. The freeboard shall be recorded.

The steel pieces specified for this test may be replaced by another material, since it has the same buoyancy value of the steel piece when submerged. 2) Cancelled

ANNEX 3-DD

- 3-DD-1 NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

MANUFACTURER: BUOYANT APPARATUS TYPE: __________ NUMBER OF SAMPLES: _______________

MODEL: _______________________ DRAWING No.: _________________

STRENGTH OF A BUOYANT APPARATUS’ FLOOR PLATFORM

a) Inflatable buoyant apparatus:

The buoyant apparatus shall be placed normally waterborne. Its filling must have been made by the automatic device as it was launched into the water in a real situation.

Weights totaling 1.5 times the total weight of persons the floor is designed to withstand

shall be placed directly on the platform, considering the weight per person as 75 kg. The time period for application of the test load shall be 120 minutes.

The test shall not cause any damage to the apparatus. b) Rigid buoyant apparatus

With the rigid buoyant apparatus laying on a flat, rigid floor, weights totaling 1.5 times the total weight of persons the platform is designed to withstand shall be placed directly on the platform, considering the weight per person as 75 kg. The time period for application of the test load shall be 120 minutes.

The test shall not cause any damage to the apparatus.

TEST RESULT: BUOYANT APPARATUS:

RIGID INFLATABLE

Damage found Damage found Functioning of the

automatic device SAMPLE yes / no yes / no yes / no

Note: _________________________________________________________________

Testing place: ______________________________________________ Date: __ / ______ /_ _____ Test result: __________________________________________________________



ANNEX 3-E.

TYPE OF LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: ______________________________________ MANUFACTURER: ______________________________________________________ CLASS: _____________ TYPE: __________ MODEL: _________________________

NUMBER OF SAMPLES: ______________ DRAWING No.: __________________

CONFORMITY W/ PROTOTYPE Sample

A Sample

B Sample

C Sample

D Sample

E Sample

F

1) Finishing*

2) Application of retro-reflective tape*

3) Labels with instructions*

4) Warning*

5) Color*

6) Dimensions**

7) Weight**

* Requirements evaluated as “Satisfactory” or “Not satisfactory”

** Requirements evaluated as “Conforming” or “Non-conforming”

The dimensional assessment will tolerate samples presenting errors of up to 2% in dimensions, and 5% in weight in relation to the dimensions and weight contained in the plans and drawings forwarded.

For approval in this assessment, all samples shall obtain a satisfactory result in the applicable requirements and be in conformity in the dimensional and weight exams.

Note: ________________________________________________________________

Place of the assessment: _________________________________________________

Date: ___ / ___ / ____ .

Assessment Result: _____________________________________________________


Annexes: (photographs) (other assessment records)

- 3-E-1 - NORMAM-05/DPC Mod 4

ANNEX 3-EE

- 3-EE-1 NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

MANUFACTURER: ____________________________________________________ BUOYANT APPARATUS TYPE: _________ NUMBER OF SAMPLES: ______________

MODEL: ______________________ DRAWING No.: ________________

BUOYANT APPARATUS FILLING TEST

1st PART: FILLING AT THE TEMPERATURE OF -1o C (Sample A) Conditioning at -1o C: beginning day

end: day hour hour

The filling time shall be measured between the moment when the device is triggered and the instant the safety valve begins actuating, relieving excess pressure.

For the apparatus submitted to conditioning at -1o C, the maximum filling time for approval shall be of 3 minutes. The conditioning duration is 24 hours. TEST RESULTS: 1) Filling time (up to 3 minutes) yes / no 2) Relief valve adequate operation yes / no 3) Absence of cracks yes / no 4) Absence of detachment or other defects yes / no

For approval in this assessment, the sample shall obtain an affirmative result in all requirements.

2nd PART: FILLING AT THE TEMPERATURE OF + 65o C (Sample B) Conditioning at + 65o C: beginning: day

end: day hour hour

The filling time shall be measured between the moment when the device is triggered and the instant the safety valve begins actuating, relieving excess pressure.

For the apparatus submitted to conditioning at + 65o C, the maximum filling time for approval shall be of 1 minute. The conditioning duration is 7 hours. TEST RESULTS: 1) Filling time (up to 3 minutes) yes / no 2) Relief valve adequate operation yes / no 3) Absence of cracks yes / no 4) Absence of detachment or other defects yes / no

For approval in this assessment, the sample shall obtain an affirmative result in all requirements.

Note:

ANNEX 3-EE

- 3-EE-2 NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

Testing place:

1st PART _____________________________________________________

2nd PART _____________________________________________________

Testing date:

1st PART _____________________________________________________

2nd PART _____________________________________________________

Test result: ________________________________


Annexes: - photographs - other assessment records

ANNEX 3-F


TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: ________________________ MANUFACTURER: ____________________________________________________ CLASS: ____________ TYPE: __________ MODEL: _______________________

NUMBER OF SAMPLES: ______________ DRAWING No.: ________________

TEMPERATURE-CYCLING TEST

1st CYCLE BEGIN END

PERIOD / TEMPERATURE DATE TIME DATE TIME 8 hours at + 65O C 8 hours at - 30O C (or at -1O C)

2nd CYCLE BEGIN END PERIOD / TEMPERATURE DATE TIME DATE TIME

8 hours at + 65O C 8 hours at - 30O C (or at -1O C)

3rd CYCLE BEGIN END PERIOD / TEMPERATURE DATE TIME DATE TIME


4th CYCLE BEGIN END PERIOD / TEMPERATURE DATE TIME DATE TIME












ANNEX 3-F




Specimen main dimensions: ______________ Specimens

1 2 3 4 5 6 yes / no yes / no yes / no yes / no yes / no yes / no

1) Specimen's loss of rigidity 2) Cracks found 3) Change in dimensions 4) External disaggregation / deterioration.

5) Internal disaggregation / deterioration.

1 - Select the specimens, preferably identical; measure and record their dimensions. For testing materials intended for the buoyancy of lifejackets, eight specimens (300mm2 with lifejacket full thickness) shall be collected, of which two will serve for comparison with the specimens which will be submitted to the tests.

2 - Apply the alternate temperature cycles on two lifejacket and lifebuoy specimens and six specimens of buoyancy material.

3 - For the material or life-saving appliance to be approved in this assessment, all specimens shall obtain a "negative" result in all questions placed.

4 - The specimens shall be removed from the temperature chamber after the 8-hour essay, in the same day, and kept at ambient temperature (resting) until the following day for ending the cycle, and then restart at the same time as in the previous day.

5) The temperature-cycling test shall be conducted uninterruptedly.

Note: ________________________________________________________________

Testing place: ____________________________________________________________

Date: ___ / ___ / _____

Test result: _______________________________________________________________


Annexes: - photographs

- other assessment records

ANNEX 3-FF

- 3-FF-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: ___________________________________________

MANUFACTURER: ___________________________

TYPE: ______________

MODEL: _____ NUMBER OF SAMPLES: _________ DRAWING No.: _______

TESTS FOR APPROVAL OF A LAUNCHING APPLIANCE FOR SURVIVAL AND RESCUE CRAFT

a) Prototype tests 1) Factory tests 1-1) General conditions 1-1-1) The spreadsheets for recording test results shall be previously approved by the Directorate of Ports and Coasts. 1-1-2) The main falls shall be installed in a way that represents the real operation conditions. 1-1-3) All accessories shall be installed on the appliance. 1-1-4) In the case of removable accessories, their testing may be accepted in separate if the test condition is simulated. 1-1-5) The weights used for testing shall be modified, and the load application time shall be not less than 2 minutes. 1-1-6) For each test prescribed, the manufacturer shall present a procedure with drawings indicating how the launching appliance and its accessories will be installed in the factory, always reproducing the utilization and operation conditions on board. 1-1-7) A dimensional inspection shall be conducted for comparison of the prototype dimensions with approved drawings. 1-2) Arm testing

The arm shall be so installed and attached as on board. 1-2-1) The arms shall be submitted to a static load 2.2 times the working load.

The load shall be initially applied in the vertical plan, i.e., considering 00 list and 00

trim, and subsequently moved as below: First essay: trim 100 aft - list 00

Second essay: trim 100 fore - list 00

Third essay: trim 100 fore - list 200 Fourth essay: trim 100 fore - list 200 to inboard.

Fifth essay: trim 100 aft - list 200 . Sixth essay: trim 100 aft - list 200 to inboard.

1-2-2) Approval conditions The deflection shall be measured in all cases, and permanent deformation shall not

occur. The dimensions shall be checked before and after the loads are applied. 1-2-3) Test specimen checking

initial reading (mm) ----------------------------------------------------------------- final reading (mm) -----------------------------------------------------------------

1-2-4) Test result: Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( )

ANNEX 3-FF


1-2-5) Functioning test The arms shall be installed and attached representing the appliance installation on

board. 1-2-6) Test description:

A load of 1.1 times the working load on the arms shall be lifted by them . With the arms in the stowage position, they shall be moved from the stowage position to the full outboard position by the means used on board.

This test shall be repeated with 200 list to inboard and 10 0 trim fore or aft. Both tests shall be repeated with a load equivalent to the light loaded craft. Bearing a load equivalent to the maximum lifting load, i.e., the light-loaded craft's

weight plus the full complement of persons and in the vertical position, the arm shall be moved from the full outboard position to the stowage position. 1-2-7) Approval conditions

The davit arms shall not show permanent deformation and shall work normally. 1-2-8) Test result:

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 1-3) Accessories' test 1-3-1) Test description:

All the elements involved in the craft's sustaining system shall be submitted to a load 2.2 times the working load (minimum 2 minutes). 1-3-2) Approval conditions

The deflection shall be measured in all cases, and permanent deformation shall not occur: the dimension measurement readings before and after loading shall be compared with each other. The measures shall then be compared with the readings made with the load applied. 1-3-3) Test specimen checking

initial reading (mm) final reading (mm)


1-4) Winch test 1-4) Winch static test 1-4-1-1) A load 2.2 times the working load shall be applied to the winch, but not to the brakes, for 2 minutes. After removing the load, the winch shall be examined internally. 1-4-1-2) Approval conditions

After removal of the load, no evidence of deformation or damage to the winch's elements shall be found. 1-4-2) Brake static test 1-4-2-1) A static load 1.5 times the winch's working load shall be applied for 2 minutes, and subsequently, the load shall be softly lowered for a length equivalent of not less than one turn of the drum.

The test shall be conducted considering the load as applied at the position corresponding to the drum's last cable layer. 1-4-2-2) Approval conditions

ANNEX 3-FF


The static brake shall not allow lowering the load when applied. After removal of the load, no evidence of deformation or damage to the winch's elements shall be found, including the brake. 1-4-2-3) Test result

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 1-4-3) Dynamic test 1-4-3-1) Conducted with a load 1.1 times the winch's working load. The load shall be lowered and stopped at intervals of not less than 3 meters. The total distance traveled shall be not less than 150 meters. The normal operation speed of the equipment shall be used, taken necessarily from the manufacturer's manual. Note: a minimum of 20 stops shall be effected. 1-4-3-2) Approval conditions

Upon each break application, the distance traveled by the load shall not be more that 1 meter. The thickness of the brake pads shall be measured before and after the test. The lifespan provided in the manufacturer's manual for the brake elements shall be observed. The equipment shall not show any damage after totally disassembled for inspection. The brakes may be checked during the test, at the inspector's discretion. 1-4-3-3) Test specimen checking

Dynamic and static brakes shall work when actuated. After removal of the load, no evidence of deformation or damage to all winch elements shall be found. 1-4-3-4) Test result

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 1-4-4) Speed test 1-4-4-1) Test description

Three lowering and lifting cycles shall be conducted with a load of 1.1 times the winch's working load, and three lowering and lifting cycles with a load equivalent to the light-loaded craft. Consider for testing the minimum course of thirty meters.

The measured speeds, motor performance and the correct winding of cables on their respective drums shall be recorded. Note: for the lifting of a rescue craft, consider the loaded-craft weight. 1-4-4-2) Approval conditions

The lowering speed shall be not more than that calculated as prescribed in sub-item 0333 b) 8), with an upper limit of 1 m/s.

For a lifeboat, the lifting speed shall be not less than 0.3 m/s. 1-4-4-3) Test specimen checking LOWERING LIFTING 1 2 3 1 2 3 Installation height (H)

Lowering height (L)

Lowering time (T1)

Lifting time (T 2)

V1 = L/T = lowering speed V2 = L/T =lifting speed Where L is given in meters , T1 and T2 in seconds and V1 and V2 in m/s 1-4-4-4) Test result

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( )

ANNEX 3-FF


1-4-5) Manual operation test 1-4-5-1) Test description

The winch's manual operation shall be demonstrated applying a load equivalent to the craft with its full complement. 1-4-5-2) Approval conditions

The manual-drive by handle for retrieving the craft shall be easily made by two persons weighing around 750N (75 kg ) each. It shall also be demonstrated that the craft can be transferred from the full outboard position to the stowage position. 1-4-5-3) Test result

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 2-1) Visual inspection

A visual inspection shall be conducted on the davit-craft set, to check if the installation was made in accordance with the approved plans and manuals. Check the existence of interferences in the system. 2-1-1) Test specimen checking

The performance of the davit-craft set shall be assessed in accordance with the drawings and operation manuals presented by the manufacturer for each equipment. 2-1-1-1) Test result

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 2-2) Testing of the lowering operation, boat release and lifting

The product's factory test spreadsheet shall be followed, according to the sub-items below: 2-2-1) Winch's dynamic test

See sub-item 1-4-3 2-2-1-1) Test result

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 2-2-2) Winch's dynamic test


Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 2-2-3) Winch's manual operation test


Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 2-2-4) Test of lowering operation, boat release at the sea and lifting in accordance with the operation manuals of the appliance and the boat, using all the operation and release procedures. b) Testing of the serially manufactured product 1) Factory tests 1-1) General conditions 1-1-1) According to item 0333 h), the Classification Societies will follow-up the testing of

serial products as prescribed in these instructions. 1-1-2) A dimensional inspection shall be made for comparison of the serial product with the approved drawings and descriptive memorandum. 1-1-3) The factory tests shall always reproduce the conditions of use on board. 1-2) Arm testing

ANNEX 3-FF


The arms shall be installed and attached representing the appliance installation on board. 1-2-1) Test description:

The arms shall be submitted to a static load 2.2 times the working load, applied in the condition of 10º trim (aft or fore) and 20º list outboard (or the list prescribed in 4-1-1). 1-2-2) Approval conditions

The deflection shall be measured in all cases, and permanent deformation shall not occur: the dimension readings before and after loading shall be compared with each other. 1-2-3) Test specimen checking

Initial reading (mm) Final reading (mm)


1-3) Accessories test: 1-3-1) Test description:

All the elements involved in the craft's sustaining system shall be submitted to a static load 2.2 times the working load. 1-3-2) Approval conditions

The deflection shall be measured in all cases, and permanent deformation shall not occur. The dimensions shall be checked before and after the load is applied. 1-3-3) Test specimen checking

Initial reading (mm) Final reading (mm)


1-4) Winch test 1-4-1) Static test 1-4-1-1) Test description

A static load shall be applied on the winch, of 1.5 times its working load, for two minutes. Lower the load softly for a course equivalent to not less than one turn of the drum. The test shall be conducted considering the load as applied at the position corresponding to the drum's last cable layer. 1-4-2-2) Approval conditions

The static brake shall operate when actuated and shall not allow the load to slip. After removal of the load, no evidence of deformation or damage to the winch's elements shall be found. 1-4-2-3) Test result

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 1-4-3) Dynamic test 1-4-3-1) Test description

Conducted with a load 1.1 times the winch's working load. The load shall be lowered and stopped at intervals of not less than three meters. A minimum of six stops shall be effected. 1-4-3-2) Approval conditions

Upon each break application, the distance traveled by the load shall not be more that 1 meter. The thickness of the brake pads shall be measured before and after the test. The lifespan provided in the manufacturer's maintenance manual for the brake elements shall be observed. The equipment shall not present any

ANNEX 3-FF


damage when disassembled for inspection. The brakes may be checked during the test, at the inspector's discretion. 1-4-3-3) Test specimen checking

Dynamic and static brakes shall work when actuated. After removal of the load, no evidence of deformation or damage shall be found. 1-4-3-4) Test result

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 1-4-4) Speed test

See sub-item 1-4-4 of item a). 1-4-5) Manual operation test

See sub-item 1-4-5 of item a). 2) Testing on board 2-1) Visual inspection

A visual inspection shall be conducted on the davit-craft set, to check if the installation was made in accordance with the approved plans and manuals. Check the existence of interference in the system. 2-1-1) Approval conditions

The set shall have the same characteristics and components in conformity with the factory-tested prototype. 2-1-2) Test specimen checking

The performance of the davit-craft set shall be assessed in accordance with the operation manuals presented by the manufacturer of each equipment. 2-1-3) Test result:

Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 2-2) Testing of the lowering operation, boat release and lifting

The product's factory test spreadsheet shall be followed, according to the sub-items below: 2-2-1) Dynamic test


Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( ) 2-2-2) Speed test

See sub-item 1-4-4 2-2-3) Manual operation test


Satisfactory Yes ( ) No ( )

ANNEX 3-G

- 3-G-1- NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: ______________________ MANUFACTURER: __________________________________________________ CLASS: ____________ TYPE: _________ MODEL: ______________________

NUMBER OF SAMPLES: ____________ DRAWING No.: ________________

OIL RESISTANCE TEST

Immersion start: day hour

Immersion end: day hour

Test results: Sample

1 2 3 4 5 6 yes / no yes / no yes / no yes / no yes / no yes / no

1) Specimen's loss of rigidity 2) Cracks found 3) Change in dimensions 4) External disaggregation / deterioration

5) Internal disaggregation / deterioration.

INSTRUCTIONS:

1 - Submerge the specimens in diesel oil, so they remain covered by an oil layer 100 mm high.

2 - Keep this immersion continually for 24 hours at ambient temperature.

3 - For approval, the specimen shall obtain a negative result in all questions. Use one specimen for lifejacket and lifebuoy, and six specimens for buoyancy material.

Note: ________________________________________________________________

Testing place: ___________________________________________________________

Date: ___ / ___ / _____

Test result: _____________________________________________________________


Annexes: - photographs - other assessment records.

ANNEX 3-GG

- 3-GG-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

STATEMENT OF CONFORMITY WITH THE PROTOTYPE (CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY)

LAUNCHING APPLIANCE

STATEMENT

No.

I hereby declare that the launching appliance specified below is in conformity with its prototype approved by the Directorate of Ports and Coasts through the certificate No.

___________, issued on .

MANUFACTURER: ___________________________________________

TYPE AND MODEL: __________________________________________

IDENTIFICATION: ____________________________________________ MANUFACTURING DATE: _____________________________________

(PLACE AND DATE)

SIGNATURE

ANNEX 3-H

- 3-H-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: ________________________ MANUFACTURER: ____________________________________________________ CLASS: ___________ TYPE: _________ MODEL: _______________________

NUMBER OF SAMPLES: ______________ DRAWING No.: _________________

WATER ABSORTION TEST OF THE LIFEJACKET'S BUOYANCY MATERIAL

Immersion start: day

Immersion end: day hour hour

INSTRUCTIONS:

1 - Submerge two specimens already submitted to the temperature cycling and oil resistance tests, and two other submitted to the temperature cycling test, into a tank 1.25 m high full of fresh water.

2 - At the end of the first 24 hours of immersion, check the mass in kilograms each specimen can withstand without sinking in the water.

3 - At the end of the seventh immersion day, check the mass in kilograms each specimen can withstand without sinking in the water and check for signs of the specimen's deterioration.

For checking the mass each specimen can withstand, the following device may be used:

Note: a) Make a dynamometer reading 24 hours after the specimen's immersion start, and repeat the reading upon completion of the seventh immersion day.

b) Calculate the buoyancy reduction using the formula below: buoyancy reduction = (result of 1st reading - result of 2nd reading) x 100

result of 1st reading

ANNEX 3-H

- 3-H-2 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

c) The DPC may accept other devices for this checking, provided they are submitted for its approval at least five working days prior to the testing start.

TEST RESULTS:

SPECIMEN

3 SPECIMEN4

SPECIMEN 5

SPECIMEN6

yes / no yes / no yes / no yes / no

1) Specimen's loss of rigidity

2) Cracks found

3) Change in dimensions(shrinking or enlargement)

4) Disaggregation / deterioration

5) Change in mechanical properties (visual external assessment)

6) Specimens' buoyancy reduction % % %

%

After the essay, the maximum admissible buoyancy reduction of the specimens previously subjected to the tests of temperature cycling and oil resistance is of 16%.

The maximum admissible buoyancy reduction of the remaining specimens is of 10%. For approval in this assessment, the material shall obtain results within the buoyancy reduction limits given above, as well as negative results in all remaining questions.

Note: ________________________________________________________________

Testing place: ____________________________________

Date: _____ / _____ / _________ .

Test result: _______________________________________


Annexes: - photographs - other records

ANNEX 3-HH

- 3-HH-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TESTING OF INBOARD ENGINES FOR SURVIVAL AND RESCUE CRAFT

ASSESSMENT AND TEST REPORT

MANUFACTURER

ENGINE MODEL

SERIAL NUMBER

FUEL TYPE

DESIGN POWER (Kw)

PROPELLER DIAMETER AND PITCH

GEAR BOX MODEL

BATTERY CAPACITY

START-UP MEANS

DATE

PLACE

EXPERT SURVEYOR'S NAME AND SIGNATURE

CERTIFICATION ENTITY

ANNEX 3-HH


INBOARD ENGINE

MANUFACTURER DATE: TIME

EXPERT SURVEYOR:

CERTIFICATION ENTITY:

MODEL

SERIAL NUMBER

4.3.2.1 DRAWINGS PRESENTED, REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

DRAWINGS PRESENTED AND DOCUMENTS STATUS

DRAWING NUMBER REVISION AND DATE DRAWING TITLE

REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS PRESENTED STATUS

No. OF REPORT/DOC. REVISION AND DATE REPORT/DOC. TITLE

MAINTENANCE MANUAL OPERATION MANUAL

ANNEX 3-HH


4.3.2.3 COLD START TEST REGULATION: LSA 4.4.6.2; MSC 81(70) 1/6.10.2 - 6.10.4

Testing Procedure Acceptance Criterion Test relevant data

For testing, the engine shall be removed from the boat together with its accessories and gear box which will be used on the boat. The engine, together with its fuel, cooling liquid, start-up sources and any other start-up means shall be placed in a cooling chamber at -15oC. The temperatures of the fuel, lube oil and cooling liquid (if existing) shall be measured at the test's beginning and shall not be above -15oC. Samples of each fluid at that temperature shall be collected in recipients for observation. The engine shall be started three times.

In the first two times, the engine shall run until all its components

reach stable temperatures. After the third start, the engine shall run for at least 10 minutes and during this period the gear box shall be operated in all its gearing positions.

The engine shall be provided with either a manual starting system or a

power starting system with two independent rechargeable energy

sources. The engine starting systems and the starting means shall be capable of making the engine run at ambient temperature of -15 C in two minutes from the beginning of the start-up procedure, unless a different temperature may be considered in the opinion of the Maritime Authority, taking into consideration the voyages in which the ship/platform carrying the boat is constantly engaged.

Start-up source:

Start-up means used:

Measured temperatures: o

Chamber: ______ C Fuel: oC Lube oil: oC Cooling liquid: ______ oC Number of starts: _______ times Duration of first start: ____ min Duration of second start: ___ min Duration of last start: ______min

Start-up battery capacity:

Was the temperature limit modified by the Maritime Authority ?

Approved/Failed

Notes:

INBOARD ENGINE


EXPERT SURVEYOR:


MODEL

SERIAL NUMBER

o

ANNEX 3-HH


INBOARD ENGINE


EXPERT SURVEYOR:


MODEL

SERIAL NUMBER

4.3.2.4 Test with engine out of the water REGULATION: LSA 4.4.6.3; MSC 81(70) 1/6.10.2 - 6.10.5


The engine shall run at its minimum speed for at least 5 minutes, in the

stowed condition.

The engine shall be capable of running for at least 5 minutes out of the water,

after starting up with the boat out of the water.

The engine shall not present damage after the test.

Boat positioned at its normal stowage place? Local temperature: _______ oC Duration: ____ min Any damage after the test? Approved/Failed Notes:

4.3.2.5 Test with engine in the water REGULATION: LSA 4.4.6.4; MSC 81(70) 1/6.10.2 - 6.10.6


The engine shall run for at least 5

minutes immersed in water up to the level of the crankshaft’s centerline,

with the engine in the horizontal position.

The engine shall be capable of running with the boat flooded up to

the crankshaft’s centerline. The engine shall not present damage after the test.

Engine flooded up to the centerline of the crankshaft? Yes / No Duration: ____ min Any damage after the test ? Approved / Failed Engine oil condition ? Approved/Failed Notes:

ANNEX 3-HH


INBOARD ENGINE


EXPERT SURVEYOR:


MODEL

SERIAL No.

4.3.2.4 Engine inversion test REGULATION: LSA 4.6.4.2; MSC 81(70) 1/6.14.6 - 6.14.8


The engine and its fuel tank shall be mounted on a frame allowing their rotation about an axis equivalent to

the boat's longitudinal axis. A pan shall be located under

the engine to collect any oil which may leak form the engine, so that the quantity of such oil can be measured.

The following procedure shall be adopted during this test: .1 start the engine and run it at full speed for 5 minutes; .2 stop the engine and rotate it in a clockwise direction through 360o; .3 restart the engine and run it at full speed for 10 minutes; .4 stop the engine and rotate it in a counter-clockwise direction through 360o; .5 restart the engine, run it at full speed for 10 minutes and then stop the engine;

The engine and its installation shall be capable of running in any position during capsize and continue to run after the lifeboat returns to the upright, or shall automatically stop upon capsizing and be easily restarted after the lifeboat returns to the upright position.

The design of the fuel and lubricating system shall prevent the loss of fuel and the loss of more than 250 ml of lubricating oil from the engine during capsize. During these tests, the engine should notoverheat, fail to operate, or leak more than 250 ml of lube oil during any one inversion. When examined after being disassembled, the engine shall show no evidence of overheating or excessive wear.

Were all tests conducted according to the procedures provided? Approved ____________ Failed _______________ Did the engine stop when rotated in any direction? Approved ___________ Failed ______________ If stopped, was it easily restarted? Approved ___________ Failed _____________ Did the engine meet all requirements after the tests were conducted following the procedures? Approved ___________ Failed ______________ Lube oil lost by the engine at each revolution: 2: ml 4: ml

ANNEX 3-HH


.6 allow the engine to cool;

.7 restart the engine and run it at full speed for 5 minutes; .8 rotate the running engine in a clockwise direction through 180o, hold at this position for 10 seconds and then rotate it 180o further in a clockwise direction to complete one revolution; .9 if the engine is arranged to stop automatically when inverted, restart it; .10 allow the engine to continue to run at full speed for 10 minutes; .11 shut the engine down and allow it to cool; .12 repeat the procedure of .7 through .11 above, except that the engine shall be turned in a counter-clockwise direction; .13 restart the engine and run it at full speed for 5 minutes; .14 rotate the engine in a clockwise direction through 180oand stop the engine. Rotate it 180o further to complete a full clockwise revolution; .15 restart the engine and run it at full speed for 10 minutes; .16 repeat the procedure of .14 above, turning the engine counter-clockwise; .17 restart the engine, run it at full speed for 10 minutes and then shut it down; and .18 disassemble the engine for examination.

8: ml 12: ml 14: ml 16: ml Total of lube oil lost from the engine: ml Evidence of overheating or excessive wear? Approved ____________ Failed _______________

Notes:

ANNEX 3-I

-3-I-1 NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: _________________________________ MANUFACTURER: ____________________________________________________________ CLASS: _____________ TYPE: ___________ MODEL: _______________________

NUMBER OF SAMPLES: _______________ DRAWING No.: _________________

BUOYANCY TEST

Immersion start: day Immersion end: day Test Results:

hour ______ hour ______

SPECIMENS

A B C D E F Buoyancy after 30-minute immersion

Buoyancy reduction

INSTRUCTIONS:

For this test, specimens A, B, C, D, E and F of lifejackets shall be submerged in fresh water at ambient temperature for 24 hours. The buoyancy of each specimen shall be measured before and immediately after the immersion period. For lifebuoy tests, specimens A and B will be necessary.

For checking the buoyancy reduction of the specimens, a device as shown below may be used:

FIG. 1 FIG. 2

FIGURE 1: - VEST-TYPE LIFEJACKET FIGURE 2: - YOKE-TYPE LIFEJACKET

ANNEX 3-I

Mod 4

Notes: a) Read the dynamometer 30 minutes after the immersion start and repeat the reading 24 hours after the first reading.

b) Calculate the buoyancy reduction using the formula below:

Buoyancy reduction = (result of 1st reading - result of 2nd reading) x 100 result of 1streading

c) The fabric and casings used in the lifejacket's manufacturing, if existing, shall be

punctured to release any trapped air, ensuring that the lifejacket's buoyancy is due solely to the solid material used to fill the jacket.

The result will be satisfactory if the lifejackets and lifebuoys submitted to the test:

a) Show a loss of buoyancy of not more than 5%. b) After the immersion period, present a buoyancy equivalent to the following

values: - “LARGE” size lifejackets 136N 13.6 kg - “MEDIUM” size lifejackets 70N 7.0 kg - “CHILD” size lifejackets 50N 5.0 kg - Working lifejackets 90N 9.0 kg

The buoys shall be put to float loaded with steel weights of 14.5 kg each. For approval in this assessment, the specimens shall demonstrate a freeboard greater than 20% of the depth value in the fully loaded condition.

SPECIMEN A SPECIMEN B Depth measure

Freeboard measure

Freeboard in percentage of the depth

Equipment bag:

The equipment bag shall be weighted, and then thrown into the water for 30 minutes. During this period, the bag shall not sink.

Notes: ___________________________________________________________

Testing place: _____________________________________________________

Date: ___ / ___ / ______

Test result: ________________________________________________________



-3-I-2 NORMAM-05/DPC

ANNEX 3-J

- 3-J-1 -NORMAM-05/DPC

Mod 4

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: _______________________ MANUFACTURER: ___________________________________________________ CLASS: ____________ TYPE: MODEL:


MECHANICAL STRENGTH TESTS 1) Lifejacket tests

Lifejacket waist strength test

For this test, the lifejackets marked with letters A and B shall be submerged in fresh water for two minutes, then removed from the water and closed as if a person was using them.

The test consists in applying a load forcing the lifejacket to open, as shown in figures 1 and 2, for a period of 30 minutes.

FIGURE 1 - VEST-TYPE LIFEJACKET

The loads and cylinder dimensions for this test are the following:

Large and medium size lifejackets: Fa = 3.200 N Diameter of cylinder: = 125 mm

Small size (children) lifejackets: Fa = 2400 N Diameter of cylinder: 50 mm = 50 mm Lifejackets class V, V SPECIAL and EAF: Fa = 1850 N (large and medium sizes) Diameter of cylinder: = 125 mm Lifejackets class V, V SPECIAL: Fa = 700 N (small size) Diameter of cylinder: = 50 mm

ANNEX 3-J

- 3-J-2 - NORMAM-05/DPC

Mod 4

Figure 4 - Yoke-type lifejacket

The lifejacket shall be approved if showing no damage or permanent deformation caused by the test.

Lifejacket shoulder strength test

As in the previous test, the lifejacket for this test shall be submerged in water for two minutes, and then removed and closed as if a person was wearing it. The test consists in applying a load to the lifejacket's shoulder or collar, as shown in figures 3 and 4, for a period of 30 minutes.

Figure 3 - Vest-type lifejacket

The cylinders used for this test shall be the same used in the lifejacket's body test. The loads to apply shall be the following:

Large and medium size lifejackets: Fa = 900N Small size (children) lifejackets: Fa = 700N The lifejacket shall be approved if showing no damage or permanent deformation caused by the test.

TEST SUMMARY

Lifejacket waist strength Immersion start: time ______ Immersion end: time ______ Tension start: time ______

ANNEX 3-J


Mod 4

Tension end: time ______

Tensioning of the lifejacket's body SPECIMEN A SPECIMEN B

Damage or permanent deformation found

yes / no yes / no

Lifejacket's shoulder strength Immersion start: time ______ Immersion end: time ______

Tension start: time ______ Tension end: time ______

Tensioning of the lifejacket's body SPECIMEN A SPECIMEN B

Damage or permanent deformation found

yes / no yes / no

2) Testing of the fabric's mechanical strength, stringers used in the lifejacket's manufacture, painters and lifelines

For this test, a device shall be used that indicates, or preferably records, the maximum tensile load applied before the specimen's rupture. The maximum admissible reading error of the applied tensile load shall be of + 1%. The grippers used to hold the specimen shall not allow it to slip and shall not cut or weaken the specimen. The use of flat grippers with soft surface is recommended. The use of serrated or corrugated grippers shall be made with caution to protect the specimen with pieces of soft materials like felt, rubber sheet, leather or paper. The grippers shall be wider than the specimen.

Five specimens shall be prepared for tensioning the warp (fabric’s longitudinal direction) and five for tensioning the weft (fabric’s transverse direction), avoiding the edges or margins of the piece used for preparing the specimens.

Whenever possible, the fabric specimen's width shall be obtained or adjusted by removing the warp (or weft) external threads (according to the test applied), so as to ensure that all remaining threads are kept full (the use of scissors or other instrument may cut or damage the threads near the cut).

The specimen shall be aligned so that the tension is applied in the direction of the warp (or weft) threads, according to the case.

The specimen shall be submerged in salt water (5% sodium chloride in weight, for 1 hour at ambient temperature. At this period's end, the specimen shall be rinsed in fresh water and tested within not more than 1 minute after removed from the water.

Disregard the tests in which the specimen slips, breaks or bursts at the grippers. The fabric’s specimen shall be 50mm wide and long enough to allow a distance of

200mm between the grippers. For the stringer test, the specimen shall be long enough to allow a distance of 200mm

between the grippers. The same care shall be observed when holding the specimen with

ANNEX 3-J


Mod 4

the grippers. The stringer specimen shall be submerged in salt water in the same way used for the fabric specimens.

Five specimens shall be prepared for the stringer test. For approval in this test, the ten fabric specimens shall present a rupture tension

load above 467 N. For stringers, the rupture tension load shall be above 1780 N in each of the five specimens. a) Fabric test: SPECIMENS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Warp rupture tension load

X X

X

X X Weft rupture tension load X X X X X

b) Testing of the stringer, painter and lifeline: SPECIMENS

1 2 3 4 5 Rupture tension load

Manufacturer certificates may be presented in replacement for the tests mentioned in subparagraph b). c) Testing of lifebuoys

The specimens shall be submerged in salt water for 2 minutes and then removed from the water for testing.

The test consists in applying a load of 90 kg as shown in figure 1 for a period of 30 minutes.

The lifejacket shall be approved if showing no damage or permanent deformation caused by the test.

Notes: _______________________________________________________________

ANNEX 3-J

Mod 4

Testing place: _________________________________________________________

Date: ___ / ___ / ______

Test result: ___________________________________________________________

EXAMINER'S NAME, RANK, GRADUATION AND/OR FUNCTION Annexes: - photographs

- other test records

- 3-J-5 - NORMAM-05/DPC

Mod 4

ANEXO 3-L

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: __________________________ MANUFACTURER: ______________________________________________________ CLASS: ____________ TYPE: __________ MODEL: _________________________

NUMBER OF SAMPLES: ______________ DRAWING No.: ___________________

FLAME (FIRE) RESISTANCE TEST

Place horizontally a pan with 350 x 300 x 60 mm of length, width and height respectively, in a place free from air currents. Fill the pan with water up to the height of 10 mm and then complete with gasoline until reaching the total height of 40 mm (water plus gasoline).

Hang the specimen in the vertical position through a device that keeps the specimen's lower part 250 mm above the pan's edge. With the specimen that far, ignite the gasoline and let burn for 30 seconds.

Then the specimen’s hanging device shall move it horizontally over the flames, so that the direct fire-exposure time is 2 seconds.

TEST RESULTS:

1) Specimen keeps burning after removal from the flames

yes / no

2) The specimen melted or fused when passing through the flames

yes / no

For approval, the specimen shall obtain a negative result in both questions.

Notes: __________

Place of the assessment: _________________________________________________

Date: ___ / ___ / ______

Test result: ____________________________________________________________



- 3-L-1 - NORMAM-05/DPC

ANNEX 3-M

- 3-M-1- NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: ________________________ MANUFACTURER: _____________________________________________________ CLASS: ____________ TYPE: _________ MODEL: _______________________

NUMBER OF SAMPLES: ______________ DRAWING No.: __________________

SEAWATER RESISTANCE TEST

Immersion start: day _____ time _____

Immersion end: day _____ time _____

TEST RESULTS Specimen A Specimen B

yes / no yes / no 1) Specimen's loss of rigidity

2) Cracks found

3) Dimensions changed (enlargement or filling)

4) Disaggregation / deterioration

INSTRUCTIONS:

Submerge the specimens in a tank containing salt water (5% sodium chloride in weight), for a 48-hour period at ambient temperature.

For approval in this assessment, the sample shall obtain a negative result in all questions.

Notes: _______________________________________________________________

Testing place: _________________________________________________________

Date: ___ / ___ / ______

Test result: ____________________________________________________________



ANNEX 3-N

- 3-N-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: __________________________ MANUFACTURER: ______________________________________________________ CLASS: ____________ TYPE: _________ MODEL: _________________________


LIFEJACKET DONNING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS 1st PART - DONNING TEST

Considering that lifejackets are generally used by unexperienced persons, and often times in adverse conditions, it is essential to minimize the risk of incorrect donning.

The persons selected for testing shall not be familiar with the lifejacket. Six persons shall be used, with different heights and weights: tall, short, fat and skinny.

They shall be dressed with normal clothes. After a demonstration, the persons shall be capable of donning the lifejacket without

external help, within 1 minute. The test shall be repeated with the persons dressing heavy-weather clothing. DONNING TEST RESULT

Tester

Mass of Tester

Lifejacket size

Time w/normal clothing

Time w/cold or rain clothing

1

2

3

4

5

6

RESULT: Satisfactory / Not satisfactory

The correct donning of lifejackets shall be checked, including the fastening of strings, buckles and stringers, all within the one-minute time.

After donning the lifejacket, the tester's freedom of movements shall be checked. If testing inflatable lifejackets, this checking shall be made with the jacket inflated and repeated with the jacket deflated. Note: ________________________________________________________________

2nd PART - RIGHTING TEST The fabric and covers used in the lifejacket’s manufacturing shall be punctured to

release any trapped air, ensuring that the lifejacket’s buoyancy is due solely to the solid material used to fill the jacket.

Select six (6) swimmers for each lifejacket size, and make them aware of the testing conditions, especially about fully relaxing the body in the water.

The test shall be conducted in calm fresh water, the persons shall use bathing suits, and the lifejacket correctly adjusted.

ANNEX 3-N


WATER SURFACE

The swimmer shall execute at least three gentle breast-strokes, and then relax keeping the head down in the water and the lungs partially filled, simulating a state of extreme exhaustion. The period between the last stroke and the instant when the tester's mouth is entirely out of the water shall be recorded.

The test shall be repeated with the tester expelling all the air from the lungs at the last stroke. In each test, the height of the tester's mouth above the water surface when in the safe floating position shall be recorded.

The lifejacket shall be capable of turning the unconscious person's body in the water from any position within 5 seconds, keeping the person's face upward.

For lifejackets class I, II and III, the user's mouth shall stay at least 120 mm above the water level. The average backward inclination angle of the tester's bodies in relation to the vertical shall be of 30º. However, no tester shall have the body inclined by less than 20º. For the tester's face/head, the average inclination angle shall be 40º to the horizontal. However, no individual tester shall present an angle of less than 30º. This assessment shall not be required for lifejackets class IV and V.

Figures 1 and 2 below show how the user's body shall stay.

AVERAGE INCLINATION OF USER'S BODY = 30o

MINIMUM INCLINATION OF USER'S BODY = 20o

120 mm

FIGURE 1 - Inclination angle of the lifejacket user's body

ANNEX 3-N


mm

MINIMUM INCLINATION OF THE HEAD

40o

120 WATER SURFACE

MINIMUM HEAD INCLINATION = 30o

FIGURE 2 - Inclination angle of the lifejacket user's head In the case of tests applied to inflatable lifejackets, this assessment shall be

conducted with half of the specimens inflated by mouth and the other half inflated by the automatic device. Tests with one deflated compartment shall also be conducted, and alternating the compartments repeating as many times as the number of compartments. TEST RESULTS:

Tester Tester's

mass

Lifejacket size

Righting time (seconds)

Body angle (º)

Head angle (º)

Mouth height (mm)

1

2

3

4

5

6

RESULT: Satisfactory / Not satisfactory

Notes: ________________________________________________________________

3rd PART - DROP TEST After performing the righting test, and without changing the lifejacket’s adjustment,

the six testers shall jump vertically from a platform or springboard, falling into the water in a stand up position from a height of at least 4.5m for lifejackets class I, II, III and V and 10m for class IV (working lifejackets) and V, if a sports lifejacket for high-speed activities.

The jacket shall not cause wounds on the user and shall establish, after the drop, a safe floating position including a minimum height of the mouth to the water level in the case of lifejackets class I, II or III.

ANNEX 3-N


If the tests are applied to inflatable lifejackets, this assessment shall be made with half of the specimens inflated by mouth and the other half inflated by the automatic device. In addition, it shall be made with one deflated compartment and alternating the compartments repeating as many times as the number of compartments. RESULT: Satisfactory / Not satisfactory Notes: ________________________________________________________________

4th PART - SWIMMING AND EMBARKATION TEST This test shall be conducted with six persons who, initially without the lifejacket, shall

swim 25m and then board a liferaft or rigid platform 300mm above the water surface. Subsequently, all the persons completing the task above shall be requested to repeat

the task, now wearing a lifejacket. For approval, not less than 2/3 of the persons who met the first stage shall also meet

the second one. If the tests are applied to inflatable lifejackets, this assessment shall be made with

half of the specimens inflated by mouth and the other half inflated by the automatic device. In addition, it shall be made with one deflated compartment and alternating the compartments repeating as many times as the number of compartments. RESULT: Satisfactory / Not satisfactory

Notes: ________________________________________________________________

Testing place: _______________________________________________

Date: ____ / ____ / ______

Test final result: ______________________________________________



ANNEX 3-O

- 3 -O- 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: ___________________________ MANUFACTURER: ____________________________________________________ CLASS: _ TYPE: _________ MODEL: ______________________


LIFEJACKET LIGHT TESTS

Twelve light specimens shall be selected and identified by numbers 1 through 12.

1st PART - TEMPERATURE CYCLING TEST 1st Cycle - Temperature + 65ºC Start day ____ time _______ End day ____ time _______

Temperature - 30ºC Start day ____ time _______ End day ____ time _______

2nd Cycle - Temperature + 65ºC Start day ____ time _______ End day ____ time _______


3rd Cycle - Temperature + 65ºC Start day ____ time _______ End day ____ time _______


4th Cycle - Temperature + 65ºC Start day ____ time _______ End day ____ time _______




6th Cycle - Temperature + 65ºC Start day ____ time _______ End day ____ time _______ Temperature - 30ºC Start day ____ time _______ End day ____ time _______

7th Cycle - Temperature + 65ºC Start day ____ time _______ End day ____ time ______ Temperature - 30ºC Start day ____ time _______ End day ____ time _______


Temperature - 30ºC Start day ____ time _______

ANNEX 3-O


End day ____ time _______





2nd PART -IMMERSION IN SALT WATER AND FRESH WATER

a) Immersion in seawater at a temperature of - 1º C (specimen removed upon the end of last cycle at - 30ºC). Use four specimens

1st Specimen Immersion start: hour ___ Operation start of the light device: hour Time it reached a luminous intensity of 0.75 cd: hour Time the luminous intensity fell below 0.75 cd: hour

minutes

minutes

minutes

minutes

((maximum 2 min)

(maximum 5 min)

(minimum 8 h)

2nd Specimen Immersion start: hour Operation start of the light device: hour Time it reached a luminous intensity of 0.75 cd: hour Time the luminous intensity fell below 0.75 cd: hour

minutes

minutes

minutes

minutes

(maximum 2 min)

(maximum 5 min)

(minimum 8 h)

3rd Specimen Immersion start: hour Operation start of the light device: hour Time it reached a luminous intensity of 0.75 cd: hour Time the luminous intensity fell below 0.75 cd: hour

minutes

minutes

minutes

minutes

(maximum 2 min)

(maximum 5 min)

(minimum 8 h)

4th Specimen Immersion start: hour minutes Operation start of the light device: hour minutes Time it reached a luminous intensity of

(maximum 2 min)

0.75 cd: hour minutes (maximum 5 min) Time the luminous intensity fell below 0.75 cd: hour minutes (minimum 8 h)

ANNEX 3-O


b) Immersion in seawater at a temperature of + 30ºC (specimens removed upon the end of last

period at + 65ºC). Use specimens numbered 5 through 8.

5th Specimen Immersion start: hour Operation start of the light device: hour Time it reached a luminous intensity of 0.75 cd: hour Time the luminous intensity fell below 0.75 cd: hour

minutes minutes minutes minutes

(maximum 2 min) (maximum 5 min) (minimum 8 h)








minutes

minutes

minutes

minutes

(maximum 2 min)

(maximum 5 min)

(minimum 8 h)

c) Immersion in fresh water at ambient temperature (specimen removed upon the end of the last period at + 65ºC). Use specimens numbered 9 through 12.

9th Specimen Immersion start: hour Time it reached a luminous intensity of 0.75 cd: hour Time the luminous intensity fell below 0.75 cd: hour

minutes minutes minutes

(maximum 10 min)

(minimum 8 h)


minutes minutes minutes minutes ___

(maximum 2 min) (maximum 10 min)

ANNEX 3-O




(maximum 10 min)



(maximum 10 min)

3rd PART - DROP TEST

Submit one light attached to a lifejacket , to a vertical jump into the water with the test subject wearing it, from a platform or springboard, hitting the water feet first from a height of not less than 4.5m

The light device attached to the lifejacket shall not suffer damage or be dislodged from the lifejacket, and shall continue working with the luminous intensity and flashing frequency (when applicable) established in the present standards, for the minimum continuous period of 8 h.

4th PART - ASSESSMENT

a) Device's performance:

SPECIMENS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Time for starting operation of The light device after immersion (maximum 2 min)

Time for reaching the luminous intensity of 0.75 cd after immersion in seawater (maximum 5 minutes)

Time for reaching the luminous intensity of 0.75 cd after immersion in fresh water (maximum 10 minutes)

Operating time of the light device with 0.75 cd luminous intensity

To be considered as satisfactory, at least 11 of the 12 specimens of light device used for testing shall continue operating with 0.75 cd luminous intensity for a minimum period of 8 h. The time limits to start working and to reach the luminous intensity of 0.75 cd shall be met by all specimens.

ANNEX 3-O


b) Flashing frequency (when applicable)

Conforming

Non-conforming

c) Jump test

Satisfactory

Not satisfactory

Notes: _________________________________________________________________

Testing place: _____________________________________

Date: ___ / __ / _____

Test result: ________________________________________




ANNEX 3-P

- 3- P- 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: __________________________ MANUFACTURER: ______________________________________________________ CLASS: ____________ TYPE: _________ MODEL: _________________________


FINAL INSIDE INSPECTION Purpose: Compare with the equipment specification and check for damage. SPECIMEN “A” - Tests already conducted with the specimen:

- Material Nature (type) Conforming / non-conforming _ - Dimensions Specified Conforming / non-conforming _ - Damage Absent/Present _ Notes: ________________________________________________________________

SPECIMEN “B” - Tests already conducted with the specimen:

- Material Nature (type) Conforming / non-conforming _ - Dimensions Specified Conforming / non-conforming - Damage Absent/Present _ Notes: ________________________________________________________________

SPECIMEN “C” - Tests already conducted with the specimen:

- Material Nature (type) Conforming / non-conforming _ - Dimensions Specified Conforming / non-conforming _ - Damage Absent/Present _ Notes: ________________________________________________________________

SPECIMEN “D” - Tests already conducted with the specimen:

- Material Nature (type) Conforming / non-conforming _ - Dimensions Specified Conforming / non-conforming _ - Damage Absent/Present _

ANNEX 3-P

- 3- P- 2 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

Notes: ________________________________________________________________

SPECIMEN “E” - Tests already conducted with the specimen:

- Material Nature (type) Conforming / non-conforming _ - Dimensions Specified Conforming / non-conforming _ - Damage Absent/Present _ Notes:

SPECIMEN “F” - Tests already conducted with the specimen:

- Material Nature (type) Conforming / non-conforming _ - Dimensions Specified Conforming / non-conforming _ - Damage Absent/Present _ Notes:

The damage mentioned in items marked with an asterisk (*) refers to cracks, tear, rupture of strings or tapes, swelling, shrinking, disaggregation, weakening, change in mechanical properties or others. Any damage eventually found shall be specified on the Notes line.

For approval in this assessment, all specimens shall be free from damage. In addition, the materials used for lining and filling shall be in conformity with the nature and dimensions set forth in the documents, plans and drawings forwarded for the approval.

Note: _________________________________________________________

Testing place: _____________________________________________________________

Date: __ / __ / ____

Test result: ____________________________________________________



ANNEX 3-Q

- 3- Q- 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

CANCELLED

ANNEX 3-QQ

- 3-QQ-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TYPE OF MATERIAL OR LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: MANUFACTURER: CLASS: TYPE: MODEL:

NUMBER OF SAMPLES: DRAWING No.:

DROP TEST a) Buoyant apparatus

The test consists in launching into the water from a height of 12 meters, in random positions different from each other, repeating the test twice.

For testing inflatable buoyant apparatuses, they shall be launched only once, inside the container as in normal stowage conditions. The end of the apparatus' painter shall be tied to the launching platform so as to trigger the automatic release device of the apparatus from inside the container and start its filling.

After launching, the buoyant apparatuses shall not show any damage impairing their performance and, in the case of inflatable buoyant apparatuses, the automatic release device and the filling shall have occurred normally. TEST RESULT: BUOYANT APPARATUS:

RIGID INFLATABLE

Damage found Damage found

Device operation

SPECIMEN yes / no yes / no yes / no

Notes:

Testing place: ___________________________________________________________ Date: / ___ / ______ Test result:



- other test records

ANNEX 3-R

-3-R-1 NORMAM-05/DPC



TEST OF THE SELF-IGNITING LIGHT DEVICE 1) Three specimens shall be initially selected, identified with letters A, B and C and submitted to the temperature cycling test as prescribed in Annex 1-F. 2) After application of the temperature cycling test, specimen A shall be immersed in seawater at a temperature of - 1o C and specimen B immersed in seawater at + 30º C. Both lights shall provide a luminous intensity of not less than 2.0 cd or, in the case of a flashing device, a frequency of not less than 50 times per minute with the corresponding effective luminous intensity calculated as provided for in item 0119, subparagraph a). 3) At the end of the first hour of operation the lights A and B shall be immersed to a depth of 1 m for 1 minute. The lights shall continue operating for at least an hour longer. 4) Specimen C shall, after the temperature cycling test, be immersed horizontally under 300 mm of water for 24 hours. If the light is an electric light, it shall be dismantled at the end of the test and examined. There shall be no evidence of water inside the device. 5) A specimen identified with letter D shall be subjected to two drop tests into water as prescribed in Annex 1-Q.

The light shall be dropped twice, first by itself and then attached to a lifebuoy as normally. The light shall operate satisfactorily after each drop. 6) A specimen identified with letter E shall be subjected to salt water spray (5% solution of sodium chloride in water) at the temperature of 35o C ± 3o C, for 100 hours. The light shall operate satisfactorily after the test. 7) A specimen identified with letter F shall be allowed to float in water in its normal operating position for 24h. If the light is an electric light, it shall be dismantled at the end of the test and examined. There shall be no evidence of water inside the device. 8) If the device has a lens, a specimen identified with letter G shall be cooled to -18º C and then dropped twice from a height of 1 m onto a rigidly mounted steel plate or concrete surface. The distance shall be measured from the top of the lens to the impact surface. The light shall strike the surface on the top center of the lens. The lens shall not break or crack. 9) A specimen identified with letter H shall be placed on its side on a rigid surface, and a steel sphere having a mass of 500g shall be dropped twice from a height of 1.3 m onto the case's center line. The sphere shall strike the case approximately 12 mm from one end of the case on one drop and approximately 12 mm from the other end of the case on the other drop. The case shall not break or crack, or be distorted in a way that would affect its watertightness. 10) A tension force of 225 N shall be applied to the fitting that attaches the light to a lifebuoy, as prescribed in Annex 1-J.

Neither the fitting nor the light shall be damaged as a result of this test.

ANNEX 3-R

-3-R-2 NORMAM-05/DPC

ASSESSMENT YES NO

1 - Surface operation at -1ºC after temperature cycling test: ................

2 - Surface operation at + 30ºC after temperature cycling test: ................ ....................................................................................................................

3 - Operation after 1 m immersion for 1 minute after temperature cycling test: .................................................................................................................

4 - Watertightness after 300 mm immersion for 24 hours and temperature cycling test: .........................................................................................

5 - Operation after drop in separate from the buoy: .......................................

6 - Operation after drop attached to the buoy: ………………………..

7 - Operation after salt water spray: ......................................

8 - Watertightness after normal flotation for 24 hours:

9 - Lens resistance to the drop after cooled to -18ºC: ..........................

10 - Case resistance to the impact by the sphere: ..........................

11 - Tension resistance of the fitting of attachment to the buoy:

Notes:

Testing place:

Date: / /

Test result:



ANNEX 3-S

- 3-S-1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4



TEST OF THE SELF-ACIVATING SMOKE SIGNAL 1) Nine specimens identified with letters A through I shall, initially, be submitted to the temperature cycling test as prescribed in Annex 1-F.

The specimens shall not show evidence of damage such as fissures, cracks, disaggregation, dissolution, loss of rigidity, change in dimensions or change in mechanical properties. 2) After undergoing the temperature cycling test, specimens A, B and C shall be conditioned at -30ºC for at least 48h, be activated and then operate in seawater at a temperature of -1ºC. 3) The next three specimens D, E and F shall then be conditioned at + 65ºC, be activated and then operate in seawater at a temperature of + 30ºC. 4) After emitting smoke for 7 minutes, all the specimens above shall have the smoke-emitting end submerged for 10 seconds at the depth of 25 mm and then be let free. All specimens shall continue emitting smoke during and after, for a total smoke-emission period per specimen of not less than 15 minutes. 5) The three remaining specimens G, H and I, taken from the ambient temperature, shall be submitted to the drop test into water attached to lifebuoys, as prescribed in Annex 1-Q. After the drop, the specimens shall not show damage and shall operate normally for a period of 15 minutes. 6) Three specimens identified as J, L and M, shall be conditioned at the temperature of + 65ºC and 90% relative humidity for not less than 96h, followed by a period of 10 days between 20 and 25ºC and 65% relative humidity, and then operate normally at this temperature. 7) Three specimens identified as N, O and P shall be submerged to 1m of water for 24h and then operate normally. 8) Three specimens identified as Q, R and S shall be submitted to salt water spray (5% sodium chloride solution) at the temperature of +36ºC ± 3ºC for not less than 100h, and then operate normally. 9) Three specimens identified as T, U and V shall be put to operate in water covered by a 2 mm layer of heptane, without igniting this substance. 10) Laboratory testing of the smoke signal shall establish that at least 70% obscuration throughout the minimum emission time is attained when the smoke is drawn through a 19 cm diameter duct by a fan capable of producing an airflow of 18.4 m3 / min. There shall also be demonstrated that the color of the smoke is orange as defined in sections 34, 48 or 50 of the publication "Color: Universal Language and Dictionary of Names”. 11) The normal operation tests mentioned above shall be conducted in waves at least 300 mm high. 12) A visual inspection shall be made to ensure that the device's watertightness does not depend on adhesive tapes or plastic envelopes, and that the device is marked permanently so its age can be checked.

ANNEX 3-S

- 3-S-2 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

ASSESSMENT SPECIMENS

A B C D E F G H I J L M N O P Q R S T U V X

Temperature cycling

Conditioning at - 30ºC / operation at -1ºC

Conditioning at +65ºC / operation at + 30ºC

Operation for 15 minutes after 7 minutes immersed at 25 mm and conditioning period

Operation after drop test

Operation after conditioning to temperature and humidity

Operation after immersion in 1 m water for 24 h

Operation after salt water spray

Operation without igniting heptane

Obscuration / smoke color test

Watertightness visual inspection

Notes:

Testing place:

Date: / /

Test result:



ANNEX 3-T

- 3-T- 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

TESTING OF FABRICS USED IN INFLATABLE BOATS AND RAFTS MANUFACTURER: No. OF SAMPLES

EQUIPMENT WHERE IT WILL BE APPLIED:

1) Tear The material shall be tested according to BS 4F 100 and the tearing load obtained shall

not be less than 250 N. 2) Surface Coating Adhesion

The material shall be tested according to ISO 2411 at the temperature of 20ºC, with a testing machine speed of (100 ± 10) mm/min. The adhesion value shall be not less than 40 N/25 mm. Note: For this test, a specimen may be prepared with a different thickness from that of the material to be used on the boat, so the test can be effected. 3) Permeability to air (Porosity)

The material shall be tested according to BS 4F 100, for high-pressure tests. No bubble released from the surface shall be observed during the test. 4) Resistance to oil and salt water

The testing method to follow for checking the resistance to oil and salt water, applied only to the external surface, shall be conducted according to BS 903: Part A 16 (see table below). The mass variation per area unit shall not exceed 100 g/m2, observing the established period of time for each test with the test fluid at the temperature of (7 ± 2) ºC.

Liquid No. 1 standard oil 2% Salt water Testing time (22 ± 0,25) h 336 h

5) Ozone resistance (external surface) The material shall be tested according to ISO 3011 and shall not show visible cracks after

an ozone exposure period of 72 h. 6) Abrasion resistance

This test is applied only to the external coating surface, following the BS MA 16 standard. The reinforcement fabric in the testing area shall not be exposed after 1000 operation cycles of the testing apparatus. 7) Adhesion resistance

The material shall be tested according to BS MA 16, and shall not show any shifting (displacement) of the adhered parts, after submitted to a static load during a period of 72 h at the temperature of (60 ± 3)ºC. The static load applied shall not be less than 215 N per 25 mm of width of the adhered union. The requirements of this section shall also be observed in the case of interaction of plastic tissues with other materials.

ANNEX 3-T


8) Ageing Tests The following are tests for ageing: a) dimensional stability test; b) folding test; and c) tensile and elongation test.

8.1) The preparation of specimens shall be as follows:

a) half of the samples shall be kept hanging freely inside a furnace at a temperature of (70 ± 1) ºC for a period of seven days;

b) the other half of samples shall be kept fully immersed in water at a temperature of (70 ± 1) ºC for a period of seven days;

c) for the dimensional stability and folding tests, four specimens taken from the material to be tested shall be prepared, each specimen with a minimum of 100mm2;

d) for the tensile strength test, 12 specimens taken from the material to be tested shall be prepared, being six specimens taken in the warp's direction and the other six in the direction of the weft threads. From each of these two groups, three specimens shall be tested in the dry condition and three in the wet condition;

e) the specimens shall be 50 mm wide and long enough for allowing a free length of 200 mm between the grippers of the testing apparatus;

f) the strength tests shall be conducted according to ISO 1421; g) the final result shall be expressed by the average of values obtained with all the

specimens prepared in the direction of the weft threads. Finally, the average of the average values obtained for the two groups shall be calculated. 8.2) The dimensional stability test shall be conducted as follows:

a) the specimens shall have their dimensions measured and recorded before and after the ageing. These measures shall be entered in the test report in percentages of dimensional change in the warp and weft thread directions;

b) the materials of which the specimens show any dimensional percent change over 2% will fail the test; 8.3) The folding test shall be conducted as follows:

a) the specimens shall be removed from the ageing oven. After 15 minutes at room temperature, fold the specimens consecutively in two directions parallel to the edges at right angles to each other so as to reduce the exposed area of each specimen to 25% of its original area;

b) unfold and refold along the same creases but with each fold reversed in direction; c) after each folding, press the fold by rubbing fingers and thumb along it; d) the specimens showing any cracks, separation of plies, stickiness or brittleness will

fail the test. 8.4) The tensile strength test shall be conducted as follows:

a) this test is conducted to determine the rupture strength and the corresponding percent elongation;

ANNEX 3-T


b) materials used for inflatable appliances shall have a rupture strength of at least 2.5 kN/5 cm of width and a corresponding elongation of not more than 30%;

c) the test shall be conducted according to ISO 1421; d) the specimens shall be tested at a tensioning speed of (100 ± 10) mm/min. A pre-

tensioning shall be applied before the test according to the material's characteristics, as given below:

- for fabrics of up to 200 g/m2, inclusive ........................................................... 2 N; - for fabrics of over 200 g/m2 and up to 500 g/m2, inclusive ........................... 5 N; - for fabrics of over 500 g/m2 ................................................................ 10 N;

e) manufacturing materials the samples of which present a rupture strength after ageing of less than 90% of the original value obtained prior to ageing will fail the test.

ANNEX 3-U

- 3 - U- 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

MANUFACTURER CLASS TYPE MODEL NUMBER OF SAMPLES: DRAWING No.

TESTING OF LIFEBOATS

In the testing of lifeboats, the mass of an average person shall be taken to be 75 kg. When weights are placed in the lifeboat to simulate the effects of an occupant seating in a seat, the center of gravity of the weight in each seat shall be placed 300 mm above the seat pan along the seat’s back. This requirement may be met by placing a specimen shaped as a parallelepiped 600 mm high with the width and depth compatible with the material's specific weight and a mass of 75 Kg, which would be the equivalent to placing the center of gravity 300 mm above the seat pan.

The lifeboats shall be submitted to the following tests:

a) Strength Test The lifeboat shall be of sufficient strength to enable it to be safely launched into

the water when loaded with its full complement of persons plus equipment and fuel. It shall also be capable of being launched and towed when the ship is making headway at a speed of 5 knots in calm water.

b) Material Tests The tests prescribed in this sub-item shall be conducted if the boat is built of

polyester resin reinforced with fiberglass (GRP). After the boat's prototype hull and canopy are laminated, the inspector from this

Directorate shall remove specimens randomly and submit them to a series of laboratory tests as follows:

1) tensile test according to ASTM D - 638; 2) bending test according to ASTM D - 790; 3) shear test according to ASTM D - 732 - 46; 4) inter-laminar shear test according to ASTM D - 2733; 5) checking of the fiberglass content according to ISO 1172, with 30% of the

specimen's mass in polyester resin structure; and 6) flammability test according to ASTM 695 - 76.

c) Testing of buoyancy under damage The lifeboat shall have positive buoyancy in the water when loaded with a

distributed mass equivalent to its full complement of persons and equipment subject to approval. The lifeboat shall also have positive buoyancy in the loading condition described above when filled with water as in a flooding occurred under damage on any point below the waterline, assuming that there was no loss of buoyant material and no other damage.

ANNEX 3-U


d) Overload Test 1) The unloaded lifeboat shall be suspended from the lifting hooks, and sights

shall be erected for measuring keel sag. The lifeboat shall then be loaded with properly distributed weights representing the fully loaded lifeboat with its full complement of persons and equipment for which it is to be approved. The average mass per person shall be taken as 75 kg. Additional weights shall then be added so that the suspended load is 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% greater than the fully load to be approved. The weights shall be so distributed as to represent the lifeboat's service condition, without the need for positioning their center of gravity 300 mm above the seat pans. Testing by filling the lifeboat with water shall not be accepted, as this method of loading does not give the proper distribution of weight. Some equipment may be removed in order to avoid damage to it, in which case weights shall be added to the lifeboat to compensate for removal of such equipment.

2) The measurements shall be recorded at full load and the overloads of 25%, 50%, 75% and 100%, as indicated below:

(a) deflection of keel amidships; (b) change in length as measured between the top of stem and stern posts;(c) change in breadth over the gunwale at the quarter length forward,

amidships and the quarter length aft; and (d) change in depth measured from gunwale to keel.

3) The keel deflection and change in breadth shall not exceed 1/400 of the lifeboat's length when the lifeboat is subjected to 25% overload. The results obtained at 100% overload shall be approximately proportionate to those obtained at 25% overload. For example, for a keel or gunwale deflection of 16 mm at 25% overload, the keel or gunwale deflection at 100% overload shall not exceed:

(16 x 2) 1.25

After removing the weights, the lifeboat’s dimensions shall be checked. No

significant residual deflection shall result. Such checking shall be made after a lapse of time of approximately 18 hours.

The metal-built lifeboat shall be submitted to overload by adding weights corresponding to the sum of 25% of the lifeboat's total weight and 125% of the weight of all equipment and the full complement of persons for which it is to be approved. The weights shall then be removed and the lifeboat's dimensions checked. No residual deflection shall result.

e) Impact test The fully equipped lifeboat, including its engine, shall be loaded with weights

corresponding to the total mass of the number of persons for which the lifeboat is to be approved. Skates or fenders, if required, shall be in position. The lifeboat shall stay practically in contact with a rigid vertical surface;

ANNEX 3-U


2) The lifeboat, in a free hanging position, shall be pulled laterally to a position so that when released it will strike the fixed rigid vertical surface at a velocity of 3.5 m/s.

3) It shall then be released to impact against the rigid vertical surface; 4) No damage shall occur which is capable of affecting the efficient operation

of the lifeboat and its equipment; 5) In the case of a self-righting lifeboat, partially or totally enclosed, the relative

displacement of parts in different positions inside shall be observed, in accordance with item 6.18 of Resolution A 689 (17).

6) After the test, the lifeboat shall undergo a sea trial to check the maintenance of its characteristics and integrity.

f) Lifeboat Drop Test

The same boat used for the impact test shall be used for this test. 1) The fully equipped lifeboat, with its engine, shall be loaded with weights equal

to the mass of the maximum number of persons for which the lifeboat is to be approved. 2) The lifeboat shall then be suspended above the water so that the distance

from its lowest point to the water is 3 m. 3) The lifeboat shall then be released so that it falls freely into the water. 4) No damage shall be detected which is capable of rendering the lifeboat and

its equipment unfit for service. g) Lifeboat Seating Strength Test

Each seat shall be loaded with a mass of 100 kg. The seating shall be able to withstand this loading without any permanent deformation or damage.

f) Lifeboat Seating Space Test

1) The lifeboat shall be fitted with its engine and its equipment. The number of persons for which the lifeboat is to be approved, having an average mass of 75 kg and wearing lifejackets, shall board the lifeboat.

2) The occupants shall be able to board the lifeboat and be properly seated within a period of 3 minutes.

3) The lifeboat shall then be maneuvered to demonstrate the possibility of its operation without difficulty and without interference with the occupants.

4) The surfaces on which persons might walk shall be visually examined to determine that they have a non-skid finish.

5) The standards to follow for the seated occupation are set forth in the sub-items related to transportation capacity of the present instruction.

i) Lifeboat Freeboard and Stability tests

The lifeboat with its engine shall be loaded with a mass equal to that of all the equipment.

2) One half of the number of persons for which the lifeboat is to be approved shall be seated in a proper seating position on one side of the centerline.

3) The freeboard shall then be measured on the low side, and shall be not less than 1.5% of the lifeboat's length or 100 mm, whichever is the greater.

ANNEX 3-U


j) Release Mechanism Test 1) A test load greater than the working load shall be simulated in the suspended

boat's hull. The safety system and its interaction with the lifeboat's hull shall not break before the testing load reaches the equivalent to safety factor 6.

2) The lifeboat with its engine fitted shall be suspended by its lifting hooks and released into the water by the release mechanism, simultaneously from the bow and stern falls.

(a) The lifeboat shall be loaded so that the total mass equals 1.1 times the mass of the lifeboat, all its equipment and the number of persons for which the lifeboat is to be approved.

(b) At each drop, the lifeboat and the release mechanism shall not bind or have any part damaged.

(c) This test shall also be conducted with the lifeboat in the light condition.

(d) The requirements above are also applicable in the case of a single drop. 3) The release mechanism shall be mounted on a tensile strength testing

device. The load shall be increased to at least six times the working load without causing the mechanism to fail.

4) The release mechanism shall be mounted on a testing device. A test load C shall be applied, determined as follows:

(a) a force equivalent to that necessary to tow the lifeboat at a speed of 5 knots. The force shall be applied to the hook at 45º to the vertical in the boat's lengthwise direction;

(b) a force equal to the weight of the fully loaded lifeboat, applied to the hook at an angle of 20º to the vertical; and

(c) a force resultant of (a) and (b), applied in a direction halfway between forces (a) and (b).

Force (c) shall be simulated in different positions of the escape hook, aiming at checking the performance of the release mechanism when on tow.

l) Lifeboat Buoyant Material Test This test is only required when inherent buoyant material is necessary to

increase the buoyancy of a lifeboat. 1) Stability Test Under Cycling Temperature Conditions

(a) Material specimens shall be submitted alternatively for periods of 8 hours to the ambient temperatures of - 30ºC and + 65ºC.

(b) This procedure shall be repeated for 10 cycles, in the following way:

* one 8-hour cycle at + 65ºC shall be completed within a single day; * then, on the same day, the specimens shall be removed from the

hot chamber and submitted to the normal room temperature until the next day; .

* on the next day, an 8-hour cycle at 30ºC shall be completed; and * then, on the same day, the specimens shall be removed from the

cold chamber and submitted to the normal room temperature until the next day.

ANNEX 3-U


(c) Two specimens shall be cut to check for possible structural changes. (d) The dimensions of all specimens shall be recorded at the end of the 10

cycles. The specimens shall be carefully examined and shall not

show evidence of damage such as: cracks, breaks, swelling, dissolution s change in mechanical properties.

2) Water Absorption Test. (a) This test requires specimens cut from the buoyant material, to be

immersed in fresh water for 7 days at a depth of 1.25 m. (b) The tests shall be conducted with the following specimens:

* two new specimens; * two specimens already submitted to the fire test according to

Annex 1-L; and * two specimens already submitted to the test above and then

immersed in diesel oil at a 100mm depth for 24 hours, at normal room temperature. (c) The specimens' dimensions shall be recorded at the beginning and at

the end of each test. (d) The results shall be expressed in kilograms, recording the mass a

specimen can support after (1) and (7) immersion days. The loss of buoyancy of the specimens shall not exceed 5%, and they shall not show cracks, breaks, swelling, dissolution or loss of mechanical properties.

3) Immersion Test (a) Two specimens shall be immersed for 14 days to a depth of 100 mm at

room temperature, into the following materials: * crude oil; * fuel oil; * diesel oil; * benzine from high-octane petroleum; and * kerosene.

(b) Two additional specimens already submitted to the test described in 0140 l) 1) shall be immersed in benzine from high-octane petroleum and then submitted to the immersion test.

m) Operation of Engine and Fuel Consumption Test 1) The lifeboat shall be loaded with weights equal to the mass of its

equipment and the number of .persons for which the lifeboat is to be approved. The engine shall be started and the lifeboat maneuvered for a period of at least 4 hours. It shall be demonstrated that the fully loaded lifeboat can tow a 25-person inflatable liferaft loaded with all its permitted occupants and equipment, at a speed of not less than 2 knots.

2) The fully loaded lifeboat shall be capable of navigating at a speed of not less than 6 knots for a period which is sufficient to ascertain the fuel consumption and to establish that the fuel tank has the required capacity to operate the fully loaded lifeboat for a period of not less than 24 hours. All the additional systems shall be running.

3) Maneuverability Test

ANNEX 3-U


The lifeboat shall be with all its equipment and permitted occupants on board and proceed as follows:

(a) perform zig-zag with the lifeboat moving ahead at continuous full power. Check the prompt response to the maneuvers;

(b) place the rudder amidships and the boat ahead at full power. Check the course stability;

(c) place right standard rudder (starboard rudder) and the boat ahead at full power. Check the lifeboat's radius of gyration;

(d) place left standard rudder (port rudder) and the boat ahead at full power. Check the lifeboat's radius of gyration;

(e) proceed to the actions of subparagraphs (a), (b), (c) and (d) above, with the boat at half astern;

(f) the emergency steering system shall be operated during the tests to check its efficiency and easy handling; and

(g) after the tests, the main and emergency steering mechanisms shall be checked and the test results analyzed.

4) Cold Engine Starting Test The engine may be removed from the lifeboat for this test. However, it

shall be equipped with the accessories and the transmission that will be used in the lifeboat. The engine shall be placed in a chamber at a temperature of -15º C for a period of time sufficient to allow all its parts to reach the chamber’s temperature. The temperatures of the fuel, lubricating oil and cooling fluid (if any) shall be measured and samples taken for observation. The engine shall be started four times. The first two times, the engine shall be allowed to operate long enough to demonstrate that it runs at operating speed. After the first two starts, the engine shall be shutoff and allowed to stand until all parts have again reached the chamber’s temperature. After the third start, the engine shall be allowed to continue to run for at least ten minutes and during this period the transmission shall be operated through its gear positions.

5) Engine-out-of-water Test If the engine is water-cooled, it shall be operated for at least 5 minutes at

idling speed under conditions simulating normal lifeboat storage. The engine shall not be damaged as a result of this test.

6) Submerged Engine Test The engine shall be operated for at least 5 minutes while submerged in

water to the level of the centerline of the crankshaft. The engine shall be in its normal position, with the crankshaft positioned horizontally The engine shall not be damaged as a result of this test.

n) Testing of Tanks This test aims at checking the tightness and structural integrity of the

tanks.

1) The tanks for storage of diesel oil and water shall be tested to a water head of 1 m, 2 m and 4 m respectively from their tops. The tank shall withstand the test without damage or noticeable deformation.

o) Lifeboat Light Test 1) The canopy external lights shall have sufficient luminous intensity to be

visible at a distance of 2 miles (4.3 cd) on a dark night of clean atmosphere, and work continuously for a period of not less than 12 hours.

ANNEX 3-U


The internal lights shall have not less than 12 hours of sufficient luminous intensity to enable the reading of the survival instructions.

2) In the case of a flashing light, the flashing frequency shall not be lower than 50 flashes per minute during the first two hours of the 12-hour operating period.

3) Temperature Cycling Test (a) For each type of light used externally on the canopy and inside the

lifeboat, 12 specimens shall be tested in accordance with the temperature-cycling test provided in ANNEX 1-O.

(b) After the test, four specimens of each type of light shall be capable of operating while submerged in seawater at a temperature of -1º C, another four specimens in seawater at 30º C and the remaining four specimens in fresh water at ambient temperature.

p) Self-Righting Test 1) The lifeboat shall be placed in its normal service position. The full equipment

and the full complement of persons and their positioning on board shall be simulated with weights. A mass of 75 kg per person shall be properly secured at each seat location with the center of gravity 300 mm above the seat pan.

2) The lifeboat shall be rotated around its keel to an angle of 180º and then released. It shall return to the upright position.

3) The engine shall be kept running or be equipped with an automatic shutoff device which operates when inverted and is easily disconnected when returning to normal position, allowing an easy restart of the engine.

4) The test shall be repeated for the light condition (without persons). q) Flooded Capsizing Test

1) The lifeboat shall be placed in its normal service condition, with weights simulating persons and equipment and without concern about centers of gravity.

2) The lifeboat shall be flooded with the maximum permitted water volume, simulating a damage condition.

3) The lifeboat shall be rotated about a longitudinal axis to an angle of 180º, and then released.

4) After release, the lifeboat shall attain a position that provides an above-water escape for the occupants.

r) Engine Inversion Test 1) The engine and its fuel tank shall be mounted on a frame that is arranged to

rotate about an axis equivalent to the boat's longitudinal axis. A pan shall be located under the engine to collect any oil which may leak from the engine. The following procedure shall be followed with the engine-tank set:

(a) start the engine and run it at full speed for 5 minutes; (b) stop the engine and rotate it 360º in a clockwise direction; (c) restart the engine and run it at full speed for 10 minutes; (d) stop the engine and rotate it 360º in a counter-clockwise direction; (e) restart the engine, run it at full speed for 10 minutes and then stop the engine;

ANNEX 3-U


(f) allow the engine to cool; (g) restart the engine and run it at full speed for 5 minutes; (h) rotate the running engine 180º in a clockwise direction and hold it at the

180º position for 10 s. Then, rotate it 180º further in a clockwise direction to complete one revolution;

(i) if the engine is arranged to stop automatically when inverted, restart it; (j) allow the engine to continue to run at full speed for 10 minutes; (l) Shut the engine off for cooling;

(m) repeat the procedure prescribed in h) but rotating the engine in a counter-clockwise direction;

(n) repeat the procedures described above; (o) rotate the engine in a clockwise direction through 180º, and stop the

engine. Rotate it 180º further to complete a full clockwise revolution; (p) restart the engine and run it at full speed for 10 minutes; (q) repeat the procedure described in (o) but turning the engine counter-clockwise; and (r) restart the engine, run it at full speed for 10 minutes and then shut it down.

2) During these tests the engine shall not overheat, fail to operate or leak more than 250 ml of oil during any one inversion.

3) After the tests, the engine shall be dismantled and no evidence of overheating or excessive wear shall be found.

s) Tightness Testing of Doors, Side Scuttles and Hatches 1) Doors, side scuttles and hatches shall be tested by means of a water jet

moving without concentrating on a single area, with a discharge pressure corresponding to 1.0 kg/cm2, directed to the gaskets and following them to their full extension, for a time of not less than 30 s.

2) No leaks shall be found, and the assembling conditions of the gaskets shall be satisfactory.

t) Air Supply Test 1) All entrances and openings of the lifeboat shall be closed, the air supply

turned on and the engine run at full speed for a period of 10 minutes.

2) During this time, the air pressure inside the enclosure shall be continuously monitored to ascertain that a small overpressure is maintained in relation to the external pressure, in order to avoid the entry of toxic gases

3) When the engine is shut down, the lifeboat's internal pressure shall not have been exceeded by the external pressure or elevated by more than 20 mbar above the outside atmospheric pressure throughout the test.

u) Fire-Protective System Test The external cooling system shall be operated with the engine at full speed and

the propeller disengaged. Conditions of 5º trim and heel of the lifeboat shall be simulated. The proper coverage by water shall then be checked, including the minimum film thickness all over the hull which shall not be less than 0.6mm.

v) Fire Test 1) The lifeboat shall be positioned at the center of a water tank with an area

greater than 5 times the boat's maximum projected plan area. Sufficient kerosene shall be floated on the water so that when ignited it will sustain a fire which completely envelops the lifeboat for a period of not less than 8 minutes.

ANNEX 3-U


2) The propeller shall not be turning, but the engine shall be running at full speed.

3) All the gas- and fire-protective systems shall be in operation. 4) The lifeboat's internal temperature shall be constantly measured and

recorded at not less than 10 locations, being at least five positions on the internal surface of the canopy and throughout the 8 minutes.

5) During the test, the flame temperature shall be measured. 6) The toxicity level of the lifeboat's internal atmosphere shall be checked from

samples collected simultaneously in several locations and at a frequency previously approved by this Directorate. Such samples shall be analyzed for the presence of toxic elements, anticipated as possibly produced by the materials used and their combustion products, normally: carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide (CO2), phosgene (COCl2) and trichloroethylene (C2HCL3).

7) Throughout the test, the internal pressure shall be measured and recorded continuously.

8) At the conclusion of the fire test, the lifeboat shall be in normal operational conditions.

x) Notes 1) The tests specified in subparagraphs p), q), r) and s) above are required only

for partially enclosed, self-righting lifeboats and for totally enclosed lifeboats.

2) The tests specified in subparagraph t) above are required only for totally enclosed lifeboats with a self-contained air support system and totally enclosed fire-protected lifeboats.

3) The tests specified in subparagraphs u) and v) above are required only for totally enclosed fire-protected lifeboats.

ANNEX 3-V

- 3 -V- 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

MANUFACTURER: CLASS: TYPE: MODEL:


TESTING OF RESCUE BOATS 1) General conditions:

a) the average mass per person to be considered in the tests shall be 75 kg; and b) when weights are used to simulate the effect of persons occupying the seats, they shall

be so arranged that their center of gravity remains 300 mm above the seat pan and near the seat’s back. 2) The tests for inflated rescue boats aim at verifying that these boats meet the following requirements:

a) have sufficient strength and rigidity to be lowered into the water when fully loaded. The boat shall be launched into the water and recovered from it with a crane, with all its occupants and suspended by its lifting slings.

b) have sufficient strength to be towed at a speed of not less than 5.0 knots when fully loaded. The boat shall be towed by its tow hook for 30 minutes, without deforming or being damaged.

c) have sufficient strength to withstand a lateral impact at the speed of 3.5 m/s when fully loaded. Simulating a pendulum of length (L), the boat shall be pulled laterally away from a rigid wall and then released, colliding against the wall at the required speed.

d) have sufficient strength to withstand a drop, when fully loaded, from a height of 3.0 m at the angles of +45o , -45o and 0o. The boat shall be lifted and then let drop freely into the water from a height of 3.0 m, once for each angle.

e) the boat shall be capable of operating normally with its systems and equipment after the impact and drop tests. The boat's general condition shall be checked and all its systems and equipment shall be operated.

f) the seats shall be strong enough to withstand a load of 100 kg. A weight of 100 kg shall be placed on each seat of the boat for 10 minutes, and when removed, the seat shall be checked for permanent deformation.

g) the boat shall be capable of towing a loaded raft at a speed of not less than 2 knots. A raft shall be towed at the required speed, which shall be recorded.

h) the boat shall be capable of traveling at a speed of not less than 6 knots when fully loaded. i) The boat's fuel tanks shall have sufficient capacity to meet the autonomy of 4 hours of operation at the speed of 6.0 knots with the boat fully loaded. By using a tank with measuring scale, the boat's fuel consumption shall be measured during the speed test.

j) the boat's compass shall be capable of working without interference from other equipment. With the engine running, it shall be checked if the compass shows sudden deviations or poor functioning.

l) the boat shall be capable of releasing the painter at a speed of not less than 5 knots, when fully loaded. At the end of the boat towing test, the painter hook shall be released.

m) the dimensions and arrangements of the boat and its equipment shall be such that its occupants will not interfere with its boarding and operation.

ANNEX 3-V


n) the boat shall have a non-skid floor. Wearing shoes of different sole types, the occupants shall walk on the boat's dry floor, and later wet floor, without skidding.

o) the boat shall present a freeboard within specifications, in the following loading conditions:

- boat plus equipment. - boat, equipment, engine and fuel. - boat, equipment, engine, fuel and the occupants arranged in such a way that the

freeboard all around the hull is constant. - boat, equipment, engine, fuel and the occupants in their seats. The several freeboard values shall be measured with tape measure aided by rulers.

p) the boat shall present a freeboard within specifications, in the following situations: - when loaded with 6 persons, all on one side, three of them seating on the floating

body. - when loaded with 5 persons, being three seated on their seats and the other two retrieving a 6th person from the sea through the side. The several freeboard values shall be measured with tape measure aided by rulers.

q) the boat shall present a freeboard within specifications, in the following damage conditions:

- when loaded with 6 persons and the bow buoyancy compartment is deflated. - when loaded with 6 persons and one side buoyancy compartment is deflated. - when loaded with 6 persons and one side plus the bow buoyancy compartments are deflated. The several freeboard values shall be measured with tape measure aided by rulers.

r) the boat shall be capable of traveling at a speed of not less than 2 knots when propelled by oars and fully loaded. Two boat occupants shall row through 25 meters and the time shall be measured.

s) the boat shall be maneuverable at several speeds. Maneuvers of berthing, running ahead and aft with the boat at different speeds shall be performed.

t) the boat shall be capable of righting by an automatic device. The boat shall be capsized, and then righted by an automatic device operated by one

occupant, within not more than 30 seconds, under the following conditions: - with the engine and fuel; and - without the engine and fuel.

u) the boat shall be capable to operate satisfactorily under severe weather. A wind speed of Beaufort scale 4 (11 to 16 knots), or five (17 to 21 knots) if using a high -power engine, shall be simulated for a period of 30 minutes. The boat shall travel for the 30 minutes, after which the inflatable compartments shall have their pressures measured for comparison with the pressures taken before the test.

v) the boat shall have a buoyancy capability when flooded, even in the fully-loaded condition. The boat shall be flooded with all its occupants, and the freeboard shall then be measured.

x) the boat shall be strong enough to withstand the loading of: (a) when suspended by slings:

- 4 times the weight of the full complement of persons and equipment, at the temperature of +20oC + 3oC, for 5 minutes, with all relief valves inoperative;

- 2 times the weight of the full complement of persons and equipment, at the temperature of 20oC , for 5 minutes, with all relief valves operative.

ANNEX 3-V


(b) When supported at two points: - 2 times its fully-loaded weight. The keel deflection shall be measured.

The boat shall be submitted to a detailed inspection of compliance with the SOLAS Convention and its amendments.

ANNEX 3-X

- 3 - X - 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

MANUFACTURER: CLASS: TYPE: MODEL:


TESTING OF FAST RESCUE BOATS 1) General conditions:

a) The average mass per person to be considered in the tests shall be 75 kg; and b) When weights are used to simulate the effect of persons occupying the seats, they shall

be so arranged that their center of gravity remains 300 mm above the seat pan and near the seat’s back. 2) The tests for inflated rescue boats aim at verifying that these boats meet the following requirements:

a) Have sufficient strength and rigidity to be lowered into the water when fully loaded. The boat shall be launched into the water and recovered from it with a crane, with all its occupants and suspended by its lifting slings.

b) Have sufficient strength to be towed at a speed of not less than 5.0 knots when fully loaded. The boat shall be towed by its tow hook for 30 minutes, without deforming or being damaged.

c) Have sufficient strength to withstand a lateral impact at the speed of 3.5 m/s when fully loaded. Simulating a pendulum of length (L), the boat shall be pulled laterally away from a rigid wall and then released, colliding against the wall at the required speed.

d) Have sufficient strength to withstand a drop, when fully loaded, from a height of 3.0 m at the angles of +45o , -45o and 0o. The boat shall be lifted and then let drop freely into the water from a height of 3.0 m, once for each angle.

e) The boat shall be capable of operating normally with its systems and equipment after the impact and drop tests. The boat's general condition shall be checked and all its systems and equipment shall be operated.

f) The seats shall be strong enough to withstand a load of 100 kg. A weight of 100 kg shall be placed on each seat of the boat for 10 minutes, and when removed, the seat shall be checked for permanent deformation.

g) The fully loaded boat shall be capable of towing a loaded raft at a speed of not less than 2 knots. A raft shall be towed at the required speed, which shall be recorded.

h) The boat shall be capable of traveling at a speed of not less than 8 knots when fully loaded. i) The boat shall be capable of traveling at a speed of not less than 20 knots with three

persons on board. j) The boat's fuel tanks shall have sufficient capacity to meet the autonomy of 4 hours of

operation at the speed of 6.0 knots with the boat fully loaded. By using a tank with measuring scale, the boat's fuel consumption shall be measured during the speed test.

l) The boat's compass shall be capable of working without interference from other equipment. With the engine running, it shall be checked if the compass shows sudden deviations or poor functioning.

m) The boat shall be capable of releasing the painter at a speed of not less than 5 knots, when fully loaded. At the end of the boat towing test, the painter hook shall be released.

n) The dimensions and arrangements of the boat and its equipment shall be such that its occupants will not interfere with its boarding and operation.

ANNEX 3-X


o) The boat shall have a non-skid floor. Wearing shoes of different sole types, the occupants shall walk on the boat's dry floor, and later wet floor, without skidding.

p) The boat shall present a freeboard within specifications, in the following loading conditions:

- boat plus equipment; - boat, equipment, engine and fuel; - boat, equipment, engine, fuel and the occupants arranged in such a way that the

freeboard all around the hull is constant; and - boat, equipment, engine, fuel and the occupants in their seats. The several freeboard values shall be measured with tape measure aided by rulers.

q) The boat shall present a freeboard within specifications, in the following situations: - when loaded with 6 persons, all on one side, three of them seating on the floating

body. - when loaded with 5 persons, being three seated on their seats and the other two retrieving a 6th person from the sea through the side. The several freeboard values shall be measured with tape measure aided by rulers.

r) The boat shall present a freeboard within specifications, in the following damage conditions:

- when loaded with 6 persons and the bow buoyancy compartment is deflated. - when loaded with 6 persons and one side buoyancy compartment is deflated. - when loaded with 6 persons and one side plus the bow buoyancy compartments are deflated. The several freeboard values shall be measured with tape measure aided by rulers.

s) The boat shall be capable of traveling at a speed of not less than 2 knots when propelled by oars and fully loaded. Two boat occupants shall row through 25 meters and the time shall be measured.

t) The boat shall be maneuverable at several speeds. Maneuvers of berthing, running ahead and aft with the boat at different speeds shall be performed.

u) The boat shall be capable of righting by an automatic device. The boat shall be capsized, and then righted by an automatic device operated by one

occupant, within not more than 30 seconds, under the following conditions: - with the engine and fuel; - without the engine and fuel.

v) The boat shall be capable to operate. satisfactorily under severe weather. A wind speed of Beaufort scale 4 (11 to 16 knots), or five (17 to 21 knots) if using a high -power engine, shall be simulated for a period of 30 minutes. The boat shall travel for the 30 minutes, after which the inflatable compartments shall have their pressures measured for comparison with the pressures taken before the test.

x) The boat shall have a buoyancy capability when flooded, even in the fully-loaded condition. The boat shall be flooded with all its occupants, and the freeboard shall then be measured.

z) The boat shall be strong enough to withstand the loading of: (a) when suspended by slings:

- 4 times the weight of the full complement of persons and equipment, at the temperature of 20oC + 3oC, for 5 minutes, with all relief valves inoperative;

- 2 4 times the weight of the full complement of persons and equipment, at the temperature of 20oC, for

5 minutes, with all relief valves operative.

ANNEX 3-X


(b) When supported at two points: - 2 times its fully-loaded weight. The keel deflection shall be measured.

aa) The boat shall be submitted to a detailed inspection of compliance with the SOLAS Convention and its amendments.

ANNEX 3-Z

- 3 - Z - 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 4

LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCE: MANUFACTURER: MODEL: NUMBER OF SAMPLES:

TYPE: DRAWING No.:

TEST OF BUOYANCY UNDER DAMAGE

This test is intended for inflatable buoyant apparatuses and tender boats. a) Buoyant apparatus

The specimen shall be set to float with one of the compartments deflated. Steel weights with 14.5 kg each shall be tied to the holders in number equivalent to that of the persons the apparatus was designed for. The weights may be rearranged, and up to two weights may be tied to one holder.

Apparatus depth: 10% of the apparatus depth:Freeboard at the test:

For approval in this test, the specimen shall remain floating with the weights attached. Notes:

Testing place:

Date: ___ / ___ / ______

Test final result:



ANNEX 5-A

- 5 - A - 1 - NORMAM-05/DPCMod 7

REQUIREMENTS FOR A MAINTENANCE STATION OF INFLATABLE LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES

I - DOCUMENTS TO BE PROVIDED:

a) Articles of Association, updated and registered at a local Commercial Registry, as prescribed in item 0502, subparagraph a) 4);

b) Copies of issued Service Certificates, as prescribed in item 0505 subparagraph b), and copies of the respective Log Cards;

c) Control mechanism of the serviced equipment, under the terms of item 0506;

d) List of the serviced equipment in the last 17 months, according to item 0507;

e) Station's floor plan, identifying each specific area including measures; f) Copy of the Manuals of the apparatuses intended to be serviced; g) Operation Permit; and h) ISO 9000 certificate required in item 0502 a), for the specific activity.

II - INSTALLATIONS 1) The Station shall have separate installations or even rooms for the

following areas: a) Administration; b) Delivery of serviced equipment; c) Reception of equipment for servicing; d) Painting; e) Warehouse; f) Equipment storage; g) Repairs and maintenance; h) Discarding of useless materials; and i) Safe guns for pyrotechnic artifacts.

2) Area specific requirements:

a) Equipment storage: - Allow the maximum stacking of 2 canisters or valises.

b) Repairs and maintenance: 1) Be sufficiently ventilated but free from air currents; 2) Be well illuminated; 3) No penetration of direct solar rays; 4) The ceiling height shall be sufficient to allow rotating the largest raft

when inflated; 5) The air temperature and relative humidity shall be controlled so as to be

kept constant. The relative humidity shall not be above 60%; 6) The floor shall be sufficiently smooth and clean to ensure that no

damage is caused to the fabric of inflatable apparatuses; 7) The floor shall be easy to clean; 8) “DO NOT SMOKE” posters shall be affixed on these compartments;

ANNEX 5-A


9) The accesses shall be fitted with door-opening indication lights, and warning signs for not opening the door when the light is on;

10) Be provided with component lists of equipment types A and B for liferafts; 11) Be provided with written procedures for the tests: Necessary Additional

Pressure (NAP TEST), Working Pressure (WP TEST), Gas Inflation (GI TEST) and Floor Seam (FS TEST), and also a periodicity table for their conduct;

12) Be provided with means for conducting the Overload Test of rafts launched by davit (stations servicing rafts with total weight equal to or above 185 kg); and

13) Be provided with a rack-type support for inspecting the floor seam of the raft.

c) Storage place for pyrotechnic artifacts: 1) The place shall be sufficiently ventilated and away from other storage

areas, power and heat sources, and areas of repairs and maintenance; and 2) Pyrotechnic artifacts with expired validity shall be destroyed or collected

by a specialized company. d) Storage for gas cylinders:

1) Adequate piping shall be provided for the transfer of gas; 2) N2 and CO2 reservoirs shall exist in this area; 3) A written procedure shall be available regarding the leaking test of CO2 cylinders. 4) A device for internal inspection of CO2cylinders shall be available; 5) If the Company does not perform recharge, it shall inform which

INMETRO-accredited companies do it, with their names and addresses; and6) A device for testing permanent hydrostatic valves shall be available.

e) Painting of canisters and gas cylinders: 1) The area shall be provided with a water curtain system or an efficient

exhaustion device; and 2) The compressor's intake shall be so positioned or equipped as to prevent

the suction of particles of pulverized paint. 3) Auxiliary equipment and tools

a) The following items shall be available and gauged (where applicable): - manometers; - hygrometer; - ambient thermometer (dry and wet bulb); - vacuum pump; - industrial sewing machine; - scale; - sanding machine; - means for conducting overload tests of inflatable appliances; - compressed air piping with filters or purging devices, or other humidity

extraction device;

ANNEX 5-A


- hoses; - adapters; and - overload testing weights (applicable for servicing davit-launched liferafts).

b) Availability of all tools, especially those specific of each equipment and including portable tools necessary for conducting services on board.

4) Spare/Replacement Parts The Station shall keep available the specific spare/replacement parts for its

intended services